A

TEXT-BOOK

OF

MECHANICAL

DRAWING
AND

ELEMENTARY

DESIGN

MACHINE

BY

JOHN
Instructor

S.

in Mechanical

REID,

Drawing

and

Designing,

Sibley College,Cornell
Member

of the American

University;
Society of Mechanical

Engineers;

AND

DAVID
Instructor

REID,

in Mechanical

Drawing

Sibley College. Cornell

Ithaca,

FIRST

FIRST

LONDON

Designing,

Y.

N.

EDITION.

THOUSAND.

NEW

JOHN

and

University,

YORK:

WILEY

CHAPMAN

"
"

1901.

SONS.

HALL,

LIMITED.

Copyright,

1900,

BY

JOHN

ROBERT

S.

DRUMMOND,

AND

DAVID

FRINTER,

REID.

NEW

YORK,

PREFACE.

To

properly
has

it

design

designed

of

solution

of

the

principles of

with

student

engineers

by competent

to

introduce

the

the

course

and

the

to

construction

their

best

machine

drawing

arrangement
and

be

to

mechanical

machine

in

machines

important

most

advanced

necessary

practical problems
the

familiarize

the

apply

to

found

been

for

students

prepare

and

to

proportions

details

recognized

practice of the

present

time.

essential

is

It

of

expenditure
design

should

post

what

has

To
we

have

and

in

details
in

feasible
In

which
the

end

with

been
the

of

machines,

to

out

present

no

before
old

economical

an

attempting
the

one,

information

to

student

concerning

direction.

same

has

what

is the

been

In

United

States

best

construction
rules

prepared.

of
and

various
formulae

it

machines
whenever

practical problems.
will

be

methods

drawings
time

and

work

using

this

drafting-room
most

and

an

possible

in the

show

design

working

all

present
to

that,

improve

done

the

addition

approved

to

already

labor

or

himself

attempted

practice

and

time
machine

new

this

intelligent study

to

would

text-book

found

the

in

in this

and

most

country,

out
with-

practically useless.

Up

use

be

latest

that

we

know

of

has

been
iii

92424

PREFA

IV

need

the

of

that

used

been

have

the

were

While

machines

actual

hands,

itself while
This

may

solving

the

machine

with

even

the

enable
The

student

of

for

the

problems

use

drawing

geometrical problems

knowledge

the

of

conventional

for sections, mechanical

projection in

the

.that is contained

John
In

S.

Reid,

the

third
in

"A

and

the

actual

tiling

designing.
machine

describe

so

it

well

Course

the

to

as

actually

is.

is

as

drawings applied

to

and

this

book

ink, thorough
colors

lettering,orthographic

angle, isometrical

of

students'

lines, hatch-liningand

drawing

in Mechanical

published by John Wiley

preparation

in

pencil

free-hand

in

understanding

proper

contained

in

modern

drawing

instrumental

of instruments,

follows:

of

to

as

trating
illus-

in

that

and

able

it in his mind

necessary

of

study of

are

samples

result

the

in the

of

in

the

to

drawing

few

assistance

handle

in

because

conceive

to

preparation

execution

and

the

with

convenient
and

students

collateral

examples

many

importance

construction,

and

design

secure

as

book,

problems

of great

believe

we

the

examine

they

that

so

in

placed

construction

machine

of machines

all

form.

present

to

because
means

any

sophomore

endeavored

felt
tice,
prac-

country

their

in

been

American

by

not

are

for the

have

we

this

in

but

course

given

drafting-rooms

our

fill

way

published

has

suit

to

extent

parts

or

exercises

the

best

been

need

same

purpose

authors

the

the

had,

our

this

preparing

Sibley College
the

for

have

modified

some

be

to

desired

be

can

to

best

in the

nature

that

books,

These

here.

as

they

similar

somewhat

could

that

above.

Britain, showing

in Great
there

explained

as

Books

States

United

the

in

published

CE,

drawings

"

in brief

Drawing,"

"

Sons,

New

for

this

work

all

by

York.
we

are

CE.

PREFA

indebted

to

thanks

the

Works,

the

Co.,

Our
pany,
Com-

Engine

Co.,

National

Tube

the

Co.,

Murray
"

Pool

Sons,

Locomotive
Roller

Hyatt

Co.,

Engine

Seymour

and

Macintosh

and

day.

Schenectady
the

Co.,

Pulley

American

the

Works,

the

Robt.

the

Works,

Locomotive

Baldwin

the

and

drawings

the

Engine

Worthington,

this

Manufacturing

Co.,

"

of

Buckeye

Packing

R.

Henry

Works,

Gun

the

Dynamo

Ridgeway

of

Dodge

Works,

Metallic

States

United

with

us

practice

the

to

Screw

Detroit

the
the

due

especially

are

best

and

latest

the

of

samples

supplied

kindly

firms

engineering

leading

have

who

States,

other

the

of

many

Bearing
and

many

others.

Our

acknowledgments

authorities
be

may

W.

A.

"

Kinematics,"

"

Constructor,"

"

Mechanics'

"

and

Designing,"
"

Steam

Proceedings

Association,"

Construction,"
"

"

Barr's

Steam

etc.,

the

Machine
and

Boilers

Low

Boilers,"

John

Boilers,"
of

best
which

among

Klein's

Design,"

Thurston's
"

treated,
of

the

of

many

Materials

Miller's

and

Drawing

the

to

Design,"

Machine

Peabody

Bevis's

Master

"

Unwin's

Furnaces,"

"

"Machine

Smith's

due

subjects

Thurston's

mentioned

Design,"

and

different

the

on

also

are

H.

Barr's

Reuleaux's

American

Railway

etc.

J. S.
D.

R.

R.

CONTENTS.

INTRODUCTORY

INSTRUCTIONS.
J. S.

R.
PACK

DRAWING

MECHANICAL

USE

OUTFIT

COMPLETE

INSTRUMENTS

OF

SHADE-LINES

7
SHADING

AND

15

DRAWINGS

WORKING

17

LETTERING

19

FIGURING

19
CONVENTIONS

STANDARD

20

CROSS-SECTIONS

26

CONSTRUCTIONS

26
MACHINE

ELEMENTARY
MATERIALS

USEFUL

29

CONSTRUCTION

OF

STRENGTH

DESIGN

30

MATERIALS

OF

TABLES,

36

ETC.

41

CHAPTER

I.
D.

SCREWS,

NUTS.

AND

R.

BOLTS

48

CHAPTER

II.
D.

KEYS,

COTTERS,

AND

R.

GIBS

109

CHAPTER

III.
J. S.

RIVETS

RIVETED

AND

JOINTS

R.

.-

CHAPTER

125

IV.

J. S. R.
SHAFTING

AND

SHAFT-COUPLINGS

157

vii

Vlll

CONTENTS.

CHAPTER

V.
J.

S.

R.
PAGB

PIPES

PIPE-COUPLINGS

AND

189

CHAPTER

VI.
D.

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS,

AND

R.

WALL

BOX-FRAMES

VII.

CHAPTER
I.

BELT

S.

R.

GEARING

238

VIII.

CHAPTER
J.
TOOTHED

S.

R.

GEARING

262

IX.

CHAPTER
J.

VALVES,

COCKS,

AND

S.R.

OIL-CUPS

27$

CHAPTER
J.
ENGINE

206

S.

X.
R.

"

D.

R.

DETAILS
305,

COURSES.

SUGGESTED

TERM.

FALL

Ex.

1.

46,

i,

3,

4,

6,

5,

7,

12,

10,

15,

13,

22,

19,

26,

24,

29,

30,

32,

38,

40,

39,

41,

34,

38,

42,

36,

38,

43,

34,

38,

44,

37,

39,

45,

34,

SiEx.

2.

47,

2,

3,

4,

8,

6,

5,

n,

16,

8, 9,

12,

14,

10,

18,

27,

24,

20,

29,

31,

33,

35,

SiEx.

3.

48,

4,

3,

i,

6,

5,

19,

15,

18.

22,

17,

13,

25,

23,

29,

30,

32,

5i.
Ex.

4.

2,

3,

4,

6,

5,

7,

",

M,

12,

13,

9,

21,

24,

28,

29,

31,

23,

26,

29,

30,

33,

51.

49,

5.
50,

i,

3,

4,

5,

6, 8, 10,

Ex.

2,

3,

4,

5,

6, 7,

16,

9,

u,

32,

18,

17,

14,

21,

27,

24,

29,

31,

33,

52.
FALL

1.

Ex.

2.

Ex.

3.

Ex.

4.

Ex.

5.

Ex.

6.

Ex.

73,

77,

86,

89,

90,

93.

70,

74,

84,

87,

90,

92,

94.

71,

75,

85,

88,

90,

91,

93.

70,

76,

84,

86,

90,

92,

94.

71,

77,

85,

87,

90,

91,

93.

72,

76,

84,

88,

90,

92,

94.

68,

54,

59,

64,

52,

55,

60,

65,

52,

54,

61,

66,

52,

56,

62,

67,

53,

57,

63,

68,

53,

58,

64,

69,

52,

CONTINUED.

TERM

WINTER

1.

136,

Ex.
139,

2.

Ex.
140,

137,
3.

138,

Ex.
139,

4.

Ex.

138,

136,
5.
137,

Ex.
140,

6.

136.

22,

19,

52.
6.

50,

Ex.

Ex.

138,

95,
142,

96,
143,
95,
142,

96,
144,
95,
142,

97,
145,

98,
146,
97,
145,

98,
146,
97,
145,

96, 98,
143,

146,

99,

lor,

147,

149-

100,

102,

148,

149.

99.
147,
100,

148,
99,
147,
loo,

148,

loi,

103,

104,

TERM.

106,

105,

108,

107,

in,

112,

112,

113,

117,

119,

124,

130,

114,

Il8,

120,

122,

125,

13*1

115,

117,

121,

123,

126,

132,

122,

127,

133,

128,

134,

129,

135,

104,

107,

103,

106,

108,

in,

113,

116,

119,

105,

108,

in,

113,

116,

120,

no,

121,

140.
102,

149.
101,

104,

121,

149.
102,

149.

106,

107,

no,

112,

115,

117,

119,

122,

DRAWING

DESIGNING

AND

INTRODUCTORY

MECHANICAL

drawing

consists

design

INSTRUCTIONS.

of

the

machine

applied to

as

application of descriptivegeometry
the

orthographic projection to

delineation

(modified sometimes

parts of machines

of

comparatively

is

intelligenceto

average

mechanical

accurate

it is

but

form

and

they

are

material
A
for

them

mere

copy

in

compelling
and

the

be

may

in the

moment

student

to

for

reasons

problem

in

study

the

and

of

the

lem
probbest

machine

functions

study (i)the

same

of machine

drawing

calculation

with

sions,
dimen-

the

give

parts of the
the

fairly

as

for which

strength

of

the

made.

with

design

object,representingthe
the

will

of

person

difficult

more

drawing unaccompanied

principle connected

some

and
that

different

accordance

they
of

the

any

machine, given the

dimensions

to

tions)
conven-

abilityof making

properly perform

to

intended

given

the

those

of which

of

the

and

draftsmen.
for

matter

different

altogethera

proportion

will enable

acquire

drawing

determine

to

simple

or

machines

certain

by

generallyrecognized by experienced
It

drawing and

best

or

by

form

(2) the

projection
drawing

modern

proportions

means

and

tions
propor-

illustrations
is

and

illustrated

some

not

of

design.
by

of

the

much
But

drawing

practiceand
different

of

of

ing
requirparts

from

rules

tend

to

and

of

problems

the

formulae, will induce

develop
It has

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

the

been

aim

accomplish

to

ability he

natural

any

the

of
this

student

authors

in the
in

purpose

tion.
in this direc-

have

may

think, and

to

the

arrangement

highest degree

possible.
The

following

is

essential

very

on

should

materials

and

notes

to

the

consulted

be
the

outfit

complete
before

results

best

of instruments

buying,

because

good

outfit

that

it
be

secured.
The

Sibley College

-"", the

board

for

and

same

J-" in

Eagle

one

(4)

The

for

junior drawing
The

shown

Pilot

No.

and
2

with

work

is

to

Faber,

for

suit

the

plain pear-

by

with

that

is

sophomore

work.

Length

drawing-board.
INSTRUMENTS.

"

I.

The

set

or

is all

head

(5)

medium-priced

pine

24".

T-square

junior

or

by

soft

furnished

necessary

shown

not

tip.

fixed

Set,"

be

18"

size

wood

IG.

26"

should

department

The

drawing.

Koh-i-noor

rubber

for freshman

T-SQUARE

22'*'

I.

4H

one

if

is

is 20"

material

by Fig.

6H

one

work

free-hand

Paragon, eggshell surface,

PAPER,

(3) PENCILS,
also

used

and

in

drawing

thickness.
as

in mechanical

for freshman

that

as

constructed

(2)

follows

as

sophomore

than

more

is

for students

DRAWING-BOARD

(1) THE
X

outfit

complete

Fig.

2,

is

recommended

of instruments.

"

Sibley
as

It contains:

College
first-class

IN

fixed

INSTR

UCTIONS.

5^" long, with

COMPASS,

UCTOR

TROD

needle-point, pencil,pen,

lengthening bar.

and

SPRING

Bow

PENCIL,

Bow

PEN,

3" long.
SPRING

3"

long.
A

SPRING

Bow

SPACER, 3

long.

FIG.

medium

DRAWING-PEN,

HAIR-SPRING

nickel-platedbox

(6)

length.

DIVIDER,
with

TRIANGULAR

2.

5" long.
leads.

BOXWOOD

SCALE

graduated

as

fol-

\V\\\\\\\\\\\\\\V
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\^\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
FIG.

lows

4"

and

2", 3"

and

J",

FIG.

3.

i" and

4.

i"t f" andf ", TY' and

(7) i

30" x 60", celluloid,10" long.

TRIANGLE

45",

"

(8)"SiBLEY

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

SET"

COLLEGE

FIG.

(9) GLASS-PAPER

PENCIL

black

00
(12)

"

red

"

blue

FIG.

of

IRREGULAR

7.

CURVES.

5.

6.

waterproof, S."H.
-

"

SHARPENER.

FIG.

(10) INK,

7"

"

Fig. 7.

Higgins. Fig. 8,

FIG.

8.

INTRODUCTORY

INK

(13)

Fig.

Faber's

ERASER,

(14) PENCIL
(15)

INSTRUCTIONS.

ERASER,

Typewriter.

Tower's

RUBBER

SPONGE

Multiplex

FABER'S

or

Rubber.

KNEADED

Fig. 9.
RUBBER.

10.

FIG.

(16) TACKS,

small

(17) WATER-COLORS,
Lake,
"

Prussian

Newton.

(18)

TINTING

of

pan

TINTING

(20)

WATER

(21)

ARKANSAS

tacks.

oz.

each

of

Payne's Gray,

and

sor
Wind-

Gamboge.

FIG.

10.

BRUSH,

Camel's

SAUCER.
GLASS.

son
Crim-

ii.

FIG.

(19)

Sienna,

Blue, Burnt

Fig.

FIG.

box

9.

Hair

12.

Fig.
Fig.

OIL-STONE.

No.

13.

14.

2"x

\"

10.

ii.

Fig.

12,

PIECE

(22)
ness

dull

(23)

PROTRACTOR,

(24)

SCALE

(25)

point, "Gillott"

(26) WRITING-PEN,

FIG.

Piece

(27)

of

with

The

numbers

mechanical
The

student

drawing
remainder

sophomore

and

24".

No.

303.

handles.
of

"

The

will

be

required

2,

3,

5, 6, 7,

of

junior

the

outfit

years.

16.

4"X4".

BRASS,

two

the

14.

FIG.

(28) NEEDLES,

all that

FIG.

15.

SHEET

following

18"

TRACING-CLOTH,

OF

Fig. 15,

16.

Fig.

"

"'

13.

SHEET

thick-

300,

5 ''diam.

silver, about

German

GUARD,

FIG.

No.

sides.

b"tn

on

T7roiF"

color

CELLULOID,

SHEET

OF

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

DRA

may

Outfit

Complete
to

8, 9,
be

for

purchase
10,

13,

14,

purchased

"

are

freshman

16, 26.

during

the

so

be

thin,

sharpened

to

|-",and

the

wood

neatly tapered

the

lead

upon

the

lay

do

the

wood

the

from

long taper

with

same

the

other

the

This

other

point

should

leaving

removed,

for about

pencil

both

until

sides
endwise

in

the

and

over

the

and

the

assumes

it

turn

side, using toward

on

then

point;

illustrated

now

lead

last

point

has

elliptical

an

way.

until

drawing-paper

that

the

point ;

sharp, thin, knife-edge

contqur

the

to

slightlyoscillating motion
assumed

fro until

and

to

The

knife

from

back

Faber's), and

manner

glass-paper sharpener

carefullyrub

outfit, and

pencil-lines,the

or

with

wood

It will

fine-grainedlead-

hard,

following

of the

carefullybared

be

should

with

in the

knife-edge

of

kinds

two

distinct.

(eitherKoh-i-noor

6H

than

for

and

clear

out

made

line

even

less

pencil,not

calls

this

that

noticed

first

will stand

drawing

the

that

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

DRA

then
the

be

burr

rough

smooth,

polished
left

ideal

keen,

on

piece

by

the

of

scrap

glass-paper is

pencil-pointfor

ing
draw-

straight lines.
such

With

of the

hands
that

be

can

point

draftsman

easily

better

blunt

point, because,

forms
draw

an

The

second
above

pencil, say
lines

when

in the
inked

even

4H,
not

line had

which

paper

and

drawing
makes

the

in

made

blunt
a

in

line, one

inked

been

pencil-pointis
it when

upon

required

desirable

necessary

if the
the

most

is

with
the

nation
incli-

line.

it very

to

This

difficult to

line.

kind
;

when

than

hard

press

groove

explained

All

advantage

the

draw

to

erased

much

is to

little pressure

but

of

it should

and

pencil-line is

be

thicker

necessary

to

drawn

with

the
a

broad
somewhat

line,

as

softer

point.

explain

the

drawing

should

be.

IN

before

erased
make

inking
of

minimum

UCTOK

TROD

INS

the

broadening

or

erasing and

UCTIONS.

TR

pencil-lines,so
after

cleaning

the

to

as

drawing

is

finished.

drawing pencil-lines,the pencil should

When

the

to

the

plane

of the

Lines

should

all free-hand
The

is

should

shown

be

in

"

Fig.

The

best

17.

The

FIG.

the

spreads
cleaning

blades

and

through

The

of

the

paper
The

point,

the

pen
of the

edge

making

ranging

from

60"

of

until

form,

for

right.

with

soft

lettering,figuring,

to

The

the

on

allow

to

opinion,
blade

upper

held

for

blade

hinged
be

in

is

with

thorough
therefore

plane passing

right angles

at

angle

an

to

the

the

plane

wear

dull

plane
of

the

90".

drawing-pens
the

in the writer's

spring

T-square

and

and

dicular
perpen-

angle

an

17.

should

paper,

best

left to

used

sufficientlyapart

sharpening.

unnecessary.

making

from

drawn

T-square

in

work.

Drawing-pen.

that

be

always

held

60".

about

to

the

and

paper

equal

paper

of

edge

the

of

plane

conical-pointed pencil
and

the

passing through

plane

be

student

will
has

in

time

learned

from

on

the

competent

IO

teacher
them

how

If
should

fro

the

the

on

The

"

the

to

The

blades

pen

the

lower

the

slightlyturning
handle
lower
the
of

little at

blade
upper

time

the

blade

in

then

clean

blades
The

paper.

bright spots

of each

still

When

position

as

pen

good
should

the

described
the

only

be

as

be

should

too

be

sharp,

of the

pen

should

for

holding

drawn

to

be
the

pen
from

wears.

left to

holding

and

to

and

over

the

fro,

the

be

grind
length

same

the

extreme

continue

seen

and

finish

the

leather.

of smooth

continued

points

elevating the

examine

and

piece

(No.

Having ground

bright spots

not

the

and

for about

vertically. The

pen

results

on

the

on

inking,

hold
with

grinding

quickly

entirely disappear,

they

the

give

to

position,place

completely

blades

and

to

purpose.

horizontal
it

and

it, raising and

to

oil-stones

stroke.

manner

point

time,

fingers

pen

blades

slightly,and

move

the

the

the

should

show

and

end

sharpening by polishing
The

nearly

with

are

until

the

same

opened

pen

similar

if there

grinding

be

stone

little,turn

points, and
the

the

on

draw

for this

best

ing-pen.
draw-

thumb-screw,

Arkansas

") are

in

the

at

The

next

right hand

blade

of the

means

pen

Outfit

should

in the

the

the

point.

Complete

have

to

other, the

plane perpendicular

of

handle

curve

proper

in

better

sharpening

the

upright position

an

oil-stone
the

lowering

in

pen

than

shorter

worn

of

method

the

brought together by

be

placing

has

blade

one

be

manufacturer.

explain

to

it would

his pens

the

sharpened by

DESIGNING.

AND

sharpen

to

It is difficult

of

WING

DRA

or

they

only

as

will

the

cut

long

as

the

blades.
held

in

pencil.

may

Lines

made

same

men
drafts-

Many

position

right.

the

about

be

varied

with

the

TRIANGLES.

THE

trianglesshown

The

10"

are

rj"

and

in

when

; the

use

(in

The

"

and

cents)

10

and

is brittle

rubber

made

are

used

but

are

become

soon

dirty

easily broken

more

")

of transparent

triangles sometimes

rubber

Outfit

Complete

than

celluloid.

the

oblique

lines

to

as

of

are

square

so

the

of

use

the

by holding
end

left-hand

the

free

hand

to

use

of
the

one

of

the

edge

against

with

scope

the

the

the

left

given

them
resenting
rep-

sponding
corre-

the

on

upper

the

hand

any

line.

and

making

triangles and

of the

explanation

is

T-square
the

other

triangles

T-

is unnecessary.

T-SQUARE.

THE

The

place

by sliding

further

that

evident

the

of

be

parallel to

perpendicular lines

drawing

lines within

other

with

then

parallelto

drawn

be

may

with

height

firmly

lower

the

holding

methods

angles

the

readily

can

Lines

drawn

the

first, and

the

of

of lines

The

of

hypotenuse

edge

number

be

can

given line,

the

with

coincide

when

drawing

90"

and

T-square.

edge representing

the

lower

the

on

the

by placing

and

triangles

the

with

drawn

15", 75", 30", 45", 60",

of

Angles

so

black

cheaper (about

little

very

Fig.

at

long respectively, and

The

celluloid.

II

INSTRUCTIONS.

INTRODUCTORY

firmly

head

simple,

very
with

the

drawing-board,

the

or

pen

pencil

in

and

is

left hand

leaving
the

drawing

plished
accom-

against
the

right

required

lines.
THE

If the

left-hand

edge

DRAWING-BOARD.

of

the

drawing-board

is

straightand

12

the

of the

and

perpendicular to

with

the

T-square,

made

by

be

scale, illustrated

arranged

was

It

College.
edges
f"

and

4"

2"

and

of

Drawings
e.g.,

"

full size of
the

an

2"

"

divided

small

Outfit

be

so

that

or

The

full

or

Sibley

in

boxwood.

size,

\\"

six

-g^", 1"
ft.,

and

shown

generally

are

make

twice

drawing

object

larged
en-

measures

the
inch

one

etc.

"

e.g.,

2"

12

machine

small

made

be

the

as

the

to

It is

drawing

measured

by
and

employed
can

use

"

drawn

and

the

full
ing
draw-

the

be

usually
made

standard

to

made
the

rule

part would

to

scale

would

represent

of
be
i"

'

GUARD.

in
to

are

is to

each

SCALE

often

are

of full size.

details

if

is shown

draftsman

scale

large

parts

object reallyis

and

equal parts

instrument

the

2"

made

size

ft., then

").

objects

where

THE

This

students

ft., 3" and

the

same

to

into

TV'

fit"),
Out-

Complete

scale

reduced

i"

of

made

object, then

machines

Large

they

as

squares,

The

"

of the

needs

to

i.e., the
is said

(in

if it is determined

Larger objects
"

these

to

SCALE.

follows;

as

very

would

drawing

size

set

be

may

ft.

Fig.

and

triangular

is

ft., i" and

in

suit the

to

graduated

are

COLLEGE

SIBLEY

THE

This

edge

perpendicular

triangles,or

edge*

upper

called.

sometimes

are

of the

means

left-hand

the
lines

and

the

parallelto

lines

paper

drawn
can

horizontal

then

T-squarc,

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

Fig.

prevent

16
the

it without

(in "The
scale

Complete

from

having

to

turning,
look

for

INTRODUCTORY

the
a

INSTRUCTIONS.

he

particularedge

needs

he

time

every

lay off

to

wants

measurement.

COMPASSES.

THE

about

When
hold

of

the

the

leg

pen

and

forefinger up

the

instrument,

line

clockwise.

down

pressure
The

the

beginning

The

thumb

and

the

lowest

point
will

compass

thumb

the

at

the

set

the

move

first

two

and

center

then

circle, take

provided

the

at

of

weight

lead

and

cannot

be

drawing

and

pencil
in

top of

draw

the

the

only

be

has

for the

emphasized
well

it pays

lead

the

is

compasses

to

time

for compasses

portant
im-

very

much.

too

take

Before

properly

to

and

keep

to

condition.

good

for

directions
as

handle

small

of the

always

same

into

sharpening

the

The

the

required radius,

the

to

of

arc

required.

commencing

them

the

to

an

or

joint with

needle-point

and

matter,

sharpen

circle

the

at

compass

fingers,guide
pencil or

draw

to

already

sharpening
been

given

the

compass

for

the

leads

the

are

sharpening

of

the

straight-linepencil.
"
DIVIDERS

THE

This

for the
distances
into

and

number
divide

to

then

of

when

into

held

or

line

into

with

the

these

three

divisions

same

useful
To

been

on

the

given

dividers, say

parts has

be

as

scribed
de-

laying off equal

divide

four

it will

manner

in

or

equal parts,

latter

in the

circles.

equal parts

of

one

three

step off these

the

be

SPACERS.

It is very

compass.

straight lines

on

any

is best

should

instrument

OR

simple

matter

it

12,

parts first,say
subdivided

line

4,

rately
accu-

to

remaining three-fourths

DRA

of the
the

WING

given line.
with

paper

without

AND

should

Care

the

instruments

and

such

arcs,

before

much

easier

It

them

over

should

ink

to

where

know

the

bad

cles
cir-

all the
be

drawing.

fully
care-

Many

joints between

for

using

will coincide

line

required.

stop the
vice

is

these

of

instrument

Fig. 15.

larger arcs

and

best, because
line, and

arc

it is
draw

to

versa.

in

as

the

curves,

that

the

shown

in

through points

construction, such

by

etc.

is for

and

IrregularCurves

wheels,

with

arcs

CURVES.

Set

THE

in

This

it, than

found

outlines, rotary pump

that

the

drawing irregularcurves

been

all small

drawing,

last.

to

to

cycloids, epicyloids,etc.,

It is shown

ink

to

first,then

straightlines

to

already

This

etc., should

of

inked

be

Sibley College

When

small

that

important

corners,

IRREGULAR

useful

the

drawing

is very

beginning

straight line tangent

The

for

spoiled because

are

the

circles,and

valuable

are

commencing

circles

small

have

ink

to

in-

straightlines.

and

arcs

When

are

holes

BOWS.

fillets,round

as

good drawings

make

to

it is difficult

SPRING

circles.

of

arcs

pencilledin

the

not

blotting.

These

small

taken

be

as

spacers,

THE

small

DESIGNING.

cases

curve

of

that

ellipses,

gear-teeth, cam

should

greatest number

as

Fig.

of

be

selected

points

on

the

PROTRACTOR.

measuring
It is used

as

and

constructing angles.

follows

when

measuring

i6

DRAWING

from

tance

Lines

Dark

surfaces

to

the

rays

of

plane
third

as

rays

object

an

the

shown

faces
shaded
Now

surfaces

the
of

reason

from
be

their

dark

surfaces.

defined

shadow

to

by
by

cast

location

shade-line

cube,
of

Fig. 18,

sight

those

another

in relation

situated

in front

19.
are

(the faces

source

as

Then

the

the

edges

upon
shown

of

with

which

the

different
in

was

the

edges a"bv, bvc"

fall the

by Fig.

jections
prosame

in

the

direction

19.

diagonal of

which

the

in space

of it, and

FIG.

lightcoinciding

they

the

projection

18.

faces,
the

projection.

if each

as

point

by Fig.

lines, because

the

of

one

light.

FIG.

of the

by

but

by

parallel to

are

necessarily to

not

general practice

angle,

of

plane

Rays

illuminated

e.g., suppose

"

DESIGNING.

Visual

darkened

object,

It is the

the

are

are

of

the

divide

which

part of the

to

per.

Shade

surfaces

that

it, so

and

another

AND

cube,

will be

shade

the

nated
illumi-

separate
rays

the

of

light)from

19.

lightbeing fixed, let

the

point

of

sight

INSTRUCTIONS.

INTRODUCTORY

in the

remain

the

through
plan
as

the

of

should

45" triangle we

practice then

Shade

lines shall

considering

Shade

lines

axis

the

above

plan

of

the
with

the hor., then

well

as

elevation, and!

that

easily determine

of the

volved
re-

that

so

direction

the

45" with

can

of

as

the
vation
ele-

the

all

to

projections of
each

fall upon

light to

viz.

in this work,

followed

be

applied

of

The

should

outlines.

other

lines.

will

be

rays

hor.

be

to

of

object,

an

them,

from

direction.

same

the

the

of

object

lines.

shade

be

This

the

angles

right-hand edges

and

lower

make

cube

of the

use

about

90"

of

light fallingin

of

projected rays

diagonal
the

angle

the

conceive

top of the object is shown

the

at

position, and

same

I/

outlines
The

have

surfaces of

shade-lined
the

lines should

Broken

of

equal

width

be

should

should

shade

shade
in

assist

lustrati
il-

until

studied

be

of

lines.

be

not

will

follow

figureswhich

that

times

never

revolution

principles; they

above

to

understood.

WORKING

drawings

Working
in

paper
blue

the

DRAWINGS.

sometimes

are

pencil, traced

made

tracing-paper

on

or

detail-

brown

on

cloth, and

then

printed.
The

latter

The

tracing

is

and

the

sensitized
In

paper

negative, and

down

on

prepared paper

is

from
is

the

accomplished

placed

surface

printing

prepared

is

process

in contact
a

with

negative

placed
face

face

is

in

the

to

follows

the

glass

in

the

placed behind
the

back

of the

sensitized
with

contact

exposed

as

the

the

ing-frame
print-

it, with

tracing.

surface

of

the

film side

of

the

light.

The

be

hatch-lined,
for the

to

the

using

standard

of time.

The

print has usually

although

this

is not

unfit

for

with

additions

take

favorable

the

of

made

made

of

thick
The

9"

In

it

can

made

it is

again ready

the

hands
intended

of

is not

always

is

the

the

with

It

best.

sideration
con-

In

24";

Irish
inked

of

the

size

the

they

are

record-

these

on

the

cards

tional
conven-

than
two

card

the
and

linen

with

tinted

is

Works

protected with
back

into

drawings directly on

18", 18"

are

the

hatchcoats

is

of

usually

shellac.

varnish

changes

on

quicker applied

drawing

of orange

white

is

much

are

of the

sections

or

them

Locomotive

it is

changes

establishments.

12"

varnish, while

coat

drawing

makes

sunlight

pencilled and

are

the

and

face

shellac

alcohol, and
nished

soon

make

to

probably

mounted

pasteboard

way,

The

The

is varnished

many

working

is

12",

drawings

usual

it

soda-water,

when

the

Schenectady

colors, which

given

ferred
re-

cardboard,

taking everything

large engineering

are

white

So

making

them

the

by

cards

lines.

unless

to

great deal

on

prints with

And

print.

varnishing

other

in the

and

it is best

made

new

system

used

system

paper.

mounted

well, and

quick printing.

to

and

be

to

the

on

look

seldom

require

tracing and

many

be

to

already

takes

dirty, oily fingers

made

be

can

they

but

cards

many

use.

Changes
true,

This

always done,

frequent handling

the

conventions

materials.

different

has

drawings

parts of the drawing requires

sectional

the

e.g.,

working

for

blue-print system

drawbacks,

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

easily
on

for the
an

to

the

be

drawing,

with
and

when

little
revar-

shop.

experienced
convey

removed

to

workman
him

all

the

working
necessary

INTRODUCTORY

information
him

properly

to

This
"

her

of

and

describe

should

be

to

the

on

the

object

which
be

plain, free-hand
Finished
if it is all to
to

write
The

be

number

left-hand

All

"

plain

on

the

should

drawing

The

form

best

the

drawing

large-

very

neat,

"

the

by
the

letter

f," and

"

title it is customary

be

may

initials

the

of

placed

the

at

the

upper

ately
immedi-

draftsman

of letter

Figuring.

"

with

drawing

care

mechanical

drawings
title

should

is that
of

labor
be

drawing,

figures

them

pear
ap-

which

gives

legibilityand

quires
re-

in its construction.

taken

and

the

should

itself.

maximum
and

or

make

to

as

practicaluse

of time

amount

Great

for

in

large

so

the

than

appearance
least

mechanical

letters

be

never

prominent

neatest

below

lettering on

legible, but

and

more

working

scale

for this purpose.

indicated

drawing
the

and

the

to

to

it.

Lettering.
be

the

sizes

all over."

finished

"

of

corner,

below

usually

are

not

views
The

the

reference

title of

is best

finished, then

print

or

letter

printed

parts

without
The

struction
innum-

these

give

course

possible, and

as

And

of

made,

able
en-

thoroughly explain

to

dimensioned.

drawn.

brief

as

be

sufficient

particular.

must

to

additional

conveniently

drawing

be

it may

should

and

is to

plans

finish

any

have

it must

in every

object

completely

dimensions
which

that

sections, and

elevations,
the

it without

construct

means

19

size, material,,and

shape,

to

as

INSTRUCTIONS.

in

figuringor

mensioni
di-

especiallya working

drawing.
To

have

is considered
of

drawing accurately, legibly,and

by practicalmen

working drawing.

to

be

the

most

neatly figured
important part

20

should

There

of

character

and

labor,

should

Drawings
be

of

part

doing

drawings

so

to

to

will

measure

any

him

workman
scales

to

time,

there

prevent

rule, such

common

that

the

made

often

are

with

measure

taken

are

in

dimension.

machinist

or

liability of

the

of

because

so,

to

pattern-maker

the

drawing.

loss

dimensioned

fully

means

of

reading

about

on

incurring

wrong

so

Indeed,

them.

mistakes,

be

the

for

need

no

through

money

dimension

made,

been

have

whatever

doubt

no

representing

number

DESIGNING.

AND

absolutely

be"

mistakes

Many

WING

DRA

make

to

which

ficult
dif-

are

''and

as

from

4"

ft.
CONVENTIONAL

STANDARD

Conventional
the
are

to

be

used

for

in

The
takes

for

color

should

be

To

tints

apply

the

the
section
because
and

parts

board
that

color

depth
to

are

it may

should

be

for

used

drawings

printing, or

to

finished

drawings

pencil drawings.
in

So

Great

"

much

less

that

time
color

the

to

obtain

cleared

of

easily turned

to

be

to

the

Before

should

care

tint

colored

easier
effect.

such

blue

for

applied

the

of
be

when

guish
distin-

to

than

it

method

possible.

tint.

artistic

be

and

drawings

kind.

any

drawing.

it is much

more

be

can

whenever

used

traced

or

of

tracings

hatch-line

to

pencil,

LINES.

on

used

nearly always

are

sometimes

placed

are

materials

ot

reproduction

Water-colors
and

kinds

finished

be

lines

section

different

SECTION

used

tints
an

the

taken

when

termining
dethe

quite light
and

color

instruments,
the

in

only

be

wash

even

drawing

should

applying

enable

be

student

the

softer
ing
draw-

etc.,
to

so

keep

INTRODUCTORY

the

color

bounding

brush

such

in

brush

the

again

the

the

that

brush

color

21

left, and

just

the

puddles

remaining
itself

into

and

ing
bound-

all
the

apply

leave

of
color

brush

The

paper.

an

the

sweeps

out

the

on

and

the

long

Press

fingers

keeping

touches

with

drawing

is covered.

with

it back

his

to

the

to

surface

little

will draw

tint all

even

section.

the

over

always

color

the

in the

to

brush

the

until

remaining

line

position

transfer

line

INSTRUCTIONS.

FiG.

20.

is

that

sections

other

and

collection

of

universal

almost

cue

now

in this

draftsmen

figure shows

This

"

and

countries,

hatch-lined

practice
be

may

among

considered

standard.
No.

When

rocks.
the

rocks

steel
of

To

i.

gamboge

wash

section
with

No.

3.

ground

wash

umber

crimson
to

form
No.

ground

work

India

To

for

the

blue

Marble.

thoroughly

Payne's

gray.

with

The

colors

burnt

umber

General
should

in

For

When

"

work

is made

conventional

drawings

When

"

graining
a

lake

should

little

for
with

Wood.

"

When

gray

dark

in

and

enough

colored

of burnt

burnt

mixed

Payne's

light wash

is then

and

be

color.

ground

the

colored,

the

made

Gillott

175

stone

made

Convention

printing,

colored,

each

and

wet

with

to

for
a

o"

made

colored

equal quantities and

contrast

be

left is the

little crimson

for

and

ground

Chestnut.

for

wall

is added.

is made

added

the

tracing
ink

tracings.

for

gamboge

in

as

drawing

umber.

of water

sufficient

4.

with

of

section

color,

of Prussian

of

dish,
lake

colored

Convention

is used.

separate

shown

shaded

Convention

2.

streaked

without

burnt

or

blended

whole

used

For

pen.

No.

right is

simply

are

representation
a

the

the

sienna.

22

DRA

WING

AND

DESIGNING.

24

DRA

metal, Muntz

bronze
dash
is

lines and

Nos.

of

13-20.

numbers

plainly given

the

some

convenient

than

men

place

well

as

the

21.

dashes

the

of

of

than

exceeding -fa"
Line

The

pointpaths.
the

hidden

should

of

The

the

drawing.

the

body

should

This

of

lines

structio
in-

parts
and

iron

their

initials in
This

does

experienced

trifle
and

the

what
some-

should

drawing,

always
the

and

spaces

uniform, quite small,

This

line

be

-J". The

exceed

inked

"

depending

width

always

should

short

of

of short

made

21.

all be

Motion.

dashes

be

sectional

to

be

both

The

never

line is

line, just
course

further

for cast
or

should

line

width,

and

(2)

for these

kinds:

should

dashes

the

between

used

convenient

This

"

length

dash

the

tint

LINES.

FIG.

length

that

parts themselves.

more

four

Line.

size

slightlyless

color

tints

all the

materials

the

on

are

uniform

of
on

be

There

Hidden

(i) The

lines,

method.

other

"

The

figure

ilne like that

CONVENTIONAL

FlG.

full

superfluous.

is it any

nor

the

in

different

the

of

names

look

of the

color

and

will Crosshatch

and

space

mark

not

be

to

draftsmen

uniform

lines

section

seem

Sometimes

width

uniform.

all be

should

The

so

are

The

etc.

gamboge.

"

would

with

metal,

spaces

light wash

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

made

longer
uniform.

than

in with
is

used

shorter
dots.

black
to

than
The

never

ink.

indicate
those

of

spaces

TROD

IN

'(3)Center
of

machines

UCTOR

Lines.

fine

as

possible,but

line

inked

should

be

made

(4)

Dimension
in

made

are

with

black

color

In

Colored

should

lines

fine

as

as

and

the

black-

short

two

ones

line should

center

much

lines

are

neater

used.

used
when

Colored

lines

that

22.

"

the

Breaks

thing

are

is

be

it is

fine

made
when

should

and

"

possible to

These

lines

short

one

continuous

wherever

dash

blue

lines.

feasible, because

they

they give

the
never

the

drawing

conventional
be

black

broken.

BREAKS.

CONVENTIONAL

FlG.

dash

long

than

appearance

Section.

of

should

they
be

Line

fine

and

quickly drawn

so

and

Lines

alternately.

line and

When

it.

make

are

red

continuous

and
the

used

are

parts

continuous

reproductions
dash

narrow

inks

colored

alternately. When
be

long

for

and
lines.

center

drawn

be

may

drawings

on

machines

of

their

about

lines

these

UCTIONS.

drawings

symmetrical

are

pencilinga drawing
as

Most

"

INSTR

used

in

drawings

actually longer

FIG.

22.

than

sometimes
it is drawn,

to

cate
indisome-

26

DRA

times

show

to

the

AND

shape

Those

material.

WING

of
in

given

DESIGNING.

the

cross-section

Fig.

show

22

the kind

and

the

usual

of

practice.

CROSS-SECTIONS.

FlG.
other

23.

similar

through
should
the

of the

made

be

required
or

shown

as

the

drawn

is

red

two

same

included

as

and

2,

of the

in

by

arms

of

quadrant

one

conventional

line,viz., a long

center

23.

alternatelyor

ones

No.

zz

hub

and

fine continuous

line.

The
same

dimension

alternatelyor

points of

the

the

Constructions.
formed

by

line, viz.,

one

as

be

shown

will

To

draw

plane cutting an

the

long

dash

blue

line.

made
at

they
curve

bottom

or

No.

referred

be

figuresin which
"

root

fine continuous

teeth,

conventions

with

the

gear-teethshould

of the

Other

(d] and

line

addendum

as

dash

the

short

very

rim

working drawings

usuallyshown

FIG.

and

the

and

In

of teeth

balance

the

number

only

Cross-sections
2.

or

cutting-plane passes

No.

xx

No.

lines, e.g., the pitch line the

dash

then

at

at AA

pulley,gear-wheel

the

and

arms,

shown

as

of

spoke simply outlined.

gear-wheels only
need

is

spokes

sectioned,

or

be

cross-section

object

one

be

arm

may

When

"

of

and
The

(b)the
short

one

vation
ele-

end

by projecting only
2.

to

are

line

in

the

text

nected
con-

illustrated.
intersection

irregular surface

that

of revolution.

is

INSTRUCTIONS.

INTRODUCTORY

Figs.

show

25
the

where

ends

rod

and

24

examples
/

curve

is

FIG.

the

flat stub

part of the

with

end

the

with

the

equal parts
line

center

CD

by

engine connectingthe

intersection

of

24.

of

surface

revolution

of the

turned

FIG.

of

of

rod.
1

Divide

formed

2J

CD.

draw

line

AB,

and

through

Figs.

to

24

them
the

Through

horizontals

25.

25,

into

describe

arcs

and

the

curve

number

cutting
of

intersections

intersect

any

these
or

the
arcs

fillet G.

28

DRA

Through

the

the

from

intersections

divisions

horizontals

intersections

intersect

to

points

are

in

the
the

/.

curve

The
the

perpendiculars and

draw

draw

latter

these

perpendiculars;

on

AB

on

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

curve

be

can

found

in

similar

shown

way

as

FIG.

27.

by

figure.
B

FIG.

of

26.

To

draw

the

projectionsof

3"

diam.

and

f" pitch.

Begin by drawing
on

and

each
6D.

off the

side

of

Draw

pitch

the

it the
A6

the

V-threaded

line

center

radius

of

bottom

J", beginning

the

of the
at

the

screw

and

its nut

Cy Fig. 26, and

screw

ij".

screw,

and

point

A.

on

lay

off

Draw

AB

AB

step

INSTRUCTIONS.

INTRODUCTORY

pitch

f",

the

intersecting at
At

the

the

top

"

these
the

into

shown
and
of

and

it will

have

and

of

of

points

intersection

which

doing work,
operation,

such

order
a

the

members

perform
same

to

motion

time

their

it

of

Set"

is

functions

most

necessary
and
in

pleasing

as

threads

threads.
with

the

also

Divide

divisions

these
the

in

the
of

radii

pitch Pinto

points

partly

helices

as

in section
the

Through

shown,

points
using

Irregular Curves.

DESIGN.

H.

John

for

"a
and

energy

arranged that,

so

are

is

Barr,

modifying

involves

in

tive,
definite, rela-

others."
desirable
to

best

results

give

proportion
the

of the

of the

other

Prof.

of the
the

form

and

member

any

elevation

of which
of

obtain

present

just found,

respectively.

screw.

curves

to

threads

Through

an

bodies

motion

it such

pleted
com-

pitches

many

semicircles

two

thread

the

as

bottom

MACHINE

resistant

structure

composing

draw

fit the

the

of

the

has

the

equal parts

according

constrained
In

"Sibley College

combination

the

shows

to

draw

machine,

thread

the

T-square

ELEMENTARY

half

perpendicularly

the

of

intersecting each

nut

the

risen

equal parts.

pers.

of

section

distance

step off

6D

on

of

bottom
number

any

3 of the

of

line A6

on

by Fig. 26,
a

No.

point

hors.

draw

points

number

same

point

30" triangleand

the

with

draw

the

the

From

desired.

be

off

point 6"

the

from

lay

pitch, viz., f".

the

half

Then
may

revolution

point

when

because

half
distance

the

from

6D

line

On

CQ

as

the
will

to

designing

several
enable

possible

appearance

in

way

the

and

bodies
them

to

at

the

experienced

And,

eye.

of material
The

it

moreover,

results

desired

should

DESIGNING.

must

not

be

with

The
the

of

will

machine

forces

the

similar

due

regard

several

to

these

economy

determined

be

may

in many
and

intuition.

calculated
these

cases

the
of

practice

largely upon

abilityor

parts

but

known,

approved

most

probably depend
his natural

and

the

are

accurately

be

cannot

upon

of

proportion

opposing

that

forgotten

construction.

and

form

sought

be

designer's experience

the

designer

the

forces

rely

must

had

past

if

under

conditions.

USED

MATERIALS

The
be

AND

DRAWING

30

MACHINE

IN

principalmaterials

divided

three

into

in

used

machine

viz.

heads,

construction

Cast

Metals,

may

Wrought

Wood.

Metals, and

CAST

the

Among
construction

cast

are

METALS.

metals

cast

copper-bronze

brass,

CONSTRUCTION.

the

important

more

malleable

iron,

iron,

cast

gun-metal,

or

in

machine

steel,

cast

phosphor-bronze,

and

aluminum.
Cast

whitest

its class
The
are

more

weakest

cupola.

"

used

are

gray

The

Iron.

gray

irons

are

when
used

not

in

ways

and

iron

cast

machine

is used

like

and

three

of

construction.
the

others

of

iron.

wrought
do

of white

hard

is very

making

fluid
and

different

in

iron

for

kinds

Three

melt

melted.

only

as

The
for

readily as
grayest

mixing

with

the

white, but

irons

others

are

in

the
the

32

DRAWING

Malleable
in

Castings

suitable

furnace

at

is

they
like

is

Steel

Cast
in

is

Brass

of

composition

brass

is

of

in

thirty hours

to

the

of machines,

or

such

casting;

castings can

broken
into

casting
because
of

and

it

because

be

worked

of

blister-

weld.

used,

tough,

red

powdered
keeping

of

size

Malleable

and

much

and

cheap, strong,

two

by melting

made

very

from

light parts

will not

ing
gray-iron cast-

it with

iron, and

the

upon

crucible

closed

for

heat

strong.

iron, but

wrought

steel

and

tough

are

of

for small

valuable

castings are

by putting

covering

oxide

an

longer, depending

even

pieces
ingots.

it is easy
color.

good

to

copper

of

work,

to

The

is

usual

zinc, with

times
some-

little lead* added.

is

Metal

Muntz
2

and

bright-red

made

are

box

which

hematite,

DESIGNING.

AND

It

of zinc.

brass

rolled

be

can

of

composition
when

forged

or

3
hot

parts copper
and

to

is used

in

the

Pure

"

sound

castings

brown

color

can

be

from

and

of

iron

corrosive
with

small

of

malleable

rolled, and

iron

cooling, while

but

steel

and

only

can

copper

be

of

of water.

Copper

has

ductile

when

hot

of

is

or

to
a

phorus
phosobtain

reddishIt

pure.

cold; joints

difficult., The

by heating

annealed

wooden

because

it is difficult

welding

is effected

steel

addition

when

forged

brazing,

by

and

sheathing
or

action

alone.

copper

is very

united

annealing

place

copper

hammered,

be

the

for

fairlygood castings, but

makes

can

sheets

nuts,

the

withstand

ability to
Copper.

and

takes

often

vessels, and
its

bolts

of

shape

slow

and

by heating

and

quick cooling.
Bronze
9

or

Gun-metal.

parts of copper

to

"

of

The

tin.

best
For

composition

is made

bearings designed

to

of
sus-

'INTRODUCTORY

tain

great

the

pressure

hard

very

bronze

tin is increased

of

proportion

INSTRUCTIONS.

33

is often

to

parts with

14

in which

used,
86

of

parts

copper.

Phosphor-bronze.
2%

4# of phosphorus

to

in

things

many

axle-bearings
Metal.

Babbitt

quite largely

together, and
of
while

twice

the

8, and

of

ductile, and
for

process

discovered

in

of

real

tin

This

"

is

alloy

tin

and

very

consist

Wrought

of

Iron

and

since

It is

easily melted

and

the

irons

white
in

large

cast

squeezing
puddled

and
bars.

then

iron

its

copper

with

bluish

tint.

cheapness

production

has

was

been

non-corrosive.

strong

called

It

puddled

is

Iron

the

is taken
and

rolled
bars

are

not

It is made

this

from

from

latter's

of the

most

qualities.
metal

white

tough.

and

blooms,
and

steel of various

and

by abstracting

hammering
The

bearings

lining is

comparative

Malleable

is very

masses

the

to

tion
addi-

an

METALS.

puddling-furnace.

spongy

with

of the

color

thoroughly

wrought
or

is

light metal, soft, malleable,

it with

WROUGHT

These

composition

is melted

composition

is used

8, tin 24, melted

applied

silvery-white

1890,

Its

that

96.

producing

rapidly increasing.

this

using

weight

So

antimony

metal

parts, antimony

copper

its

molten.

soft white

pump-rods,

as

wearing qualities.

lining shaft-bearings.

before

Aluminum.
and

for

is

for

tive
quite largelyfor locomo-

excellent

This

"

follows:

usually as

shows

and

used

from

It is used

steel, such

and

iron

by adding

bronze.

common

it is also

is made

alloy

the

to

of

place

ship-propellers,etc.

4,

This

"

furnace

bon
car-

in

shingled by repeated
into

what

then

cut

is known
into

as

short

34

DRAWING

and

pieces
rolled
of
in the

of

what

same

way

makes

iron

1500"

is* that

hardened

is

carbon
be

or

hardened

from

are

and

Bessemer

the

pure

iron.

which
then

is

Steel

the

carbon
To
a

together

the

iron,
on

the

of

in

and

of

will

case-

surrounded

of

potash,

absorb

converted

much

be

to

heated

carbon, and
iron

surface

very

piece

receptacle

wrought

iron

by
or

any

about

to

of

some

steel, which

into

by adding
of

some

the

this:

the
can

little carbon

its carbon.

Bessemer,

There

Siemens-Martin,

in the
this

the

iron

cast

of

cast

hearth

of

air

is burnt

certain

is cast

into

is made
iron

of

and

is

forced.

steel

by

into
In

leaving

out,

and

iron

cast

quantity

iron, carbon,

Steel
or

blast

is added

metal

melted

by pouring

which

compound

molten

cast

of

temperature

in water.

is made

Siemens-Martin
and

property

processes.

through

converter

nature

links, guides, etc., of

follows:

be

it and

doing

cementation

way

at

the

as

by extracting

of

ways

rolled

its fibrous

hardening

suitable

from

iron

cast

ties
quali-

and

wearing qualities are

as

by immersing
is made

three

their

wrought

surrounding

Steel

is

is rich

the

when

heat,

red

in

that

substance

best

valuable

horn-shavings, yellow prussiate

bone-dust,
such

welded

be

such

is effected

placed

The

strong.

can

This

"

that

so

It

increased.

it

machines,

parts of

steam-engines,

and

and

again

Fahr.

Case-hardening.
finished

bars.

times, giving the iron

1600"

to

heated

are

piled together, reheated,

tough

so

these

merchant

as

are

many

it

wrought

from

iron

DESIGNING.

faggots;

is known

wrought

which

into

piled

into

AND

of

this

almost

spiegeleisen,

manganese,

and

ingots.
melting wrought

certain

kinds

of

iron

reverberatory gas-furnace.

iron
ore,

in

placed
The

furnace

of blister-steel

Bars

steel

strong

hammered

of

long

carbon

found

and

and

forms

its surface.

on

then
a

of

high temperature.

the

to

bound

together
heat, then

welding

shear-steel.

called

bars

into

trough
fire-clay
a

are

heated

and

rolled

and

18"

at

bars

embedding

blisters

the

about

wire

days

portions

from

called

blister-steel,so

by

with

combines

iron

several

for

in

charcoal

powdered

in

iron

wrought

of

consists

Process

Cementation

The

35

INSTRUCTIONS.

INTRODUCTORY

WOODS.

Fir
for

largely used
White

and

Beech

is

It takes

bearings.
a

bright-yellow
is

Elm

durable

used

for

hardness
times

the

and

"

in water,

pattern-making.
it takes

mortise-wheels;

of

pulley-blocks

is therefore

and

and
of

used

for

This

is

very

under

and

water

Its

strength.

is

of the
a

same

favorite

of mortise-wheels.

for cogs

used

water.

weight

Mahogany

in

surface, is hard, heavy, and

durability under

bearings
and

are

floats, piles,etc.

Lignum-vitae.
strength

used

for sheaves

smooth

is often

Hornbeam

work, and

close-grained.

used

to

easy

color.

very

paddle-wheel

of

cogs

is very

is much

Boxwood

much

are

for the

and

lignum-vitae,

of purposes.

Pine

Yellow

surface

smooth

variety

used

hornbeam,

strong, cheap, and

are

principally

are

teak.

oak, and

and

Pine

construction

ash, elm,

boxwood,

pine, fir,beech,
mahogany,

machine

in

used

woods

The

hard
For

other

wood
these
purposes

specificgravity
volume

for

making

of
reasons

great
it is

requiring

is 1.33;

i.e., \\

of water.
small

patterns.

It is

36

DRAWING

AND

dry

in

or

seasoning

It

water.

is used

not

other

most

as

does

straight-grained,very

and

tough

is

Oak
used

when

its form

change

and

durable,

and

straight-grained,
strong,

DESIGNING.

for

readily

as

woods.
whether

durable,

and

machine-framing

supports.
is

Teak
little when

and

seasoning,

passing through

Bolts

durable

tough,

strong,

it

valuable

is very

that

on

from

prevented

are

It shrinks

wood.

very

account.

rusting by

the

oil

it contains.

OF

STRENGTH

MATERIALS.

DEFINITIONS.

Load.
of
load

which

e.g.,

the

which

be

upon

applied
load

and

Strain

the

by
the

elastic

the

load

Stress.
action

limit

of

of the

the

and

car

is that

addition

the

load

the

load

live

load

is

dead

continuously.

which

has

is the

of itself;

to

itself.

removed

outside

total

load

railway-car is

in

car

is

useful

carry
a

is

of stress

to

the
are:

"

and

unvarying

an

Strain

is the

change

load.

If

load

material

the

the
strain

Machine-members

is removed.

enough

Stress

to

springs of
the

machine

The

it.

on

designed

of

weight

of

straining action.

continuous

strong

placed

constant

or

is
the

the

load

variable

acting

on

load

member

any

member

useful

from

arising

on

forces

the

may

load

load

external

the

kinds

The

"

resist
force

which

tensile

stress

causes

or

does

under
strain.

form
not

duced
pro-

exceed

disappear

should
set

permanent

will

of

be

maximum
The

when

designed
load.
different

pull, compressive stress

or

TROD

IN

thrust, shearing

stress

pull, and

and

thrust

Elasticity

torsional

is the

form

regaining original

of

of

change

combined

or

stress.

form

is

due

to

the

of its molecules.

spring

or

37

UCTIONS.

TR

twisting

or

to

force

cohesive

inherent

INS

cross-cutting,bending

or

metal

of

Resistance

UCTOR

inherent

after

external

an

in

property

material

load

has

been

removed.
Limit.

Elastic

compression

or

to

which
Within

set.

permanent

The

"

elastic

material

the

is the

limit

be

can

elastic

limit

limit

of extension

subjected

strain

and

without

stress

are

proportional.
of

Modulus
British
the

Royal

elasticity(E)

per

"

1826, known

in

formula

as

the
for

Young's

in. in Ibs.

sq.

"

"

per

inch

j-:

of

ELASTIC

Ultimate

Strength
under

stress.

-r

length

TABLE

member

following

of

strain

the

Young

"

stress

Thomas

Dr.

"

Society propounded
of

modulus

Modulus

Elasticity.

is the

(within the

elastic

limit).

1.
MODULI.

smallest

load

that

will

fracture

DRA

Proof

The

The
of

member

actual

of

and

of

much

course

of

factor
different

for

the

to

greater

the

or

the

of

strength

load

than

different

for

under

the

to

material.

same

will

resistance.

breaking

live loads

that

ultimate

safety changes

uses

under

load

elastic

ratio of the

working load,

The

load.

nearly equal

is the

Safety

the

to

materials

is

i.e., to the maximum

set;

Factor

DESIGNING.

AND

Strength

permanent

cause

WING

It is

constant

loads.

dead

The

table

following

the

gives

ordinary

factors

of

safety

in

general use:
2.

TABLE
FACTORS

of Cast

Strength
has

has

been

tenacity

The

per

its

sq.

equal

to

in.
the

"

The

SAFETY.

an

sq.

ultimate

in., but

tensile

cast

iron

cast

iron

strength of

in.

compressive strength of
"

the

average

The

American

average
Ibs. per

20,000

showed

tenacity,
the

and

"

sq.

ultimate

6 times

about

which

made
Ibs. per

35,000

in.,

of

Iron.

OF

elastic

cast

iron

is about

90,000

shearing strength

is about

average

limit

of

breaking strength.

cast

iron

is from

is from

4 to

Ibs. per
20,000

"

to

sq.
Ibs.

nearly

4o

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

DRA

3.

TABLE

ULTIMATE

AVERAGE

ELASTIC

AND

MODULI

OF

Wrought

has

Iron

its chemical

to

Cast
The

tensile

IN

and

of

generally decreasing

metals
as

Lead
.

TENACITIES

"

Tin
.

Zinc
.

Worked

copper

7.8

to

structure.

with

their

ture,
tempera-

is increased.

(THURSTON.)

METAL.

iron

tO

12

20

to

40

40

to

loo

1.3

Wrought

2.O

Steel

tO

20

ing
accord-

7.25.

temperature

Cast

12

7.5

AND

INCH.

4.

OF

i.o
.

of

varies

their

TABLE
RELATIVE

of

physical

specific gravity

MATERIALS

SQUARE

PER

specific gravity

strength

VARIOUS

OF

POUNDS

composition

has

Iron

STRENGTH

ELASTICITY

iron
.

MISCELLANEOUS

AND

TABLES

USEFUL

INFORMATION.

MEASURES.

AND

WEIGHTS

AVOIRDUPOIS^COMMERCIAL
16

drachms

16

ounces

14

pounds

pound.

pounds

2240

30^
40

cubic

An

ton.

foot

ale

standard

dry

bushel

cord

perch

ton*of

of

box

"

"

"

'

An
209

8"
6T7$
4TV

feet

long

acre.

mile.

cubic

inches.

231
268.8

"

"

2150.4
128

has
has
timber

has

"

50

19! inches
i2Tf
8$
6T*g
4iV

8"
6T'5

4TV

deep,

contains
.

barrel.

bushel.

peck.

"

"

i2^|

."

40

"

19! inches,

feet.

24.75"

"

"

"

4840

contains

acre

VOLUME.

OF

has

gallon

hewn

I2^|

acres

282

stone

19!

'

640

1728

wine

round

"

rood.

roods

has

wood

of

'
.

has

rod.
.

has

or

gallon

yard.

rods

has

gallon

yards

MEASURE

quarter.
....

foot.

square

feet

stone.

cwt.

quarters

inches

square

"

"

28

144

ounce.

....

MEASURE.

SQUAR"

by

209

feet

is

broad

TABLE

mile

is

knot

is

...

quart.

yards.

square
i

acre.

DISTANCE.

OF

5280

feet

6086

feet.

or

1760

yards.

...

3 miles.

is

league

fathom

metre

hand

is

palm

is

span

is

is

feet.

is

nearly

feet
4

...

"
...

...

MEASURE

incnes

12

3 feet
2

i6i

yards
feet.

3! inches.
inches.

foot,

LENGTH.

OF

rods
.

yard,

fathom,

rod.

3 miles

chains

10

chain,

furlong,

mile,

furlongs

i
.

league.
41

Each

nominal

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

boilers

of

horse-power

requires

cubic

foot

of

water

per

hour.

boilers

Tubular

boilers

Flue

12

To

find

To

find

the

of
of

height

in

high

in

the

the

piece

and

becomes

was

in

influence

vibration,
The

new.

the
be

the

most

foot

varies

39.1"

at

from
is

accurate

before

horse-power.

multiply by .7854.

of

column

of

water,

of

texture

raised

pounds

feet

33,000

in

high

constant

from

one

minute.

gradually

use

it had

that

its

crystalline, loses

becomes

when

tenacity,

FOOT

PER

is

delivery,

and

62.425 Ibs.,

Weight

of

test

59.833.

figure generally
gallon

INCLUDING

to

F.

at

39.2"

At

F.

believed

8.3389

"

62"

to

Ibs.

WATER-PIPES.

CAST-IRON

RUN,

hammer

212"

at

The

62.360.

to

tested

usually

WATER.

OF

62.355.
OF

POUNDS

Water-pipe

F.

62.291

WEIGHTS
IN

horse-power.

brittle.

cubic

weight

horse-power.

to

33,000

different

WEIGHT
One

at

raised

and

metal

"

.434.

hammer

the

of

by

estimated

is

to

and

inch

square

feet

pound

one

or

per

column

diameter

the

square

pounds

machinery

by repeated

assumes,

in
the

minute,

under

Iron

piston,

pressure

horse-power

foot

to

equivalent

heating-surface

ft. of

sq.

area

the

the

multiply

10

equivalent

heating-surface

ft. of

for

equivalent

heating-surface

ft. of

sq.

sq.

boilers

Cylinder

15

consider

steam-boilers

of

calculating horse-power

In

BELLS

pounds

300
should

be

SPIGOTS.

AND

pressure

made

while

per
the

square

pipe

inch

is under

pressure.
The
of

Cincinnati

lengths

are

uniform

for

all

diameters,

12

feet

exclusive

bell.
Standard

lengths

ate

for

2-inch

pipe

feet, and

all other

sizes

12

feet.

TABLES

USEFUL

MISCELLANEOUS

AND

THICKNESS

for

equation

where

thickness

head

diameter

the

What

of

pressure

feet

with

in

pipe

the
of

of

in

metal

of

of

pounds

150

pipe

of

tons

should

tensile

18,000 pounds

same

150

strength

speed

For

3-feet
3i

which

at

"

"

"

"

"

"

should

"

"'

"

"

.....

Speed

of

"

"

bolting-reels

elevators

"

smut-machines

about

10

For

per
For

650

700

to

346.2

.9757"-

service

same

of

and

size

machinery

horse-power

20

for

to

single upright

per

minute.

160
to

35

35

to

40

45

to

50

30

to

35

700

*'

revolutions

horse-power
of

allow

saw

revolutions

250
200

.30

and

cleaning

pair

is

minute,

per

ing
accord-

machine.

of

allow

550

1.6313"

180

i-

to

.32

^.

wheat

from

mills

to

pair

bolting;

of
and

(4 feet), and

burrs
for

country

about

150

mills

burrs.
10

speed

horse-power,

tions
revolu-

minute.

circular

to

"

........

to

necessary

to

...

"

merchant

230

....

"

"

run

flour

for

conveyers

40

be

"'"-..

.....

4i

.......

the

.32

2.308

"1

loj

"

millstones

stones

"

For

or

for

pipe

/346-2

I .ooi6(

The

44

4O-inch

of

subject

"

thickness

the

be

safe

pounas.

water-main

inch,

square

per

2000

2O-inch

metal

be

public water-supply:

j 2oJ
What

to

feet,

thickness

cast-iron

for

in inches,

strength

be

is believed

Neville,

in inches,

pipe

pressure

tensile

maximum

head,

of

or

should

of cast-iron

43

WATER-PIPE.

from

adapted

thickness

the

CAST-IRON

OF

formula,

following

The

INFORMATION.

rev.

60010650

"

55010600

"

52510550

the

saws

per
"

min.
"

for

best

average

36-in. saw.

"

"

"

"

"

42

6o-saw

sumac-mill

"

"

50010

speed

525

lev.
"

47510500

40

"

working

is

permin.for48-in.saw.
"

"

"

60

40010450

"

"

"

"

54

"44

gin requires
requires

horse-power

15

horse-power.

to

gin

500

pounds

of lint in

hours.

44

AND

DRAWING

To

reduce

diameter
the

the

by

weight

round

for

of

of

length
pine

the

and

cores

the

in inches,
deducted

be

OF

SHRINKAGE

should

be

and

for

the

the

of

THE

OF

3.14159

.8862

side

of

.7071

side

of

Diameter2

.7854

area

Radius

6.28318

circumference.

WELDED

3.14159

TUBES
WATER.

-s

pattern.

an

inch

longer

foot.

circumference.

Diameter

-5-

0.017

CIRCLE.

Diameter

Circumference

by

the

linear

Diameter

WROUGHT-IRON

of

the

CASTINGS.

for

PROPERTIES

of

square

product

weight

rule

Pattern-maker's

the

core-prints, multiply

core

to

core,

DESIGNING.

of

an

equal

an

inscribed

square.
square.

circle.

diameter.

FOR

STEAM,

GAS,

OR

per

TABLES

USEFUL

OF

COLORS

DIFFERENT

MISCELLANEOUS

AND

210

221

4IO

Pale

yellow.

430

Dull

yellow.

(POUILLET.)

Crimson.

256

493

26l

502

370

680

Violet, purple,
370"

and

dull

blue;

it passes
then

Commences

932

and

C.

and

green,
500

HEAT.

Color.

Fahr.

Cent.

BY

CAUSED

IRON

45

INFORMATION.

bright blue,

to

with

oxide;

of

hardness,
the

to

loses

good

much

becomes

hammer,

and

more

be

can

light
deal

525

977

700

Nascent

800

1472

900

1657

1832

cherry.

Cherry.
Bright
Dull

2OI2

IIOO

red.

Sombre

1292

IOOO

cherry.

orange.

1200

2192

Bright

1300

23*72

White.

I4OO

2552

1500

2733

I600

2912

orange.

Brilliant

white

TABLE

red.

nascent

OF

DECIMAL

Dazzling

"

welding

heat.

white.

EQUIVALENTS

sea-

OF

ONE

ing
coat-

of

its

impressible
twisted

ease.

Becomes

to

disappears.
covered

be

to

261" C.

between

INCH.

with

46

DRAWING

DESIGNING.

AND

MELTING-POINT

Names.

Fahr.

Names.

Fahr.

459O"

Platina

ETC.

METALS,

OF

iron

Wrought

2900"

Antimony

842

Steel

2500

Bismuth

487

Copper

2000

Tin

475

Glass

2377

Lead

620

Beeswax

151

Zinc

700

Sulphur

239

Cast

iron

Tallow

2100

92

5.

TABLE

WEIGHT

RULE.

quotient

"

Divide

will

give

SUBSTANCES.

specific gravity

the
the

VARIOUS

OF

weight

of

cubic

of
foot

TABLE
WEIGHT
Ash
Beech
Birch
Boxwood
Elm
Larch

Lignum-vitae

TIMBER

OF

46 Ibs.

the
of

substance
it in

PER

CUBIC

Mahogany,

62

Honduras

Oak,

English

Pine,

red

"

"

"

"

34
34
80

FOOT.

"

"

pounds.

Spanish

44

45

the

6.

"

"

and

16

by

Teak

yellow

Ibs.

35

"

53

...

"

54

"

30

to

44

29

to

41

"

"

white

30
41

to

"

55

47'

DRAWING

A"D

DESIGNING.

TABLES

AND

MISCELLANEOUS

INFORMATION.

47*

47s

DRA

WING

AND

DESIGNING.

USEFUL

TABLES

AND

MISCELLANEOUS

INFORMATION.

47!

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

USEFUL

TABLES

AND

MISCELLANEOUS

INFORMATION.

47*

47'

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

47"

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

USEFUL

TABLES

AND

MISCELLANEOUS

INFORMATION.

47

47"

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

USEFUL

TABLES

AND

MISCELLANEOUS

INFORMATION.

47

12

4;13

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

USEFUL

TABLES

AND

MISCELLANEOUS

INFORMATION.

4/u

47'

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

47]

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

USEFUL

TABLES

AND

MISCELLANEOUS

INFORMATION.

47

47'

DRA

WING

AND

DESIGNING.

USEFUL

TABLES

AND

MISCELLANEOUS

INFORMATION.

47

47

19

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

USEFUL

TABLES

AND

MISCELLANEOUS

INFORMATION.

4f

I.*

CHAPTER

SCREWS,

Screw

cylinder

and

is

is the

NUTS,

helical
most

projection

combinations.
for

It

is

producing

employed

thread

formed

used

in

upon

mechanical

28.

in

pressure
*

or

device

common

FIG.

BOLTS.

AND

Copyright.

the
contact

construction
and

of

chinery
ma-

transmitting

UNIVLR5ITY

SO

of the

thread

subjected

to

shearing stress,

it is the

are

the

when

the

in the

bolts

the

of

area

the

of

the

is

Thread

axis

bottom

are

effective

estimating their strength.

in

the

of

the

at

of the hole

diameter
Unless

to
perpendicularly

distance
from

screw

measured

the

top

to

the

thread.

of the

bottom

the

to

diameter

cut.

Depth

The

equal

is considered

that

diameter

is

and

its threads

before

nut

is the

Diameter

Effective

The

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

DRA

NOTATION.

nominal

diameter

of

bolt;

d^=

effective

diameter

of

bolt;

depth

of thread

"?,=total depth

The

is

pitch of

thread

number

of threads

to

all

in

per

inch.

The

Figs. 29"33.

normal

frictional

and

pressure

on

in machine

general use

of

screw-fastenings because

threads

the

the

represented

in

of Screw-threads

on

strength of
is due

are

adopted

V;

Forms

construction

of

the

shearing

holding power,

the thread

being

thread

which
inclined

FIG.

to

may

the
be

axis

of

resolved

the

screw.

into two

This

29

force

normal

components,

one

N,

Fig. 29,

parallelto

the

of

axis
L

the

the

load

burst

the

represents

tending
of

the

to

the

the

nut

common

in the

use

The
which

Sellers

in
the

manufactories
form

Fig.

meeting
makes

at

pitch,

this

and

the

depth

at

the

thread

in

thread

of

will

be

Of
in

are

the

U.

S.

Association,

the

by

the

of

principal

this

thread

of tf,short

bottoms,

length equal

V.

the

of

are

and

to

section

sides

tops

or

33)

of

many

The

angle

nuts.

adopted

other, and

each

and

and

Mechanics'

country.

with

of

the

and

been

Master

sharp point

sides

has

the

of

angle

Standard,

Association,

of 60"

the

29,

Railway

in

angle

an

States

the

proportional

bolts

for

force

component

(Figs. 29

two

it.

to

the

greater

normal

the

States

United

Car-builders'

Master

shown

and

the

being

with

increase

United

or

is shown

Government,

friction

threads

of V

thread

the

be

right angles

at

therefore

the

R
the

by

will

greater

force, it will

forms

other

carried

bursting force, and,

normal

the

and

screw,

$1

BOLTS.

AND

NUTS,

SCREWS,

to

expressed

of

which
of

the

by

the

formula
d

The

effective

} X /

will

diameter

dl

d-2d

sin 60"

then

o.65/

(i)

be

d-i.$p

d-

^.

...'-. (2)

The

relation

by

the

number

pitch

and

the

diameter

will

be

pressed
ex-

formula

p
The

the

between

0.24

of threads

y^_f_ 0!625
per

inch

0.175.

"

"

"

(3)

is

"

0.24^+0.625

-0.175

"

"

52

DRAWING

The

table

the

of proportions

the

inch,

per

the

as

Scale

i.

thread
three

and

deduced

combinations

from

be

may

number

modified

for

"

found

of threads

to

avoid

in the

gears

as

far

of

screw-

as

apart

equal

to

points

on

the

with

pencilling by

divisions, and

cut

Begin by drawing
of the

outline, of
6"

screw

in

the

"

pitch /

the

the

diameter.

off

formula

just

found

one

the

drawn
line

by

depth

division

at

the

left-hand

line.
border-

(3), and

points

of
the

off

distance

Through

Vs.

the

from

mark

formula.
the

the

line,
border-

intersect

the

draw

line in

from

the

30" triangle

dividing

down
the

horizontal

pitch as

"

in from

by

have

you
the

"

horizontal

paper

line about

lines

scale

sectional

size.

corner

two

the

full

find

the

each

been

(Fig. 29), suitable

vertical

with

the

been

in the

in

times

Then

these

table

threads

left-hand

where

the

has

Draw

"

Construction.
upper

has

70

page

machines.

Exercise
Sellers

table

DESIGNING.

difference, however,

and

troublesome

practicable
cutting

formulae

on

formulae.

preceding

between

AND

Complete
into

top and

equal

bottom

of

thread.
The

Sharp

Thread,

shown

in

Fig.

30,

is

one

of

the

i..

FIG.

forms

of

threads

that

were

in

30.

use

before

the

Sellers

thread

as

the

by

all

adopted

\vas

condemned

at

meet

sides

of

the

depth

of the

sin 60"

d,
Now,

the

the

of

with

one

adds

sharp point

objection
of the

this

due
in

used

dies

to

is shown

in

adopted

on

It
of

Fig.
all

be

(5)

expressed

the

thread.
the

55",

and

has

of

an

the

(2)

the

standard

While

to

"

(6)

thread

the
of

the

effective

latter

the

sharp points

on

form

bolt, the

thread,

variation

is

A
in

ther
fur-

depth

the

taps

them.

Thread,

of

is the

of the

wear

the
amount

total

outline

an

British

screw-fastenings
sides

strength

thread

'-'-..
".
.

S.

strength

of

is the

U.

(6)

equal pitch

an

have

i.7$2p.

little

V
31,

d"

with

form

1.732.

we

i.$p.

"

diminishes

the

to

sharp

has

equal

d,

producing

Whitworth

The

bottom

formula

the

then

d"

diameters,

having

very

to

threads

screw

materially

thread

d,

that

show

to

serves

angle

and

pitch/,

will
("/,)

o.866/=

effective

threads

greater than

and

to

makes

0.866/

bolt

threads

S.

diameter

of

d"

comparing

This

made

are

the

to

is the

which

expressed by

the

of

sides

bottom,

length

will be

=/

thread

formula

the

U.

in

#,

diameter
effective

by

equal

thread

^
The

top

and

the

used, although

This

the

that

except

at

thread

the

the

thread

sharp point

is still

and

standard,

S.

progressive engineers.

Sellers

the

as

same

U.

53

BOLTS.

AND

NUTS,

SCREWS,

section

standard, and

in British
inclined
rounded

depth

of the

of which

is

machine
to

each

off
V.

at

generally
tion.
construc-

other
the
The

at

an

top and
table

of

54

DRAWING

dimensions
the

from

Wkitworth

for

following

DESIGNING.

AND

(page 70) has

screws

formulae.

27!"

cot

di== 0.5

FIG.

The

depth

The

pitch

of threads

Number

31.

0.64^.

the

(8)
(9)

and

"

*p

p
at

0.04

diameter

(7)

inch

per

The

o.96/

o.96/=

0.08^

of the

depth

thread

finished

of the

total

The

deduced

been

(10)

"

bottom

of

the

will

thread

be

given by

formula

the

1.28

dl

Exercise
thread

2.

the

each
upper

other

and

line mark

Pitch

(Fig. 31).

Sellers

Draw

"

Construction.
of

d"

At

"

thread
a

off

0.64/

threads

i".

distance
a

of

Scale

suitable
draw

distance

..

times

three

ab

equal
equal

to

form

the

lines
to

drawing

parallel to

O.g6p.
the

of

full size.

below

horizontal

apart

Whitworth

the

distance

two

(n)

pitch.

On

the

Bisect

SCKEWS,

ab
at

and
the

point

other

at

the

the

draw

bisecting
Join

c.

line, and

upper

from

of

Mark

threads.

number

rounding

off the

sharp points

Square

Screw-thread.

is
the

to

make

to

it

made

equal
the

therefore
material

has

surfaces

of

pitch

of

thread

will

have

bottom

are

screw

the

is under
the

The

the

thread

in and
The

is

there

of gear

out

Buttress

square

to

for

one

in

the

work

portion

Screw-thread

threads,

no

side

of

bursting

force

the

load

for

to

is

Fig.

can

be

than
quently
conse-

transmitting

opposite

in

the

axis, and

directions.
tion
modifica-

bottom
32.

of each
This

form

readily thrown

nut.

is

bearing-

thread;

thread

less friction

top and

and

usually

amount

the

the

the

thread

the

As

adapted

shown

as

the

Screw-thread

in which

rough

with

load.
to

of
is

nearly equal

moved

enough

that

with

its width

screw

half

will be

best

be

semicircular,

used

is

which

screws

with

will be

reaction

is

the

rectangle,

and

On

thread

it, there

thread

accurate

only

of the

Rounded

thread

square
made

are

or

has

and

perpendicular

thread

load

Knuckle

of the
thread

the

action

along

give

to

really

one

conditions

same

square

when

motion

the

as

of

square-threaded screw,

the

there

; and

nut

of

square-threaded

pencilling by

o.^^p

to

drawing.

the

shearing

this

of

the

upon

and

the

at

is

it is usual

applied parallel to

force

of

square

resist the

to

pitch

the

each

to

from

line,

form

thread

the

inclined

V.
The

"

parallelline

pitch

lower

being equal

twice

to

the

of the

square

upon

the

diameter

same

on

square

will be

Complete

However,

5/.

o.

the

thread

of the

depth

equal

of

called

invariably

lower

off the

along

required

The

the

cut

cb, which

55":

55

BOLTS.

line to

and

ca

of

angle

an

AND

NUTS,

combination

being perpendicular,

of
and

the

V
the

DRAWING

inclined

other

has

and

at

AND

45"

from

cut

amount

an

of

angle

an

DESIGNING.

the

to

the

top

axis
and

of

the

screw,

bottom

of

each

FIG.

thread

equal

in

33.

Fig.

is

pressure
to

the axis

-J of

to

This

form

that

on

the

of the

side

32.

total

of thread
of the

and

knuckle,
Pitch

3.

i" '.

Pipe-threads
had

system
of
the

been

pipe-threads.
late

tables

Robert

for the

the

buttress

Scale

which

when

only
is at

shown

as

the

right angles

screw.

Draw

"

thread,

used

be

can

thread

FIG.

Exercise

of the

depth

twice
"

sectional

threads

full

agreed

shown

the

to

for

upon

that

time,

Briggs, C.E.,

dimensions

of

outline
in

of

the

Figs.

square,
and

32

33.

size.

Previous

Since

33.

pipes

who
and

year
the

1862

form

owing

to

proposed

no

common

proportions

or

the

efforts

formulae

pipe-threads,a

of
and

standard

So

DRAWING

if

the

be

number

tube-end

of

of

threads

per

inch.

which

the

screw-thread

throughout

the

perfect

DESIGNING.

AND

formula

empirical

used

length

the

For

continues

(p.8D -J-4.8) X

is T=

"

where

is the

parallellength, and

its

taper

the

beyond

back,

the

at

but

bottom,

of

system
the

the

of

process

4.

the

its

cutting

the

Draw

"

wrought-iron pipe 8"

the

the

at

Further

The

top.

essential

not

is

imperfection

the

having

two

come

out
through-

inches.

in

expressed

tube

screw-thread, furthest

tube, is

and

joint ;

Exercise
a

of

extremity

is

imperfect

of

of

diameter

perfect threads,

imperfect portion
the

external

actual

ing
remain-

back

in any

simply

same

from
to

this

incidental

to

way

thread

at

single operation.

section

of

pipe-screw (Fig. 34)

Scale

in diameter.

five times full

size.

FIG.

Construction.
a

distance

the

of the
to

pipe,

T.

to

every

at

the

draw

then
and

Taper

from
in 32

units

32

required

intersects

pitch, and

in

the

to

the
2

means

length.

through

off

points

these

inclination

of

points

point

the

distance
with

the

as

other

at

given

in

the

represent

mark

the

to

line

On
at

metal

of

From

inclination.

mark

line

the

an

each

parallelto

thickness

vertical

along

34.

lines

two

equal

apart

table;

Draw

"

for

line

off 3, 4,
unit

draw

from

in
the

end

equal
height
line 5

where

it

to

the

30" triangledraw

the

apart

equal

NUTS,

SCKEWS,

The

threads.

drawing

is

line

the

full at

to

it is

each

indicate

adopts
he

ing

is

screwed

that

making

understood

piece

to

suitable

represent

No.

thread;

left-hand

thread;

No.

thread

any
oa

rough

dotted
distance

for

convention

3,

of

any

very

drawings

lines

they

indicate
extend

No.
V

and

double

square

5,

is

of

drawr

generally
No.

Fig. 35,

thread;
double

of

sketches
bottom

along

to

Instead

class
and

thread;

the

No.

2,
4,

I,

single

single
square

No.

diameter;

The

method

is shown
of

No.

right-hand

small

diameter.

the

man
drafts-

35.

thread

small

Fig. 28,

construction

the

screw-thread.

single

thread;
6,

in

drawing.

to

which

drawing

for the

quickly drawn

be

can

FIG.

shows

the

upon

is

pitch.
of

is shown

by

that

pipe

the

to

it is unnecessary

convention

some

of the

lengthy geometrical

this

perform

thread

method

form

tnre

that

obvious

quite

to

he

their

The

"

off

cut

are

last

part equal

screwed

Conventions.

represent

to

but

the

the
surface

the

on

threads

of

bottom

point

beyond

Screw-thread
screws

the

last

the

of

from

bottom

distance

bottoms

59

BOLTS.

AND

at

the

piece

the

No.

7,

adopted
7.

thread, and

length

of

The
the

the

6O

screwed

adopted

of

improving
the

by shading

of

side
shown

screw-threads
drawn

to

the

and

top
When

few

threads

and

the
the

Nut.

producing

with

most

in

nut,

The

is the

there

diameter

for

distance

across

the

flats

distance

across

the

corners

2d, and
nut.

the

the

shows

is machined

The

bolt, used

part,

lines

in

of

drawn

the

screw

conjunction

forms.

true
to

angle

of the

is made

hexagonal

The

form,

form
form

\\d-\- \

of
a

off of

representingnuts

are

the

60"

upon

an

inch.

when

curves

of

part
the

of

(i^d -\--J-")
1.155.

corners

chamfering
from

nuts

(d).

of bolt

bevelling

or

radius

When

screwed

dotted

screw,

hexagonal (Fig. 37).

rounding

ing,
draw-

upon

of the

different

are

"="

nut

the

screw-thread.

application

common

the

screws

threads.

proportions

height

is

represent

square-threaded

by

No.

indicate

represented

beginning

pressure

which

standard

Fig. 35

This

of

be

the

of

is indicated

most

contact

lines

Fig.

under

large

or

narrow

the

the

screw

The

is the

use

at

of the

"

to

the

drawingsto

bottom

with

case

of the

bottoms

the

in

At

39.

diameter

the

has

drawn

are

small

Here

screw

the

length

The

the

long

very

Fig.

is

one

shown

as

ways

completely

working

of

lines

wide

is often

as

from

scale.

small

convention

fill in

screws

various

are

thread,

in

on

pieces

upon

There

this

conventions
threaded

represent

each

shown

adopted

method

to

is to

as

shown

are

of
of

method

pitch.

wide

lines

lower

thread,

the

2,

appearance

another

and

37,

the

I,

drawings

'and

large diameter

of

Nos.

finished

upon

of

for

At

part.

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

the

sphere

or

is calbd

is made

end
cone.

fering.
cham-

from

\\d

to

45" with

the

drawing

they

axis

to

of

should

Fig.

drawn

be

always

show

the

BOLTS.

distance

the

across

angles, as

in

40.

Exercise
a

to

AND

NUTS,

SCKEWS,

bolt

6"

5.

"

the

Draw

when

in diameter

true

the

FIG.

irt of

diameter

of

the

bolt

sphere

(d), and

of

curves

of

top

the

hexagonal

nut

for

is chamfered

nut

36.
with
when

radius
the

i"

chamfering

times
is

the
pa;

62

DRAWING

of

the

cone

of the

axis

side

nut,

and

c,

the

as

and

part of

shown

as

in

and

the

on

Where
the

draw

with

the

of

These

etc.

10,

curve

the

on

face

will be

view

draw

face

of

to

through
inclined
the

to

14
the

points

of

arc

line

the

inch

lines

an

in

nut

the

the

face

of the

line

14

and

of

line

in

nut

with

revolve

the

and

draw

of intersection.

The

15

c2,

from

draw

centre

will be

lines

17,

the

17 revolved

of the

the

lower
half

drawn

sect
inter-

to

intersection
21,

of

the

22,

23

through
be

the

cut

lines

will

side

14

arcs

centre

lines

front

the

line

20,

7, 8,

the

on

the

18, 19,

perpendicular
line

lines

parallel to

1,

inclined

of

curves

^4, c%

points

curve

the

intersect

the

horizontal
at

^d.

4,

^3,

the

where

view;

etc.,

plan

ci,

perpendicular

end

3,

and

3,

7, 8, 9, 10,

find the

below

and

the

I, 2,

; and

15

i"

2,

eb into

lines

The

To

centre

points

intersect

nut.

circle.

plan,

points

the

I,

intersect

to

end

these

of intersection

of

say

left

lines

the

Divide

a.

radii

arcs

square,
and

on

points

and

spherical chamfer,

angle

at

these

vertical

face

the

horizontal

centre

centre

through

the

points

side

6,

say

where

draw

nut

the

lines drawn

as

from

and

arcs,

draw

draw

the

represents

divisions,

line L

and

the

scribe
circum-

quadrant

elevations

part

the

across

30" triangleand

the

radius

from

distance

"this

tre
cen-

\d draw

to

and

nut,

the

on

the

Draw

elevation

of

and

and

equal

the

in

half

to

with

S, which

lower

and

13,

face

perpendicular

arc

i?f

as

arc

number

any

the

line draw

equal

37.

the

with

locating the

radius

hole

the

first

plan,

and

centre

hexagon

Fig.

with

views, and

the

quadrant Q,

45"

of

angle

an

Fig. 36.

with

radius

the

draw
a

on

in

Begin

"

with

centre

flats F

an

shown

DESIGNING.

makes

quadrant representing

same

9,

of which

as

Construction.

AND

the

the
cen-

tre

the

of

the

lines

7, 8, 9,

face

nut

10,

To

curve.

the

of the

13

end

21,

will

be

line

with

23

points
the

complete

the

on

half

one

of

top

the

the

on

intersection
horizontal

with

curve,

the

17 and

the

view, and

22,

63

BOLTS.

corresponding points

compasses

line

12,

11,

intersection

the

on

18, 19, 20,

17,

AND

NUTS,

SCXEWS,

of

other

lines
the

centre

nut

of

the

at

with

mark
side

quired
re-

of

the

17.

FIG.

Conventional

drawings
curves

chamfered

of

is

Method

shown

the

nut

off at

an

37-

of

in

Fig.

37.

are

arcs

of

angle

of

45"

representing large
In

this

circles
to

the

representation

and
axis

nuts

the
of the

corners

nut.

on

the
are

64

DRAWING

6.

Exercise

Scale

diameter.

Locate

plan.

the

to

the

the

of the

centre

With

and

centre

middle
and
I

radius

and

.the

These

2.

of

arcs

of the

equal

points

the

curves

side
the

on

the

Through
bolt
draw

the

intersects
the

arc

in

top of the
the

arcs

of intersection

end

view

points

method

"

of

hexagon,

and

find

Draw

the

the

the

nut

the

without
the

draw

nut,

and

3 to

intersect

will be
of

of

arc

on

the

lines
of

the

radius

centres

ing.
drawof
r*

the
=

representingthe bolt-point.

A. \
"-I

FIG.

38.

centres

diameter
a

the

centre

findingthe

outside
with

curves.

with

the

clearly shown

is

where

this

shown.

to

The

on

manner

equal

ameter
in di-

equal

\\d-\- ^'\
a

r'

face.

top

flats

hexagon

draw

circle

of the

the
d

draw

in the

faces

to
to

3"

bolt

exercise, by drawing

last

circumscribe

radius

tangent

the

the

across

view

and

for

views

and

centre

side

end

in

as

set-square

face

the

distance

circle with

elevation

Begin,

"

three

size.

full

Construction.
the

the

Draw

"

DESIGNING.

AND

66

three

divisions

equal
draw

points

side

method

faces

will

is in each

held

again,

fastenings

the

bolt

finding

the

oolt

When

with

key

or

the

headed

in

be

position
J"

in

general

bolt shown

Exercise

on

in

two

the

Scale

Construction.

should
be

at

of
be

least

"

the

clear

the

distance

give

the

flange

arcs

Fig. 38,

of

the

of

the

where

of the

across

proper

rivet

by

means

have

pieces

used

being

The

most

to'

them

disconnecting

of

construction

only

when
form

common

is the

headed

hexagonal

bolt

pipe-flange (Fig. 41).

full

First

pipe

effected

hexagonal*

40.

and

the

lines

flanges.
\"

fillet about

the

and

Make

in

nut

the

bolt

size.

draw

-J". Therefore,

half

top

40.

machine

cast-iron

diameter.

thickness

the

more

or

permanent.

Fig.

-Draw

"

from

intention

is used;

is to

used

of

centres

commonly

FIG.

01

the

intersect

to

most

are

rivets.

or

connection

lines

these

through

3, 4;

i, 2,

d.

together
a

points

clearly understood

bolts, keys,

be

of

be

case

Machine
of

the

at

perpendicular

The

nut.

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

the

The
and

angles
the

distance

angles

finish, the

of

representing

the

distance

(a)

the

nut

(r)should

radius

(b)will
nut

of

the

be

equal

i" +
is made

r.

to

To
from

"J"to 1" greater

The

nut.

than

number

AND

NUTS,

SCREWS,

half

the

distance

of threads

than

the

and

"

shown

as

preference
make

the

shown

in

give

the

to

hexagonal,

but

of

60"

latter

the

to

it is

get

parallel faces;

through

an

angle

It

of

the
a

only

wrench

while

the

90"

under

is used

8.

in

nut,

square
for

the

screwed
to

or

the

same

machine-

is

the

sides

wrench

42,

to

it

it

more

the
fined
con-

through
to

to

conditions.

is

of which
than

on

has

in

easier

Fig.

in

instance

In

turn

nut

of

is let into

it

spanner

square

in

this

up

make

structures

head

because

necessary

the

the

pattern.

be

can

in

adopted

when

head,

surface

gripping

position, as
angle

with

combination

in Table

cheaper

used

however,

42.

in

recess

of the

angles

found

is

42

generally

hexagonal

square

better

Fig.

in

will be

Fig.

engine-construction generally

recess,

two

is

It is sometimes,

iron.

rough

and

hexagonal

the

41.

Bolt.

Square-headed

O/

across

inch

per

FIG.

The

BOLTS.

the
be

an

next

turned

68

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.
TABLE
STATES

UNITED

STANDARD

OF

Screw-threads.

NOTE.

"

The

above

table

gives

the

sizes

of

the

rough

nuts

and

bolt-heads.

The

finished

SCREWS,

NUTS,

AND

69

BOLTS.

8.
SCREW-THREADS,

sizes

are:

H=d-i/i6";

BOLTS,

AND

NUTS.

""; A=//-i/i6";

A!

"

WING

DRA

Exercise
shown

9.

in

Draw

"

Fig.

Make

the

head,

square

bolt

i"

in

and

nut,

as

Scale

diameter.

size.

full

Construction.
heads

and

The

8.

with

bolt

42.

DESIGNING.

AND

and

The

"

will be

nuts

the

to

tangent

in Table

found

(r)is

radius

of

proportions

made

equal

top of the

to

nut

or

head.
A
screwed
end

both

ends

screwed

into

at

being

which

the

other

piece

studs

nut

Studs

impossible,
to

studs

are

use

the

the

Fig.

never

44

shows

be
a

the

must

when

only
least

of

into

bolt.

at

allowed
stud

used

is

FlG-

When

material,

cast

metal

it

nient,
inconve-

very

ij

least

FIG.

shoidd

allow

thickness

ordinary

an

screwed
into

extend

at

To

it passes.

used
or

the

over

plain part

or

than

are

The

tight joint,

which

into

upon

made.

nut.

body

less

be

piece

by

bar

piece

passed

make

to

always
the

secured

of the

length

the
is

then

is

of

(Fig. 43), one

connection

and

the

consists

Stud-bolt

to
to

the

times

screwed
their

42.

part should

diameter,

and

43.

bear
secure

on

bottoms

the

cylinder-cover (c)to

of

the

holes.

the

SCREWS,

NUTS,

AND

BOLTS.

FIG.

44.

/2
the

Studs

cylinder.
the

because

be

removed

and

cylinder-lagging.
edge

of

from

the

usual

Fig.

43

of this

stud

stud

is made

if

44,

change

subjected

the

thread

with

the

this

part

where

on

piece
is

the

Fig.

of
to

the

be

45,

the

As

of

bodies

wrench
are

it is

shown

general

in

the

the

of

the

stud

by

has

stud

applied

to

into

as

body.
of

stand,
with-

metal,

depth

in contact

would

means

in

in

Fig.

then
The

43,

break
broken

pipe-wrench.

45.

body

square

the

the
"

comes

is screwed,

part joins the

easily removed

it could

depth

the

of

shown

part in the

that

body

stud

than

diameter

part

of

screwed

stud

and

form

The

use.

in

equal

weakest

stress

groove
of

screwed

screwed

the

greater

which

stud

in

section, the

end

shoulder, against which

round

measured

ij"^, as

to

stud

screw.

'strengthened

then

can

means

(d)

to

the

to

nearer

steam-tight joints

cylindrical and

semicircular

into

upper

of

FIG.

In

in

off, leaving the

break
a

form

the

of

by cutting

stud

equal

the

disturbing

placed

(a) equal

distance

the

the

is at

would

of

distance

stud, and

shows

diameter

the

but

be

the

smaller, and

without

not

purpose

44.

body

Fig.

the

for this

much

replaced

bolts

to

very

should

than

the

make

made

stud

of

centre

Fig.

to

metal

the

to

preferred

are

flanges can
be

can

cover

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

DKA

may
the

be
square

which
screwed

part.

position by

means

serves

up

as

tight by

Studs
of

with
a

tool

74

DRAWING

called
on

for

used

sign

the

neck

the

of

hole

shaped

same

snug,( and

Fig.

in the
shows

49
is

bolt

bolt

into

The

projecting part

it.

The

used

in

half

the

is

nut

with

the

fits into

provided

with

holes

and

may

.25 of //, the

made
the

the

lost when

the

height

of the

bolt

The

T-headed

head

level

is used

where

hexagonal
this form

or

there

depth

the

of

The

nut.

and
the

into

shown

the

square

is not

is shown

in
neck

sufficient

square-headed

of bolt

spanner

in diameter

to

threads

the

of

bottoms

receive

holes

be

may

projectingpart

equal
bolt

to

to

The

.25^.

avoid

its

of

being

is withdrawn.
Bolt

with

to

the

receive

head.

the

cut

equal

made

square

screwed

sometimes

is driven

to

recess

nut.

49.

The

made

to

the

between

nut.

pin (/) is usually

pin (/) is

be

and

head

close

bolt

pin

of the

outside

correspondingly

pin (/), which

of the

FIG.

and

fit

to

countersunk

body

of metal

amount

made

is

projections forged

two

or

of the

it up,

screwing

one

revolving by

in the

drilled

and

bolt

from

The

hole

of

; this

Fig. 48

metal.
a

kept

in

is shown

purpose

consists

the

DESIGNING.

AND

in

form.

Fig. 50
or

room

Fig. 50.

has

body

of

to

use

common

the
the

sides

of

bolt, and

bolts

of

the

applicationof

SCREWS,

the
hole

use

in

one

of

of

the

FIG.

place

of

studs

were

pieces

makes

out
fasteningwith-

is screwed

be

into

FIG.

piece.
the

be

piece

passed

where

This

be

to

the

over

of the

two

form

of

the

is

used

could

are

at

an

in

not,

projecting studs,

faces

head

51.

bolt

connected

tapped

while

connected,

50.

used,

pipe-fastening

bolt
to

75

BOLTS,

Fig. 5 1

The

where

stud

in

nut.

other

the

on

presses

shown

Tap-bolt

The

AND

NUTS,

as

angle

to

if

in

each

other.
There
nuts,

is

but

the

//

Exercise
a

in

square

as

for

the

foregoing

following proportions

.;"/, H=d,

Draw

"

neck; and

Figs. 47
nut

standard

no

and

48.

shown

A
in

with

counter

Fig.

49,

snug

sunka

in

.6d,

spherical or

head

are

bolt-heads

general

use:

\\d.

bolt with

button-headed
on

headed

T-headed

the

and

neck,

bolt with
bolt with

as

shown
sunk
counter-

square

76

WING

DRA

neck,

Fig.

shown

as

in

Make

51.

Hook-bolt.

Fig.

This

"

connected

pieces.

to

Fig.

To

52.

bolt

of

size.

is

used

where

it

through

to

bolt

one

this

of

application

the

keep

full

bolt-holes

have

hangers)

as

Scale
.

common-

fastening pieces (such

in

"

shown

tap-bolt, as

\"

case

form

undesirable

or

and

50,

in each

DESIGNING.

AND

flanged beams,

is

possible
im-

of

the

bolt
as

turning,, the

from

in

is

shown
is

body

DR

FIG.

made

the

in

shaped

hole

is

screw

Exercise
a

PLAN

cross-section

square

piece
of

the

full size.

12

Draw

"

to

bolt

to

and

the
an

piece.

The

ingly
corresponddiameter

of

body.

square

of

ELEVATION

flanged beam,
only, looking

into

passes

connected

in the

equal

52.

as

down

shown
on

the

hook-bolt,
in

bolt

ing
fasten-

Fig. 52,
head.

and
Scale

Bolts

Tapered
that

necessary

shows

Fig. 53

twisting

77

facilitate

to

should

be

bolt

that

strain

the

resist

to

fittingwhere
fit in

perfect

is in

the

on

shaft, the

common

use

diameter

the

on

and

its

line

hole.
in

the

coupling-

of

the

by

the

bolt

is

53-

where

is

strength

As

diameter

it is

the

shearing force, caused

FIG.

the

BOLTS.

propeller-shafts of steamships.

only

have

bolts

bolt

tapered

of

couplings

used

are

the

AND

NUTS,

SCREWS,

the

equal

to

flanges

two

gether,
to-

come

"fs.

As

the

tension

screwed

due

than

practice,

the

made

i"

\"

the

the

are

the
Exercise

are

instead

flanges can
"

Draw

of

the

be

much

shafts

made
a

resist

the

smaller

in

In

tapered part.
is

part
of

the

of

generally
from

nut

The

screw.

tages
advan-

parallel bolts
fit in

perfect

lengths

withdrawn,

being

screw

junction

made

easier

the

to

is made

the

of

different

only

height

diameter

the

the

13.

the

that

alignment,

the

screwed

be

better

at

the

can

insures

of

of

using tapered

which

part

end

they

has

bolt

this

and

gained by

diameter

of

to

less than

couplings

the

up,

small

diameter

equal
to

screwing

to

diameter

of

part

of

and,

smaller

shaft

owing

than

(i.e.,the

the

the

for

hole,
are

to

in

the

eter
diam-

effective

eter),
diam-

marine

shaft-

smaller.

tapered

bolt

for

78

DRAWING

coupling, showing
in

given

showing

mark

off the

join

which

ac

equal

14

of

diameter

equal

to

the

bolt

Foundation-bolts.

fastening engine-

bolt

tapered

the

line

point (a) draw

the
ab

to

radius

end.

in

the

the

-fa"long,

and

The

as

of

axis

large

the

This

class

of

machine-frames

and

this

on

(r) is

preceding
the

making
of

length

the

body

size.

half

"

the

shafts, and

inches, and

Scale

inches.

the

at

parts of

the

required taper.

exercise, leaving off the

From

parallelto

bolt

bolt, then

flanges, and

bolt.

of the

Draw

"

the

of

perpendicular

the

diameter

Exercise

be

draw

line

the

and

sions
dimen-

size.

centre

long

the

shaft-flanges,to

half

of the

makes

the

to

the

of

junction

inches

12

from

bolt, and

the

diameter

ab

line

the

the

DESIGNING.

Scale

Draw

"

of

part

Fig. 53.

Construction.
line

AND

bolts
to

is

for

employed
brick,

stone,

or

crete
con-

foundations.

to

The

it descends.

\" larger

than

bolt-head

is

sides

the

of

securing
a

frame

is held

diameter

^V

of

-\-f".

the

washer

the
of

The
The

hole

the

lead

which

and
the

is

distance
section

of

the

is

the

is

foot
to

the

2d
half

the

it and

the

sulphur,

thus

frame

is cast

cored.

This

of
is

-\-\"
the

bolt-head

to

After

engine-

pressure

equal
a

The

hole

or

as

J"

from

between

space

position.

in size

bolt-head.

molten

through
w

is fastened

is made

position by
hole

bolt

of

hole, the

in

of

increases

foundation-bolt

the

"f d'

in

form

hole, which

end

large

through

in

of the

end

firmly

foot

the

over

Lewis

is filled with

bolt

passes

diameter

the

hole

the

small

placed

projecting

washer

"

by cutting

stone

This

(Fig. 54).

Rag-bolt

The

with
foot

machine-

or

the

nut.

The

-\-J".

The

and

the

ness
thick-

diameter
is

of

oblong

the
and

SCREWS,

AND

NUTS,

79

BOLTS.

D.R.

FIG.

54-

8O

DRAWING

purposely

made

the

resistance

the

hole.

equal

6d

15

of

part

the

has

the

of

find

the

in Exercise
the

end
the

parallelto

of

edge

mark

other

of the

side

Lewis

The

the

to

which

In

side

the

Fig. 55,
in

shown

through

laterally.
last

the

bolt
page

rectangular,
The

bolt-head

of

the

The

to

is shown

79.

The

to

allow

proportions

exercise.

side

will

of the

thickness

line

side

of

distances

the
the

on

is used,

in

some

it

be

much

can

by withdrawing

be

may

taper of

parallelto

head

than

represent

has
(//)

is

as

(e) draw

accomplished

the

manner

other

equal

the

J" greater

be, which

(b)

point (b)

same

de

Fig. 55,

opposite

length

Fig. 54,
is

is

be of

the

rag-bolt, because

rag-bolt,equal

of the

design

the

off to

from

the

54,

senting
repre-

is below

through

dividers

line

head

hole

with

Fig.

mark

in the

of the

in

the

then

and

axis

in

and

the

plan

size.

full

complete

shown

Bolt,

The

bolt.

the

the

the

line.

foot, while

1-t/' per
of

centre

The

K.

key

To
the

easily removed,

more

of

and

shown

line

bolt-head

off with

preference

in

cases,

the

top

the

hole.

the

Scale

bolt-head, and
of

side

bolt-head

the

the

foot.

foundation,

of

from

(h) is -usually made

as

foundation,

side

withdrawn

elevation

in

beginning

Make

of

per

centre

stone

the

one

on

13.

large

the

of

top

taper

the

the

which

\\"

diameter.

the

top of

head

rag-bolt

Draw

"

the

engine-frame

in

ij"

obviously increases

against being

of

which

jagged,

taper

DESIGNING.

offers

Draw

"

"

distance

level

bolt

length

Construction.
the

and

cast-iron

(d)

making

the

and

Exercise
a

rough

The

to

AND

the

made

axis
as

in

6d.

holding
hole

down

that

the
washer

(/) of

the

the

bolt

pedestal
are

the

pedestal

the

key

to
same

is

passes
move

as

made

in

82

DRAWING

to

allow

the

large

the

small

end

of

sufficient

through
the

point

the

hole.

stop

from

The

length

of

Exercise

16

"

method

the

which

VIEW

of

END

an

bolt
bolt

Make
"

exercise.

equal

the

\"

for

""

\"

to

to

pass

clearance,

from

up

the

is made

key-head

and

bottom

equal

of

to

2/,

t.

of

ELEVATION

the

it to

as

leaving

out

2"

the

The

distance
the

Make

in

Scale

hole

case

an

and
size.

in

the

should

be

as

this

in

of

also

half

manner

2", /=

the

Draw

(w) -f-the

washer

of

foundation-stone

same

(a)

ing
show-

section

Fig. 55.

the

the

in

bolt

shape

in diameter.

Proceed

of

Lewis

foundation,

showing
passes,

diameter

the

PLAN

the

previous

""

securing

the

Construction.

movement

Draw

and

pedestal-base.

to

to

of

pedestal-base
through

equal

hole

bolt-head

the

of

end

the

should

its thickness

and

DESIGNING.

AND

longitudinal

-\-

half

the

w
'

longitudinal

movement,

Anchor-bolts
in
is

possible

that
under
The
a

nut

simplest

be

form

the

of

in

lower

Lewis

removable

the

head
the

split pin through

it to

keep

to

this

removed

removable

form

of

without
to

head

rust.

for

bolts

side,

is

it from

head, however,

difficultyafter
The
this

removable,

is made
bolt

usual
class

of

and

mended
recom-

wherever

top, and

the

on

are

made

are

from

recess

foundation

or

heads

inserted
or

of

place long enough

form

the

after

objection

cannot

The

be

can

rag

end

upon
a

the

to

them.

use

foundation

the

driving
The

preference
to

1-J"

passing through

bolts

the

in

so

either

are

as

it

Fig. 56.

by screwing

in

position

and

working loose.
is that
it has
most

the
been

nut

in

suitable

foundation-bolt

is

SCREWS,

NUTS,

AND

BOLTS.

DR.
FIG.

56.

84
shown

in

square

in

is

nut

corresponding

hole

from

out

working

the

at

area

be

As

ends.
the

which

of

the

to

the

cotter

bl for shear

The

to

length

and

is

the

washer

of

bolt

it

but

"

owing

equal S,

made

When

round,

its

the

35,

of the

D,

which

which
W

washer
the

the

to

cotter

the

at

the

to

bolt

may

strength.

bolt-end

through

uncertainty

material,

insures

should

cotter

The

W.

the

is due

of

reducing

resistance

the

/ of

when

are

make

the

gib-heads

in tension

and

which

the

with

body

made

fitting into

keep

provided

cotter

into

end

it is
a

is

turning

To

thread, the

of the

W.

end

hole

square

without

passes

would

usually

square.

washer

the

longitudinal shearing
practice

the

head

from

kept

the

by

extent

proportions

is

up

place

of

this

rectangular

strength

bottom

reduced
The

in

the

design

bolt

The

screwed

being

this

has

section, and
is fitted.

cotter

In

56.

Fig.

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

be

not

gives
is

diameter,

better

in

strength.

less than

.28

J"

to

support
round

made

will be

the

it is usual

ample

usually

of

or

the

by

found

formula

(L

="-3"
D

which

from

The
factor

of

value

of

fc

safety

of

20.

may

Take

be

taken
the

value

of/,

tons

in

and
this

allow
case

SCREWS,

tons

per

from

d^

Exercise

17

under

bolt-head
a

"

screws

on

the

is that

2d

such

thickness

head

of the

flat-headed

of

the

of

52" with

half

size.

flat-headed

The

76",

it is usual

the

covers

or

journal-bearings,etc.

length.

sides

cap-

caps

which

the

two

name

form,

is about

in

*'

the

flat-headed
in the

ij",

screwing

fastening on

of

VIEW

shown

are

for

for

reason

caps

which

tap-bolt

for

Make

distance

top, but

with

of

END

is the

screw

the

drawings

used

Scale

an

cap-screw

the

excepting

the

The

the

as

of

forms

like

are

""'.

the

of sandstone

stone

also

section.

for

showing

top

Make

in

different

they

Length

head,

the

J",

employed

machinery,
The

is made

anchor-bolt

an

the

brick,,

cotter

pieces together.

more

or

washer

foundation

stone

in section;

the

"/+

are

to

part of

with

Cap-screws,
Fig. 57,

the

of

ELEVATION

an

stonework

the

6' o",

Draw

"

and

and

T'ol

thickness

engine-frame

an

frame-foot

of the

8$

BOLTS.

\\d.

to

securing

The

inch.

square

AND

A'C/TS,

the

to

making

the

includes

the

angle
sides

angle

of the

making

cone

angles

the

heads

on

of 60"

with

the

represent

an

under

top.
The

The

diameter.
the

given

.2

of

the

in Table

The

The

diameter.

the

.7 of

button-headed

width

of the

screw

saw-cuts

The

other

the

on

the

screw

.6

of

heads

proportions

are

9.

collar
for

under

the

connected

the

for

used

are

bearing-surface
through

is

screw

diameter.

screw

Collar-screws
screws.

the

of

height

diameter.

screw

are

of

height

the
head

same

head,
and

piece

is

as

purpose

larger

the

hole

Fig. 58, gives

is

used

larger

where
than

cap-

the

screw

86

DESIGNING.

AAD

.DRAWING

9.

TABLE
CAP-SCREWS.

(WORCESTER

Hexagon

SCREW

and

Square

Fillister,

Flat

Round

and

Button

Heads.

Head.

Hexagon

Flat, Round,

Co.)

and

Button

Head.

Fillister

Head.

Heads.

Heads.

SCREWS,

CAP

are

place by setting
be

held.

the

BOLTS.

SCREWS.

FIG.

Set-screws

AND

NUTS,

58.

employed

to

hold

of

the

screw

point

parts

of

against

machines
the

object

in
to

DRAWING

The

by

G.

for

securing pulleys

Lansa,

(Fig. 59).
with

It

test

because

show

that

screw

must

piece

it is

is

The
is

equal
round

the

diameter

point

from

The

d.

to

of Bolts.

for

employed

due

pressure

yield (i) by
the

bolt

This
to

shearing
found

where

section;

off the

that

In
two

the

of

first
to

the

point

that

where

distance

the

of

the

point

the

diameters

of

the

and

the

the

to

of

length
and

cone

ordinary bolt

or

more

up

hanger

of

of

the

of

the

off

Comparing
of

nut

and

ends,

shearing

shearing strength

the

nut,

torsional

tension

thread

with

thread

pieces together by

with

threads

(2) by

bolt-head.

of

flats

equal

are

an

combined
the

threads,

the

across

The

screw.

angle

screwing

combination

part
of

change

tension
between

friction

bolt.

the

the

60".

or

"

holding
to

the

of

set-points is usually 45"

Strength

used

edges

serves

than

pivot-points (No. 8)

bottom

.5^

be

the

the

of

diameter

the

at

and

head

flat

and

This

material
not

the

after

form

of

cup-point

while

flat.
this

(No. i),

diameter

The

well

wear.

the

of

with

should

and

form

decreased

harder

excessive

the

to

held

and

I, 2,

the

power.

power

results

of

made

length

holding

edges becoming

good

holding,

about

to

wrought-iron

Nos.

at

round-pointed

point equal

the

get

to

the

holding

the

be

subjected

that

of set-screws
of

means

(made

tests

power

shown

form

case-hardened,

of
to

by

In

"

holding

shafts

greatest

was

but

sharp,

the

the

(No. 2), which

were

of

the

of

had

screw,

steel

found

was

radius

the

the

points

to

Set-screws.

the

of

A.S.M.E.)

with

screws

of

Power

Holding

DESIGNING.

AND

the

and

bolt

stress

those

torsion
of

the

threads;

(i)with
thread

would
due

the

the

rapid

(3) by

(2) it

will

the

nut

on

to

of the

causes

because

the

be
is

go

equal

the

about

to

of

the

depth

of

bottom

the

upon

internal

In

inch

square

broken

of

the

be

is

the

should

of

bolt

be

as

at

of

bolt

for

depend
sufficient

and

calculated

low, and

have

bolts

bottom

from
face-

no

less

thus

stress

than

"""

calculated
of

thread

joints frequently
Ibs.

2000

as

used

is screwed

very

in

bolt

unknown

an

the

when

the

leave

bolts

for bolts
low

that

pressure,

the

left

kept

Ibs. ; and

should

stress

after

the

at

studs

to

joints the

section
6000

internal

upon

ones,

permanent

exceed

not

should

.7
or

workman

strength

stress

small

very

in diameter.

should

the

the

than

Bolts

pressure

of

amount

pressure

joints, unless

by

to

section

it is found

less

subjected

the

quantity,

practice

injured.

are

exercised

the

uncertain

per

made

is

nut

withstand

to

As

up.

the

the

of

strength
in

care

strength

DESIGNING.

thread, but

vessels

face-jointson

the

twice

threads

the

diameter,

the

AND

DRAWING

Thus

"/,
,

the

diameter

required

at

the

found

will be

pressure,

of

bottom

the

by

of

exposed

area

the

pressure

the

number

ft

the

strain

Unwin's

formula

per

surface

square

thread,
the

to

withstand

formula

in square

inches;

inch;

of bolts;
per

for

square

inch;

cylinder-bolts or

studs

is

the

NUTS,

of the

the

diameter

the

pressure

the

number

the

strain

4000

Cylinder-cover

BOLTS.

gi

cylinder;
inch;

square

per

of bolts.
per

inch

square

of

diameter

the

cylinder

Ibs.

when

and

steam-chest

Ibs. when

2000

is

10"

the

less, and

or

above.
cover-bolts

should

be

of

steel.

soft

Bolts

subjected

of

Uniform

to

irregular strains

lighter

and

of

unscrewed

the

the

the

down
the

the

bolt-body
of

bottom
as

the

to

bolt

should

through

the

ends,

screw

The

method
fill the

of the

centre
as

diameter

shown

in

of the

in

of the
the

as

tension
it is made

screwed

part

part

by

the
at

is

cross-section

is obtained

leaving

at

turning

screwed
each

part
end

to

60.

where

bolt

from

Fig.

61.

hole

is found

of

that

it is fitted

hole

bolt

60.

Fig.

adopted

area

diameter

same

FIG.

Another

the

This

threads,
in

heavy vibrations,

to

threads.

the

shown

and

equal

When

"

by making

part

of

hole,

fit the

Strength.

stronger

bottom

at

AND

SCREWS,

Vd*

it is necessary

into, is
the

by

head

the

to

up

that

drill
to

the

hole

where

the

formula

(15)

DRAWING

92
where

d^

diameter

outside

the

dl

AND

of the

bolt;

diameter

diameter

DESIGNING.

of the
the

at

bolt-body;

bottom

thread,

of the

D.R.
FIG.

Devices.

Nut-locking1

is such

fastenings
will

slack

not

the

between

the

the

and

when

allow

the

the

subjected

of

nut.

the

much

to

rotating
A

down

nut

is the

This

is

the

top

on

lower

the
N

device

is

the

the

bined
com-

of

the

pressure
will slack

nut

friction

which

wherever

connection

used

keep

to

nut

work

the

is

screw

the

to

to

opposes
a

varying load,

bolt

the

the

power

sufficientlyreduced

Consequently,

allow

of

bearing-surface

the

and

pressure

holding

If, however,

been

screw

on

constant

vibration,

overcome

threads

will

loose
from

nut

backward.

Jam-nut

device.

and

locking

some

the

it has

and

to

those

and

nut

is much

vibration

back

of the

frictional

fastening.

on

to

the

between

there

load

gradually slack
unless

is

vibrations

turning

the

it

and

is intermittent
back

friction

piece

of

the

of

pitch

subjected

nuts

because

threads

with
nut

back

The

"

that

61.

to

bolt, while

press
the

simplest

simply
of

nut

the

lower
back

the

under

threads

in

the

frequently employed

most

second

turned

upon

and

nut
to

nut

as

of
L

tightly as
the

cause

side

(Fig. 62)

nut

the

press

screwed

possible,

threads
threads
upon

in the
on

the

the
upper

SCREWS,

the

of

side

bolt

will have

nuts

and

holding

FIG.

tension
bolt
In

is carried

when

or

the

make

the

upper

on

without

thin

height

of

Others

again
the

the

height of

wherever

nut

latter

jam-nuts

should

upper

thick.

The

the

equal
method
are

of

the

to

f
and

shown.

the

of the
thus

have

ordinary
rule

bolt, but

of the
methods

screw

used
This

is to

making

these
of the

top

special spanner

diameter

between

the

larger.
the

on

general

nuts,

on

the

be

nut,

diameter

the

load

put

requires

the

twice

the

and

up

the

is often

nut

compromise

each

the

to

taken

the

62.

ordinary

equal

between

independent

power

which

half

to

two

use

make

too

slack
is

nuts

first it

down

equal

nuts

recommend

thin

93

arrangement

nut,

the

being

nut

engineers

this

disturbing

wrench

many

We

By

screwed

it

turn

spanner

make

bolt.

practice, however,

because
to

the

on

all

of the

those

frictional

BOLTS.

Hence

bolt-threads.

of the

threads

AND

NUTS,

the

screw.

and

diameter.
these
method

portions
proof

is too

locking
It is

cumbersome

rarely employed

steel

nuts

on

reduced.

It

in

and

is that

Fig. 63
is

employed

manufactured
washer
home

by

is inclined

with
with

made

to

it.
the

In

of

washers

of

keeps

the

single coil

nut

tension

subjected

A" from

nuts

the

the

on

the

part

by

the

nut

the

of

following proportions
manufactured

heavy

form

the

when

the

the

shown

Beam

Co.,

bogie frames,

cross-section

to

to

bolt

railway-

in

Brake

American

the

on

The

of work.

inch, and

an

conforms

The

the

the

them.

consists

the

nuts

class

by

secure

side

its under

contact

this

to

common

diameter.

quite extensively

employed

engineering practice for securing

vibrations

in

63.

elasticity,when

its
is

which

large-sizednuts.

on

ij"

This

"

FIG.

is

used

over

Fig. 63,

spring, NL,

slacking back, by

be

to

Nut-lock.

Spring-washer
of

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

94

top of

etc.,
the

is screwed

washer

in

mately
approxi-

agree

afore-mentioned

company:
The

the

nut

outside

Ty.

diameter

J? the

distance

across

the

flats of

SCREWS,

The

inside

The

mean

18

Draw

an

is

nut

Nut-lock,

half

way

d the

t is

equal

twice

After

threads

is

partly

in the

threads

of

upper

the

closed

the

by

the

part of the
bolt.

The

width

"'"

w.

shown

as

full

nut

bolt

spring-washer

Fig. 64,

in

FIG.

opening

of

clown,

shown

across.

the

to

elevation

Scale

of the

diameter

screwed

\" diameter.

Wiles's
sawn

"

the

before

Make

"

thickness

Exercise
lock

diameter

",$

BOLTS.

AND

NUTS,

in

nut-

Fig. 63.

size.
is

an

ordinary

nut

home

the

is screwed

64.

5, which

screw

nut

to

thickness

clamp
t

the
of

causes

the

ing
correspond-

the

clamping

96

DRA

part of the

nut

may

WING

be

DESIGNING.

AND

made

equal

the

twice

to

pitch

threads.
F=

The

distance

diameter
under

of

diameter

nut

the

across

bolt.

As

i" in diameter
the

partly closing
is put

the

there
to

use

is

of
not

nut,

and

^/ nominal

sufficient

room

the

they

set-screw,

with

where

S=

screw

flat sides

saw-cut

its

upon

of

of the

T~*

hammer

on

locked

are

blow

before

nuts

by
the

screw.

UR.

FIG.

Nuts

Locked
shown

in

by

Means

Fig. 65

are

65.

of
used

Set-screws.
on

"

The

quick-moving

ments
arrange-

parts of

98

WING

AND

Locate

the

DRA

Construction.
the

and
far

as

of

the

"

part of the

we

projecting the

We

elevation.
elevation
The
fillet to

In

by

an

arc

All

parts

bears,

made

to

the

the

are

Ty

which

collar

in

as

same

2"/,
The

fits into

the

will be

2,

3,

4,

drawn

usually

the

but

collar

is cut

in
to

last

of

collar.

P=

of the

pin
the

the
The

{".
2

The

times

by

the

the

on

cylindricalpart
the

into

shown

risk of

in

losing

proportions
collar
diameter
its

from

kept

pressing

is fitted

The

nut

is carried

is secured

the

example

avoid

which

and

upon

exercise.

"d +

nut

which

upon

piece, and

The

removed.

the

length

that

in

I,

piece

Fig. 66,

P.

the

piece

are

2S

front

limiting points.

the

connected

which

piece,

C,

pin

cases

the

the

end

by cutting

cylindricalportion

collar

the

some

into

and

the

of the

groove

connected

it is screwed

counterbore

to

passing through

In

is

curve

and

in inches.

the

of

means

nut.

the

are

practice this

in

the

drawn

lines

construction

the

plan,

flat surface,

upon

part

the

formed

curve

passing through

surface

of the

the

the

Fig. 6$,

fit into

outer

5"

bottom

nut

office

in

as

bear

to

it is undesirable

nut

the

'nut

circle

the

the

already

as

drawn

from

plan

not

parts

drawing

dimensioned

are

set-screw

in

the

the

complete

can

is

complete

from

the

This

already

parts

we

complete

following

of

rotating by

of

the

drawing

When

elevation,

now

of

allow

by

5, 6.

upon

can*

method

understood

is

front

hexagon'

Draw
and

measurements

our

by projecting

view.

the

the

from

projecting

the

Taking

view.

the

plan.

elevation.

elevation

front

in

connecting-rod

plan

end. in

the

without

locking arrangement,
the

lines, draw.

centre

connecting-rod

proceed

can

DESIGNING.

hole

Fig.

66

it when

of the

nut

proportions
of

diameter,

half

\d
of

NUTS,

Exercise

20

shown

Draw

"

in

Fig.

elevation

an

66.

BOLTS.

AND

Make

of

the

2".

99

locking

Scale

ment
arrange-

full size.

D.R.
FIG.

Circular

into

which

which

to

the

suit

fits into

screwed

into

through
from

one

the
the

The

the

of the

the

surface
groove

shown

spanner

upon
in

unscrewing

in

grooves.

which

the

nut

the

Fig. 67.

On

are

cut,
for

employed

has
The
is

of
a

locking-plate (LP)

by

making

part

plate

projection
stud

carried,

the

the

locking

securing

consists

and

nut,

its

grooves

spanner,

locking-plateLP

curvature

of

for

longitudinal

projectionson
fit.

it up,

screwing
shaped

the

N,

nut

form

and

nut

used

are

of the

of the

The

"

Fig. 67

across-head

to

surface

outer

in

shown

piston-rod
the

Device.

Nut-locking

arrangement

66.

and

is

within

is

ing
pass-

vented
prethe

100

DRAWING

locking-plate
follows:

The

The

square.

stud

is

method

screwed

FIG.

distance
the

radial

from

the

centre

line which

DESIGNING.

AND

of the

passes

into

of

locking

the

metal

the
at

is

nut

the

as

proper

67.

nut

through

TV,' forming
the

centre

an

angle

of the

with

projec-

SCREWS,

tion

the

on

between

AND

'locking-plate equal
of

two

locked

be

NUTS,

in

the

After

the

grooves,

piece

fastened

side

upon

which

of the

centre

the

piece

The

until

The

nut

by

which

the

on

outside

the

be

ing
screw-

in the

piece
of

the

through

the

greater

upon

then

can

passes

gives

distance

into

it rests

recess

the

of the

and

nut

its

locking

diameter

across

the

angles

diameter

across

the

flats of the

length

of

projects

nut

device

are

as

.04^+.
the

Make

of
stud

the

hexagon;

hexagon;

the

the
=

Exercise

13.

diameter

d'
21.

+
and
"

Draw

stud

length
a

over

\"

2"

in

when

width
=

fluted

"

of

the

nut

to

square

is

The

diameter.

locking-plate equal

The

TV'its

the

all nuts

in the

groove^
stud

d' of

-f" for

and

under,
of

of

TV;

V/=

the

screwed

width

stud

that

It also

to

projection fittinginto

which

arc

the

\s

nut

fastening.

proportions

follows

or

it is

the

cylindricalprojection

insures

the

increasing

allows

corresponding

angular distance

locking-plate LP,

locking-plate.

without

from

with

concentric

is

its

N.

the

the

nut

the

nut

This

it bears.

the

over

has

nut

fits into

which

under

2"

the

by

The

N.

down

nut

passed

securely by clamping

locked

nut

is

of the

IOI

This

with

position, the locking-plate LP,

one

half

to

slots.

spanner

position.

any

BOLTS.

the

eter
diam-

body

on

-J".
circular

nut

and

locking

arrangement,
to

Construction.
the

making
the

draw

line

the

which

of the

groove

lines

not

are

this

is of

case

the

piston

cast

steel

piston.

The

locking-plate

through

this

is cut.

After

into

place

This

opens
sides

the

with

nut

the

-Pis

of

the

circular

locked

following proportions

may

on

the

be

used

plate:
d
F

"

nominal
distance

of screw;

diameter
across

the

inserted

friction

locking-plate against

flats

"

J";

the

the

as

radial
of

the

elevation.

for

Fig. 66.

recess

circular
hole
to

into

in

ing
secur-

The

projection

tapped

forces

the

by

in

has

and

recess

hexagon,

sides

nut

the

on

the

recess

ing-plate
lockthe

on

through it, and

its axis, the

locking-plate has

its

and

saw-cut

shown

nut-lock.

used

device

right angles

at

tapered plug

securely
the

of

tapped hole,

has

centre

in.

fits into

in turn

circle

ing
circumscrib-

the

corresponding

which

of

by

the

the

parallelto

are

circle

horizontal.

by

sides

nut-locking

fits into

which

side

be inked

to

LPj

thus

8"

the

the

plan complete

the

piston-rod to

the

from

of

grooves

formed

angles

is shown

68

Fig.

under

sides

Projecting

Construction

in

I, three

the

the

with

plan

spanner

circle

bisect

hexagon.

In

of the

30"

the

the

of

The

Fig, 67.

the

Scale

to

passing through

arc

complete

centres

half

the

on

of the

Tangent

of

angle

an

and

nut-lock

the

lines

radius

the

Determine

6".

lines, draw

centre

ijdf+i".

F=

make

to

the

Locate

"

diameter

Determine

in

foot.

the

of

Make

Fig. 67.

in

shown

as

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

102

the

been

ring

screwed

tapped

hole.

the

locking-plate against

the

piston.

caused

sides
for

by

The
the

of

the

recess.

the

nut

and

is

nut

pressure
The

locking-

SCREWS,

NUTS,

AND

BOLTS.

103

IO4

DRA

thickness

"

.o9d+

The

f"

in

size

of

the

Exercise

22

3"

Draw

the

hexagon

of the
the

of the

diameter
of

actual
the

large end,

i"

of

its

inches

in

threads

number

of

nominal

diameter
and

Pin

as

in

axis

of

made

used

allowing
the

Pins

piece

thickness
the

end,

radius

57-

The

To

find

turn

to

the

size

of

the

hole

tapped
for

at

every

substituting the

letters, and

piston-rod

give

the

and

the

screw

that

their

ance
resist-

cross-sections.

two

of

for

pieces by

connect

cross-section
are

small

drawing,

the

on

the

in diameter

reference

Make

flats of the

flats.

of the

-fa"less

shown

pipe-tap.

or

one

when

Fig. 69,
while

the

at

page

the

inch

per

"

semicircular

is

the

across

diameter

the

Pin-joints.

Split Pins,
of

for

of the

shearing

to

hole

the

find

and

the

end.

size.

by subtracting

at

on

Complete

length.

dimensions

hole

is the

the

and

small

full

across

72,

inch

Pipes

diameter

the

piston.

piston-rod.
Scale

distance

distance

tapped

Wrought-iron

outside

inch.

per

per

the

half

and

piston

8, page

threads

from

screw

table

Table

to

having

nut

turn

the

at

the

of

side

upon

hole

exceed

not

under

bear

to

tapped

the

find

need

nut-locking arrangement

threads

To

the

nut

part of the

"

but
-"-"/,

on

the

of

having 5

and

the

diameter

Construction.

of

allow

to

"

is

projection

Fig. 68, showing

^"

pipe-tap

The

twice

"

of

number

same

locking-plate ;

of

the

T-}- "y

"

the

having

nut

.7.

pipe-tap.

nut

inch

per

thickness

DESIGNING.

AND

standard

of

threads
H

WING

uniform
and

slight motion
pass

pieces
in

the

through,

from

with

provided

preventing

they

diameter

as

wire

head,

from
direction
in

rating,
sepaof

Fig. 67.

io6

WING

DRA

DESIGNING.

AND

10.

TABLE

STANDARD

Taper

A
rods

such

is

inch

of

one

^"

the

foot.

used

for

to

pin-joint

that

manner

^f

TAPER-PINS.

one-quarter

Knuckle-joint
in

STEEL

them

connecting

will have

two

rotary

"2

D.R.

FIG.

motion

Fig.
eye,

in
71,

one

by

formed

the
on

plane.
pin P
the

rod

The

FIG.

71.

connection

passing through
R,

and

the

is made,
the

single

eye,

on

shown

as

fork,

72.

or

the

in

double
rod

R'

',

SCREWS,

fork

and
for

which

is

allowed

be

pin

in

place

is to

Fig.

in

shown

in

method

Another

the

In

72.

by driving

for

Fig.

the

73,

pin

in

the

pin

collar

C,

taper-pin

collar

should

taper-pin.

holding

(IV)

washer

71,

the

of the

of the

use

loose

use

Fig.

off

octagonal

place by

diameter

common

rod
in

tve

taken

in

width

the

near

corners

the

shown

kept

The

rods

the

of

part

turning-pin

2^ times

less than

of the

have

arrangement
is

107

BOLTS.

or

collar.

the

it and

through

parts

square

the

to

The

and

turn

is secured

which

not

to

AND

makes

the

In

cross-section.
P

left

either

are

distance,

fork.

the

fits into

which

NUTS,

and

the

turning-

split pin,

is held

as

against

D.fi.

FIG.

turning by
the

on

eyes

arrangement
the
bush.

eye

of

taper-pin p

the

rod

all the
the

rod

and

wear,

driven

73-

transversely through

partly
due

', which

to

into

the

is fitted

the

pin

P.

By

turning motion,
with

steel

or

of

one

this
is

on

bronze

108

The

joint
for

Proportions

bending

Unit

of

the

the

\"

d=

in

place

in

Scale

Exercise

by

Fig.

Fig.

73.

the

allow

to

necessary
becomes

pin

END

the

at

split

partly

PLAN

SECTIONAL

rod

and

ELEVATION,

of

Draw

24

Make

make

73

worn.

method

the

pin

END

of

VIEW

holding

washer.

and

Make

size.

full

the

through

is

the

showing

71,

means

"

and

when

and

72

This

rod.

PLAN,

"

shown

joint

pin

Draw

23

Figs.

d.

of proportions

the

solid

produced

stresses

Exercise

in

given

than

stronger

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

VIEW

line

i"".

ab)
Scale

(the
of

the

full

in

section,

plane
knuckle

size.

of

section

joint

an

TION
ELEVA-

passing
shown

in

II.

CHAPTER

COTTERS,

KEYS,

Keys

of

generally made

in

general

the

into

fits

the

on

keyed

piece

groove

on

in

groove
the

than

Keys
saddle

shaft

the

piece

key;

Key.

slightlytapered

power
the

to

suit

the

depends
pressure

flat

of

"

in

key;
This

form

as

entirely

of

key

on

key

the

groove

or

into

which

keythe

of

that
the

at

it

when

.bottom

of the

classes:

part

key-bed,

the

of the
end

one

key.

I.

has

Concave

parallelsides,

is concaved
in

the

accurately

or

key.

and

shown
upon

taper

three

sunk

thickness

shaft,

the

3.

deeper

of

against

axis, while

is

the
into

the

form

power

groove

shaft, the

securing

divided

be
2.

it is

The

called

the

parallel to

accommodate

to

may

is

the

the

on

fits

rectangular keys,

or

square

The

holding

shaft.

is

holding

For

the

the

shaft, and

stationary

is

other

Saddle

side

it is

piece

frictional

along

the

on

key-seat.

or

way

are

commonly

are

and

cams,

They

cross-section.

in

offering

fits

key

steel, and

or

slightlytapered

piece moving

the

where

iron

cranks,

rotation.

by

is made

use

key-way,

keyed

the

motion

round

or

wheels,

connect

wrought

rectangular,square,
key

to

shafting transmitting

to

etc.,

employed

are

GIBS.

AND

Fig. 74.

frictional

shaft, the

on

As

the
the

but
under

holding

resistance, due
saddle

key

is

is
109

to

only

no

securing pieces subjected

adapted

for

this

is used

key

made

usually

be

to
to

for
I

in

securing

FIG.

Flat

allow

to

such

as

the

key

Key.

that

saddle

key

in

shaft.

It

makes

the

taper

on

flat

differs

from

the

filed

upon

the

surface

shaft

of the

it, there

under

SADDLE

OF

AND

FLAT

5/i6

3/16

shaft

and

the

are

rectangular
all sides.

in
When

called

so

keyed-on

slipping.

is

ency
tend-

KEYS.

7/16

5/i6

Keys

it drives

11.

Sunk

as

keyed-on piece.

DIMENSIONS

is increased

easily loosened.

more

key, Fig. 75,

TABLE

is

taper

ing
piece requir-

fairlyefficient fastening, but

the

burst

on

the

75-

of

it rests

by resistingthe turning
to

be

When

lightstrain.

employed

to

form

This

"

eccentric,

an

FIG.

74-

to

piece permanently,

when

but

96,

adjusted,

64

in

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

DRA

For

5/i6

because

cross-section

they

construction

subjected

and
to

made
strains

9/16

7/16

piece, Fig. 76,

engine

are

sunk

which

they
to

fit the

entirely
are

the

into

sents
pre-

usually

key-seat

suddenly applied,

on

and

FIG.

in

direction,

one

diagonally, as

in

AND

COTTERS,

KEYS,

they

76.

placed

are

Ill

GIBS.

to

drive

as

strut,

Fig. 77.

D.P.

FIG.

The

FIG.

77.

following table,

Construction,"

agrees

taken

from

approximately

D
B
T

OF

7/16
9/32 5/i6

5/32

In

RECTANGULAR

5/i6

mill-work,
etc., to

for

"

Richards's
with

Machine

practice:

average

12.

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

78.

7/16

SUNK

KEYS.

iJ/16
13/16

fastening pulleys, gear-wheels,

shafting they

are

made

slightlygreater

in

lings,
coup-

depth

112

DRAWING

breadth.

than

The

tools

they

following table

Sellers

Wm.

by

DESIGNING.

machine

For

in cross-section.
used

AND

"

both

Co.

generally

are

gives

for

the

sizes
and

shafting

square

of

keys

machine

tools:
13.

TABLE

Round
as

keys

on

to

such

Keys.
to

which

simply
half

and

this

end

drilled
The

on

shaft

half

The

diameter

the

into

portions
pro-

size
be

may

in

key-way,

standard

106.

page

used

are

the

forming

piece.

is shrunk

wheel

or

keys

hole

round

the

of

to

in

ease

given

are

crank

used

the

at

for

used

purpose.

key-way

Keys
the

on

shaft

the

keyed-on

sunk

into

the

driven

position

into

When

the

on

tight key

in and

keyed-on

in

as

after

keyed-on

positions

allow

to

out,

piece

of set-screws,

the

has

as

the

and
is in

to

to

in

keyed-on

long

place

into

fixed

The

trouble

slide

Fig.

cut

driven

adjusted

be

in

against moving

shown

to

key

is

piece

is

place,

the

avoid

to

be

to

position.

key

it is made

is held

key

Fig. 79,

piece

shaft,

the

is in

piece

shaft,

it is undesirable

when

used

are

after

means

the

sometimes

are

Round

shrunk-on

the

pins

nearest

Fixed

the

of

axle.

or

tapered

into

the

of

large

shaft

because

case

is

shaft

of

end

where

rotation

prevent

the
a

Taper-pins (Fig. 78)

"

80.

the

different

to

of

drawing

key-way,

along

the

shaft

and

by

114

the

DRAWING

work

thrown

being

in the

being deep

AND

DESIGNING.

of

out

shaft, it

Key-heads-

When

"

reached
formed

on

Strength
keys

the

of

They
keyed

Sunk

Keys

the

by

is
the

shows

all

shaft

"

length

of

as

the

radius

keys

keyed-on
of
of

at

keys
of

degree

any

shearing

transmitted

and

the

crushing

whole

crank-shaft

in

are

proportioned

the

amount

of
in

to

offers

suit

comparison

key;
resistance;

the

As

power

piece.

key

the

by

etc.

key;

which

of

couplings,

transmitted

power

exceedingly great

is

the

saddle

power

transmit

to

where

unless

"

with
the

to

shaft,

part

breadth

where

only

of

power

fastening pulleys, eccentrics,

off at

taken

calculated

the

by

when

as

be

required (i)

are

first conditions,

Let

head

is small.

general rule, however,

that

veniently
con-

in RlCHARDS'S

given

driving

subjected

are

(2) only

or

shaft,

it out,

Which

Fig. 76.

in

be

cannot

driving

The

used

piece

transmitted

etc.,

"

cannot
are

on

strains, and
power

of

key

of construction

Keys.

flats

on

accuracy.

by

key-seat.

CONSTRUCTION."

"MACHINE

or

of

point

shown

as

keys, and,

%2a.

purpose

method

and

proportions

for the

end,

one

the

in the

turn

cannot

FIG.

fitted

by badly

true

the

mitted
trans-

with

COTTERS,

KEYS,

the

of

modulus

11$

GIBS.

which

material

and

is

9000

for steel.

11,000

of

section

for

\j2Ocr

the

iron

wrought

for

.igod*fs

of

shearing

the

AND

shaft

for

and

wrought-iron

torsion

2182^*

for

steel shafts;
R

of

radius

the

through

arm

which

P, the

power,

is transmitted.

found

be

would

the

first conditions

the

Under

of

tight key

formula

the

by

strength

(16)

.....

by the formula

conditions

second

the

under

and

f,BLd-PR

(17}

In

the

and

of

keys

moment

of

moment

of

the

when

than

is greater

key

sliding keys

of

system

this

torsion

the

key crushing.

be

the
is

key

should

type

shaft

.......

crushing
tight fit

in the

proportioned
of

moment

if
is

take/,

we

(L)

2fs

generally greater
of

Length
seen

that
the

the

Key.

strength

length.

To

then

of

find

key-way,
have

the
=

In

B.

(18)

...

practice, however,

T.
the

From

"

the

Then

than

to

on

key shearing

-=fc"

and

action

the
the

key

foregoing

it will be

directly proportional

is

length

formulae

when

the

full power

to"

of

Il6

AND

DRAWING

shaft

the

is

No.

formula

be

to

DESIGNING.

transmitted

the

through

From

key.

17

\oooBL-

2i82"/",

21824"

from

of B

value

substituting the

Table

12

in terms

of

the

of d

2182^'

shaft

the

when

Hence

length (L)

the

less

so

short

keys

that

Where

used.

are

placed at rightangles
keyed-on

in the

is held

piece

rocking

from

to

the

upon

are

material,

same

key (Table 12) should

the

has

key

one

key

common

When

i.6d.

than

be

the

of

the

and

of

hub

the

sufficient

not
two

keys

each

other.

upon

three

shaft

when

keyed-on

piece

strength, two
used

are

By

they

shaft

should

be
the

prevents

is not

is

more

or

this arrangement

points, which
the

not

it

tight fit

hole.
COTTERS

are

to

keys employed
and

tensile

transmit

power

sections.

The

The

adopted,

the

one

by
cotters

as

with

it is easier

to

to

usually

rounded,
the

make,

They
the

of

resistance
are

ends

cotter-way

forces.

both

or

pieces which

connect

compressive

through

section, and

to

as

driven

connected

shearing

made

in

rounding

versely
trans-

pieces
two

at

rectangular

shown

which

are

subjected

are

and

cross-

in

cross-

Fig. 83.

ends

is done

is

generally

by drillingtwo

KEYS,

of

holes

cutting

the

out

extent

however,
ends,

and

metal

does

cotter-way
same

equal

diameter

not

are

so

for that

the

to

the

the

are

easily fitted
reason

of

left

into

fitted

the

Again,
pieces

this

form

to

quite

into

the

of
the

cotters,

with

cotter-ways
make

and

cotter

The

sharp.

engineers

some

rectangular cross-section,

thickness

cottered

corners

117

GIBS.

them.

between
weaken

not

when

as

AND

COTTERS,

round
of

cotters

corresponding

cotter-

ways.

DM.

FIG.

of

Taper
of

means

drawing
in

adjusting
them

Fig. 83,

are

upon

Cotters.

but

length

together, they
when

parallel,as
the

When

"

the

friction

in

used

as

Fig. 56.
between

83.

cotters

of the

tapered

in

tapered

cotters

width,
the

as

pieces, or

holding-piece only,

When

their

employed

connected

made

are

are

for
as

sides

depend

bearing-surfacesfor retaining

Il8

DRAWING

in

them

(J"

foot),
the

holding
as

great

in

Fig. 84

means

of

cotter.

and

R\

rods, R

joint

is made

formed

on

is used

for

end
a

in 24

employed

are

taper

be

may

Cotter-joints.

for
made

shows

to

of the

rod

cotter

until

the

only,

method

of the

the

arrangement

of
and

rod

R', and

the

pieces together by

two

resist thrust
end

When

"

securing

Fig. 83
together

driving

end

means

tension

to

by fittingthe

the

of

Proportions

shown

than

more

foot).

subjected

is

special

(2" per

and

fastening

where

be

not

against slacking, the

in 6

as

DESIGNING.

should

taper

but

cotter

Forms

rod

the

position

per

AND

into

socket

the

two

The

tension.

through

collar

fastening

socket

bears

6*
and

against

the

end.

socket
As

cotter-jointis proportioned

longitudinalforce

proportional

be

the

where

transmitted
the

to

the

rod

are

following proportions

withstand

the

of

the

increased

to

d^

fore
there-

rod, unless
insure

in accordance

are

greatest

rod, all parts will

diameter

of the

dimensions

The

by

to

with

ness.
stiff-

good

practice:

b, breadth

of cotter

/, thickness

of cotter

d, diameter

of

D,
,

/},

pierced

of socket

diameter

of collar

/, the

of collar

length
K

to

of the

4.

rod

1.2^;

in front

diameter

t, thickness

.3^,;

of socket

diameter

D,

1.3^,;

on

rod

of cotter

behind
on

cotter

rod

"

rod

and

socket

2.4^,

or

2d.

2^,;

1.5^,;
J^;
beyond

the

cotter

from

COTTERS,

KEYS,

When
The

clearance

extend

not

be

may

of

made

119

the

solid

rod

(V,)

-J-". The

cotter

need

of

socket

more

greatest diameter

the

rod

the

on

diameter

often

arrangement

an

engine piston-rod to
collar

GIBS.

the

home.

driven
shows

Fig. 84

the

beyond

4" when

than

the

is known

AND

Here,

piston.

the

resist

to

for

used

securing

instead

of

thrust, the

an

having

rod-end

is

tapered.

FIG.

In

to

only
these

to

resist

be

and

of

diameter

and
(*/,)

proportion

d^ is found

diameter,

rod

the

in

The

stresses.

We

has

rod

is increased

compression,

rod.

85.

condition

smaller

is

possible

rod

would

joint independently
by

the

formula

to

find

therefore

jected
sub-

under

proportioned

must

of

consequence

joint being

the

if

excessively strong
solid

the

diameter

actual

buckling

tension

conditions

rod

the

of

Such

rod.

of the

diameter

having

pierced part
solid

the

than
the

when
its

the

Fig. 85,

diameter

FIG.

84.

of

the
the
the

"

(19)
from

which

"78547,
Where
taken

P
at

is the
7000

and

pull

on

5000

the
for

rod.

^For

wrought

steel

iron.

The

rods

ft

may

be

taper of the

120

DRAWING

rod-end
from

in

end

be

may

the

where

Exercise

in

Exercise

26

piston-rod
and

Figs. 84

the

that

assume

Construction.
suitable

other

for

(d) at

diameter

in

cotter

end

the

to

the

taper

in

of the
b

the

actual

full

the

the

in

with

to

Ibs.

in.

dimensions

of

the

the

the

Measure

mark

for

off the

shape

the

in

the

of

rod-

finding
drawing,

off all reference

leaving

and

(d)

draw

Complete

The

d find

construction

inked

and

size.

given
13

in

2f"

25.

manner

Exercise

The

d^

from

line and

centre

shown

as

diameter

Exercise

in

fasteninga

of 9000

stresses, then

then

taper.
be

rod

point according

proper

not

load

Scale

joints, as

connection

need

to

the

HALF

for

of the

determined

along

of the

end

cotter-joint shown

the

cross-head,

12.

resistingtensile

given

the

fillingin

end,

f till size.

and

subjected

Having

"

of

diameter

cross-section,
in

construction

is

/ and

distances

the

taper of

proportions

off the

the

rod

having

rod-ends

rod

Make

85.

the

ELEVATION,

Scale

piston

the

at

at

rod-

tapered

curved

cotter-jointssuitable

the

to

length, i.e.,

rectangular.

PLAN

2".

of
the

on

and

SECTIONAL

Design

"

is

cotter-way

d=

is

Fig. 84,

in

as

foot

diameter

SECTIONAL

Make

i" per

to

cotter-way

Draw

"

HALF

Fig. 83.

steel

the

the

25

and

The

begins,

when

cotter-way

PLAN,

when

curve

J"

from

in 24.

taken,

is

made

to

12

DESIGNING.

AND

letters.

AND

COTTER

When
a

thin

gib,
ends

is

one

of

the

strap,

as

in

used.

which

The

project

pieces
Fig.

gib
over

connected

86,

is

GIB.

second

provided

the

strap

the

by

cotter,

with

S,

thus

head

cotter

called
at

preventing

is
a

the
it

122

DRAWING

the

breadth

to

have

the

and
are

equal to,

is

be

/ may

of the

or

equal

end

the

to

less than

not

be

the

cotter

The

Fig. 87,

where

width

//, the

Cotter-locking
that

one

one

screw

or

points
the

by

of the

or

two

the

cut

on

the

the
from

of

the

from

top of the
The
set-screw

the

top of the

the

cotter

width

of

point,

the

the

the

groove

the

is

cotter

is

depth

travel
travel

the

in

and

the
a

in

of

cotter

point

motion

shallow

Fig. 89.
The

f".
the

of the

gib

no

to

cotter
cotter

is

is

used,

passes)to

the

just in place.

equal
=

gib-

burs, raised

exceed

not

gib (or where

which

into

the

of

shown

as

The

top of the

piece

the

bottom

the

set-screw.

part of

is shown

until

rod

the

to

the

possible, is

keep

need

equal

when

and

the

gib

ij/.

where

cotter,

from

simple method,

cases,

on

the

top of the

interferingwith

bears

is

of the

"

To

set-screw

groove

diameter

distance

the

all

from

of

rod).

cotter,

widest

the

gib-head,

cotter.

screw,

as

clearance, should
the

at

through

the

side

of

diameter

of the

nearly

set-screw

the

distance

c, the

cotter

from

constructing gib-heads

set-screws

the

of

/, the

Arrangements.
in

and

of the

distance

between

the

height

against

press

cotter,

length
+

used

point

groove
The

is

T.

1.52".

of

of

method

cotter

pierced by the

/', the
2

rod,

single cotter,

it is

(the difference

c'
the

and

head).

strap,

and

gib

and

i.$T.

of the

end

the

to

cotter

the

of

the

(the diameter

of the strap where

less than

be

as

the

as

than

.2^B

to

Then

strap.

little greater

made

not

DESIGNING.

strength

same

',the thickness

should

AND

to

-fa".

the

diameter

of

the

KEYS,

In

the

Fig. 90
a

head

formed

the

on

fastening in,

is locked

cotter

and

used

be

may

an

lower

and

upper

which

gib,

This

cotter.

123

GIBS.

by

the

of

extension

screwed

upon

AND

COTTERS,

through

passes

is used

arrangement

for

forcing

nut

the

for

into,

cotter

oosition.
of the

d, the diameter

height

h, the
the

As

of the

side
the

that

cotter

head

is in

the

which

i^d.

with

contact

/;

parallelwith

is not

locking-screw

through

head

cotter

the

of

axis

of the

screw

the

screw

gib,

the

is

passes

the

hole

in

elongated

D.D.

FIG.

to

amount

an

travel

-4-

Ty

Exercise
SECTIONAL

and

equal

the

taper of the

cotter

90.

in its

length of

for clearance.
27.

"

Draw

PLAN,

cotter-jointto

diameter

to

FIG.

89.

(d) of

the

and

PLAN,

resist
rod

END

SECTIONAL

tension

2"

The
.

and

ELEVATION

SECTIONAL

of

cotter

to

of

VIEW

Ibs.

12.000

have

Make
an

HALF

gibthe

adjust-

124

DRAWING

of

ment

.""
the

locking

with

by

28.

Exercise

taper

cotter

AND

Draw

of

the

double

locking

diameter

an

to

resist

of

the

rod

f"
3".

"

Scale

method

Scale

set-screw.

Fig.
of

taper

full

in

Fig.

in

10.

PLAN

88,

joint
the

Ibs.,

33,000

size.

size.

full

The

90.

of

of

AND

shown

as

in

and

the

ELEVATION

tension

Show

8.

SECTIONAL

shown

adjustment
of

cotter-joint

arrangement

proportioned
have

of

and

gib-

in

means

"

DESIGNING.

cotter

Take

with

to

be

to

the

III.

CHAPTER

RIVETS

RIVETS

The

plates

When
sufficient

joint

in

with

steel, wrought
two

or

of

iron,

plates

more

with

rivet-shank.
the

through
the

either

head

punched

or

the

position

plates

plates

to

vide
pro-

by hammering

Unwin

Fig. 92).

calls

or

riveted

fastening."

permanent

by being

into

pressed

machines

rivet-making

that

in

rivet-point

made

are

drilled

projects beyond

(see

simplest

"

than

shank

the

either

placed

is
of

length

Rivets

of

fasten

to

are

diameter

rivet

forming

the

bars

used

riveted

machine-pressure

by

round

are

be

to

the

for

JOINTS.

together.

-^g-"larger

holes

RIVETED

from

and

brass,

or

permanently

made

are

copper,

AND

dies

while

shape
of

suitable

rivet-heads

shown

using

red-hot
size

and

by

Figs.

form.
The
92

to

96

The
up

the

92) by

the

rivet

with
the

steeple
using

head

to

rivet

is

handle

long
and

is made

by

cup-shaped

die

head
the

red-hot

heated
is held

at

called

or

by
a

applied
either

riveters

only

riveting

the

snap

when

and

there

weight

two

before

point-head.

fulcrumed

man's

by

hammers

the

riveting

hand-riveting

rivet

point-head

after

the

for

position

opposite

and

using

from
the

later.

point

hammer

distance
while

of

of

proportions

given

before

in

large

be

the

is called

placed

of

will
end

Just

and

names

of

means

convenient
at

the

in the

end,
form

(Fig.

head

snap.
125

126

DRAWING

suitable

by

dies, the

hydraulic,
the

the

fillsthe

steady

pressure

the

force

such

the

from
the

from

rapid

blows

Rivet-holes

that

extent

after

material

the

holes

Drilled
holes

is the

holes

punched

the

and

of the
size and
can

be

spacing,
increased

Calking.

contact

At
in

with
a,

bv

the

is
of

edge

Mr.

is
and

J. W.

the

of

is

the

ever

by

process

plate

is

tributed
dis-

rivet-holes.
than

punched
the

to

accurate

more

rivet

in

shearing

to

of

edges

sistance
re-

the

holes.

perfectlysteam-tight
which

strip

narrow

into

brought

forcible

it.
the

an

uniformly

favorable

the

when

and

difficultywith

of the

are

jures
in-

dangerous

is not

as

should

punching

such

Another

is not

joint

one

the

to

stress

resistance

plates

expensive

more

edge

shown
at

for

plate is destroyed,
the

plate beneath

91,

hand-calking,

patented

the

hole

shearing, but they

This

he

Fig.

the

rivet-holes.

riveted

No

"

bevelled

the

because

square

and

steel

punching,

usually

to

with

rivet

allowed

is not

time

by slightlyrounding

calking.

without
of

rivet

the

upon

imperfect spacing

are

sharp

comes

rigid

strain

to

the

between

gradually applied, while

through

surrounding

joint is subjected

the

formly
uni-

steam-riveting, because

be

can

elasticityof

the

is exerted

hole.

punched

annealed

be

always

cause
hand-riveting, be-

former

to

generally

fill the

lever, steam,

rivet.

sufficient

that

properly

to

latter

the

of

preferred

former

than

better

of the

is

Hydraulic riveting
the

much

whole

either

shape

into

pressed

Machine-riveting upsets

pressure.

pressure

is

being

power

hole

even

the

through

point-head

motive

pneumatic

or

and

rivet

rivet

the

machine-riveting

In

DESIGNING.

AND

calking-tool commonly

improved

Connery

of

form

of

Philadelphia

used

calking-tool

and

known

as

the

edge

of the

locomotive-builders

with

with

quite
Miller

in

their

ing-machine
"

of

in

general

In

as

91.

first-class

has

become
and

Peabody

boiler-shops.
describe

"Steam-boilers"

pneumatic

caik-

follows:

general principle it

cylinder

style of calking

favorite

calking-hammers

pneumatic
most

the

to

aven

high-pressureboilers.

for

FIG.

Calking

finish

concave

is

This

plate.

127

JOINTS.

the

calking-toolfrom

concave

calked

RIVETED

AND

RIVETS

in which

works

resembles
a

piston

and

rock-drill
and

rod

on

the

consists
end

of

128

DRAWING

which

is the

piston

at

It makes

about

not

The
show

by

The

edges
leak

the

the

during

rivets

are

of

side
small

is when

it

the

hammer

the
The

in

Forms
use

will

be

rivet
of
are:

of

process

inspector

is done

purpose

and

out

Rivets.

(i)

In

employed

by

the

standard

button

head

FIG.

92.

rivet

new

forms

the

under

it with

is not

finger;
a

of

the
of

the

of whose

if any

top

replaced by

The,

"

the

the

they
of

some

part

discover

; if the

times

when

except

testing.

tapping

easily detected

is cut

four

so

hand."

calked

to

the

rounded,

be done

by

as

slowtlyalong

by placing a finger on
and

rivet

is

boiler

for the

made

loose

general

This

suspected

tightit
case

an

not

are

examining

loose.

calker

The

15" long

and

is well

can

tube.

-^g-"
long.

it

tool

Work

plate.

flexible

outside

presses

the

working

minute

of the

pneumatic

largest boiler-shops
duty

who

rivet-heads

of

through

diameter

in

edge

lower

Ibs.

strokes

workman

calked.

with

rapidly

2\"

for

supplied

is

60

or

working

1500

injure the

to

50

is about

be

to

seam

of

pressure

all,is held

over

as

calking-tool.Air

which

calker

as

DESIGNING.

AND

in

fectly
per-

such

one.

of

rivets

(Fig. 92); (2) the

130

DRA

The

WING

DESIGNING?

AND

is the

steeplepoint-head

form

used

mostly

in hand-

riveting.
The

countersunk

sufficient

for

room

used

unless

than,

and

point-head

it is
not

FIG.

95.

Proportions

of

figures in

the

Champion

terms

to

the

as,

only

other

impossible
strong

as

the

of the

one

is

used

forms

avoid
other

should

and

it.

It

of

Rivet

the

Co.

The

"

diameter
and

is

is not
be

never

costly

more

forms.

FIG.

Rivet-heads.

there

when

in

proportions given
d

agree

96.

are

those

closely

used

with

by

general

practice.
Length
The

length
and

of

Rivet-shank.

(Fig. 92)

for

countersunk

point-head
id

plates

For

countersunk

For

steeple point-head

For

steeple point-head, large, machine-driven

For

button
The

and

plates.

id

-|"\'f

point-head

above

but, since

point-head

the

proportions
holes

are

are

good

larger
-"-$"

for
than

ordinary boiler-plates,
the

rivet, the

shank

RIVETS

should

increased

be

hole

the

is

Exercise

has

and
29.

shown

in

Figs. 92

from

Table

14,

see

different

the

Scale
There

"

about

13!

plates to properly

smaller
-"-$"

riveted

the

toward

of

96, making
135,

each

equal

diameter

fill

in

are

in diameter

point.

style
J"

to

of

of

and

riveting

selecting

rivet.

For

ventions
con-

least

five

size.

full

common

joints, viz.

at

use

the

double-riveted

the

joint (Fig. 97);

for thick

drawing

22.

of

JOINTS.

slight taper

to

Joints.

styles

usually

page

page

Riveted

length

Make

"

RIVETED

space.

rivet-shank

The
than

in

annular

additional

the

AND

single-rivetedlap-

lap-joint with

staggered

spacing (Fig. 98) ;

the

double-riveted

lap-joint

with

chain

(Fig. 99);

the

single-riveted butt-joint

with

chain

spacing

spacing (Fig. 100);

double-riveted

the

has

lap-jointwhich
the

in
than

two

plates

than

more

two

of

rows

rivets

each

on

of the

side

the

tiple-rivet
mul-

of

rows

multiple-riveted butt-joint which

the

lap ;

butt-joint;

rivets

has

line

more

where

the

together (Fig. 103).

butt

NOTATION.

the

diameter

of

rivet-hole

the

of

or

rivet

when

riveted

up.

the

pitch
of
row

the

of

one

the

rivets, i.e., the

rivet

to

the

from

of the

centre

(Fig.97).

distance

distance

from

next

the

in the

tre
cen-

same

y
the

centfe of

rivet-hole

to

"

edge

of

plate (Fig. 97).

r

the

rl

the

distance
distance

joints with

between
between

the

outside

welt-stripand

double-riveted

on

rows

rows

of

butt-joints.

rivets

joints.
on

lap-

DRAWING

132

least

the

edge
/

/t

plate

thickness

the

distance

of

DESIGNING.

AND

of

the

between

(Figs.97

margin

"

rivet-hole

of

edge

and

103).

to

plate.

thickness

of outside

welt-stripsfor butt-joint.

"

/,

thickness

of inside

welt-stripsfor butt-joint.

thickness

of inside

welt-stripsfor lap-joint.

ft

the

tensile

fs

the

shearing strength

strength

per

inch

square

square

per

of the

in Ibs.

plate

inch

of

the

rivet

in

inch

of

the

plate

in

inch

of

Ibs.

shearing strength

the

fff

per

square

Ibs.

fc

the

"

compressive
the

boiler

of smallest
=

the

width

of widest

the

width

of narrowest

/""

square

in inches

the

on

of

outside

course

diameter.

per

in Ibs.

of

radius

the

plate

crushing strength

or

working

pressure

outside

diameter

welt-strip.
welt-strip.

in Ibs. per
of

inch.

square

boiler-shell

at

of

course

smallest

diameter.
F
E

of

factor

efficiencyof

riveted
stress.

total

area

safety.

tensile

of rivet-hole

Strength

of

(1) Shearing

the

There

"

are

single-rivetedlap-joint may
rivet,

(2) Tearing plate along

2,

.7854^**

Single-riveted Joint

in which

ways

joint.

as

shown
the

at

centre

in

five different

give

Fig.

way

91.

line of rivets, shown

at

2.

(3) Tearing

the

plate through

the

margin,

shown

at

3.

RIVETS

RIVETED

AND

the

rivet

the

plate

(4) Crushing

JOINTS.

the

plate

front

of the

or

in

^3

front

of

the

rivet

(4, 4).
(5) Shearing
The

The

of

resistance

The

by experiment
equal

practice, it
The

will

to

be

to

tearing

be

as

resistance

shown

at

of the

shearing

the

if the

rivet

resist
that

or

joint is
tearing

shearing
the

The

2t

latter

or

made

plate

/ x

/;

general

work.
is

front

in

(3)

of

the

rivet

the

margin
the

generally
of the

it w.ill be

plate
be

in

inch.

Take

to

resist

strong

front

of

shearing

enough

the

to

rivet,

so

disregarded.

boiler-plateis
PR
=

for / should

(4)

enough

"

ft XE

an

distance

PXKX_F

of

at

been

fc

strong

crushing

may

thickness

value

with

plate

the

The

has

agrees
this

(2)

5, 5,
=

But

rule

at

the

throughout

resistance

to

this

when

enough

great
as

(i)

line of rivet

tearing

to

;...

centre

on

plate

t X

The

d)tXft.

maintained

compressive

38,000.

i\d, and,

to

(5, 5).

rivet

/,

the

of

resistance

made

/is

plate

(P-

rivet

d*

found

of the

shearing strength
7i

in

n,oooE'
taken

be
E

.70.

as

the

"

nearest

"

"

even

(5)

teenths
six-

134

DRAWING

The

thickness

AND

of

DESIGNING.

dome-sheet

may

be

calculated

thickness

of

tube-sheets

the

by

formula.

same

In

locomotive-boilers

shells

and

shells

When
thickness

allow

In

the

back

throat-sheet

the

the

side

fire-box
The

and

riveted
maintain

the

-J-"thicker

made

than

the

over,

should

Ty

thicker

will be

is

separated

from

be

the

made

sufficient.
the

fire-box

thickness

same

as

is

of Rivet-hole.
obtain

to

It is very

"

the

and

the

desirable

in

side

ing
design-

highest efficiency and

tightness by using

proper

\"

made

usually

thick.

joints

make

"""".

to

flanging.

crown-sheet

TV

it is usual

sheets, viz., TV'-

sheets

Diameter

thick

to

tube-sheet

latter

fire-box

door

f"

usually

shells, fr/ or

thick

When

for extra

"

equal
is

for

-fa"

to

less than

are

throat-sheet

to

J"

be

of tube-sheets

The
shell

should

over

the

pitch

too

not

still

long

for

calking.
In
that

the

determining

it should

be

Now

crushing.

diameter

strong
the

d of

enough

resistance

to

the

rivet

resist

both

it is necessary

shearing

and

shearing is

to

*""
4J
while

that

of

crushing

is

dtfc,
which

shows

former

as

such

that

the
a

the

square

relation

latter
of the

between

increases

as

diameter.
the

length

the
So
of

diameter
that
the

if

we

pitch

and

the

can

tain
ob-

and

the

RIVETS

of

diameter

or

To

our

tightness

the

depend

d and

Barr

following

ratios

the

diameter

of

the

nearest

strength

his

in

d and
of

for

rivet

(tensilestrength

of rivets

riveted
/ in their

55,000

of

test,
in

44,625

Boilers

"

of

the

rivet

considered.
the

for

the

joint
that

so

length
has

the

of

never

have

we

determining

of

the

to

ratio

report for

Ibs. tensile

shearing strength

per

Furnaces"
of

the

gives

plate

and

single-riveted lap-joints,using
of

of

inch,

an

for

plates 55,000

Ibs. per

square

steel

plates and

Ibs. and

shearing

inch):

14.

Railway

joints in 1895

and

thickness

the

sixteenths

committee
on

limit

or

TABLE

be

not

maximum

between

the

even

rivets

need

existing practice

the

steel

highest efficiency

t.

M.

Wm.

Mr.

the

give

'35

crushing strength

by experiment

largely on

between

will

rivet

the

JOINTS.

perfect tightness

insure

ascertained

been

of the

knowledge
will

that

pitch

as

front

plate in

the

RIVETED

rivet-hole

the

with

consistent

AND

gave

Master
the

Mechanics'

following

tion
Associa-

ratios between

single-rivetedlap-joints(steelplates

strength
square

and

inch)

iron

rivets

of

38,000

Ibs.

136

DRAWING

DESIGNING.

AND

15.

TABLE

Pitch
is reduced

the

net

section

are

also

joint is

hand

other

unless

fact

the

if the

it is increased
to

the

long pitch

shorter

that

under

pitch

the

is too

in diameter

tensile

and

pitch

strength

large
high

rivet

to

of the

diameter
such

pressures

between
hole

the

thickness

in Table

given

/ of

15

plate

and

the

recommended

are

practice.

the

find

the

boiler-plate

tight.

the

of

modern

the

/ and

make
ratios

good

the

by

to

mean

diameter

shear

plate, but

of

hard

the

on

of

strength

total

shearing strength

in

limited

The

To

will

rivet

correspond

as

plate, but

the

The

"

rivet-holes, and

the

by

weaker

long

Rivets.

of

pitch/

in terms

of the

thickness

of the

plate

d\

diameter

(6)

Exercise

48"

30.

diameter

square

inch,

strength per
=

38,000

"

and

square

single-rivetedlap-jointfor

carrying

plates

Ibs. per

(l) Find

Design

inch
square

thickness

soft

be

to

and

iron

inch.

t of

of

steam-pressure

steel
rivets
Scale

plate by

of

55,000

of
6"

formula

"

boiler

148 Ibs. per

Ibs.

tensile

shearing strength
i

foot.

5, page

132.

DRAWING

F"

the

number

the

factor

Therefore,

DESIGNING.

AND

in the

of rivets
of

safety

circumferential

6.

have

substituting, we

285,475 Ibs.,

and,

the

subtracting
of

The

Ibs.

17,654.2

total

(p-d)

force

txft

the

from

of the

plate
X

1.125

resistance,

of the

in favor

resistance

-375

shows

Prof.
"

"

the

that

Lanza

along
section
been
section

the
the
of

made
an

of

seams

joint

other

the

of

of

plate
"

of

use

as

excess

riveting, or,

of;

in favor

but
of

boiler

of

the

efficiencyof

of the

plate,
enough

above

sions.
dimen-

riveted

joints in

efficiencyshould

rivets, for it is clear

manner,

if in

maximum

rivet-holes, there
line

Ibs.

288,750,

says:

line

the

Ibs., from

single-riveted lap-joint is strong

Mechanics"

riveted

in any
out

of 20,929

referring to

plate along

occurs

force, 267,820

difference

Applied
A

(9)

Ibs.,

288,750

total

circumferential

for the

his

the

ference
dif-

75

subtracting

which

55"ooo
'

remains

is

there

have

we

rivets.

and,

seam.

by shearing the
remains
in

other

an

words,
"

strength

fracture
in

other

occurs

if failure

rivets

or

of

excess

single-rivetedjoint
when

that

fracture

strength

along
which

along

directions

ing
tear-

the

net

has

not

the

net

is immaterial.

AND

RIVETS

"If

the

strength

it would

constant

efficiencyof
net

the

to

extends

This

of the

the

so,

in

in

smaller

the

merely,

as

should

never

should

be

if the
is

lap

"

heated

is the

ordinary
be

exceed

given

ratio

varies

the
of

and

is

the

this

slightly

the
from
is

in

rivetingwith

Boilers
is wider

be

to

and
for

safer

chain

plate
seams

Steel

practice because

Furnaces"

It

is

referring

heating

of

highly

as

of

the

it

fire with
of the
than
page

points

iron

rivets;

rivets, and

iron

Particular

attention

fire.

steel

oxygen

as

the

not

to

steel

that

important

method

Furnaces,"

the

of

longitudinal

and

stronger

than

section

throughout,

thickness

rivets

zigzag

99

double-riveted.

and
"

heated

thick

Fig.

the

steel rivets.

high enough

All

says:

free

in

net

greater

the

the

of

stronger

bright cherry-red.

to

is

least

Boilers

uniformly

they

the

considered

are

rivets

impossible

"

riveting and

at

steel

experiment

Barr's

be

in his

temperature

Chain

the

arrangement

rivet-holes.

overheating

If excluded

"

the

of

should

neither

by

of
Barr

M.

be

of

rivets

iron

heating

rivets

is

compute

example

The

"

joint
of

should

danger

Wm.

chain

because

diameter

steam-boilers

of the

to

merely

last

the

in

double-riveted

The

plates and

be

section

net

limits."

pitch

is called

single-rivetedjoint
and

matter

section, however,

net

Lap-joints.

Fig. 98

riveting.

the

is necessary.

Double-riveted
rivets

139

plate.

wide

over

being
than

longer

it would

of the

areas

of

simple

very

joint, as

any

tenacity

variation

JOINTS.

of metal

unit

per

be

gross

The

"

RIVETED

can

be melted

pitch

the

; but

ing
burn-

has

been

found

zigzag riveting.

85, where

riveting, "and

burned;

draft."

moderate
same

be

cannot

no

it states
doubt

the

See
that
fric-

this wider

of

tion

have

riveted

tested

plates

stick

"

can

you

lap
a

joints

they

tighter under

are

would

in

with

be

the

high

the

wider

chain

the
mate
ulti-

far apart

so

The

zag
zig-

because

seams,

pressures

who

the

them."

of the

lap

others

before

locomotive-boiler

crease
in-

between

plates are

between

knife-blade

riveting is preferred
the

the

is reached

friction

long

because

observed

and

Barnes

the

that

considered,

of the

L.

late D.

joints state

be

cannot

strength
that

the

the

towards

contributes

joint

strength," but

in

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

I4O'

than

carried

riveting.

25'

Section
FIG.

Exercise

31

should

d=

if,

Calking

be

given

for

r'

/=

iK

need

not

be

the

efficiency of

strength

of

the

of the

instead

Thickness

rivets.

iron

Calculate
the

drawings

riveting, like Fig. 98, except

joint, chain

plates and

the

Make

"

2"/+i",

shown

plate.

atSS.

98.

of
R

double-riveted
that

letters

plate

30".

the

lap-

actual

Steel

shown.

"", p
Scale

6"

mensions
di-

3T5^',

"

ft.

now.

this

joint

in

comparison

with

RIVETS

Taking ft
strength

The

at

55,000

of solid

plate

Xft

(for 2
net

is

rivets)

section

equal

section

of the

38,000

as

55.000

of

plate

1.

125).625

the

rivets

3125of

plate.

Therefore

14!

before, the

total

Ibs.

no,ooo

is

55,ooo

75,735.

.7854^JX

"

nearly equal

75,544,

at

.625

strength

shearing

JOINTS.

is

net

=(3-

(p-dyf*
The

the

of

strength

and/*

3-3125

RIVETED

AND

to

the

the

38,000

strength

efficiencyof

of

the

the

joint

to

75"544
E

69

per

cent

nearly.

110,000

following

The

calculated

were

joints to

To

find

plates and

To
r

Am.

the

find

ratios

from

the

Ry.

M.

of

to

report

of

for

committee

M.

Association

TABLE

16.

titot
pitch p for double-riveted
iron

the

(Fig. 99).

double-riveted

in

on

1895

joints
riveted

lap-joints with

steel

rivets.

distance

between

the

centres

of

rows

of rivets

Prof.

be

Kennedy

found

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

142

O-

for the

gives

graphically

calculated

or

diagonal pitch,

may

formula

by

r_

Table

for the

different

Exercise
riveted

the

gives

17

sizes

32

by

this

formula

99

of

double-

of rivets.

Make

"

(r)calculated

distances

drawings

as

per

Fig.

"$",ratio

lap-joint, zigzag riveting.

of

d to t

Section at SS.
FIG.

1.

80, R

30".

"

Find

by

Exercise

with

seam

boiler,

be

to

29",

Actual

"

"

even

Find/

11.

Make

drawings
of

junction

double

TV'.

Scale

by

formula

TV', d

be

calculated
from

calculated

dimensions

to

from
formula

from
be

similar

to

foot.

10.

those

in

Fig.

100

zigzag-riveted longitudinal

the
10,

formula

placed

6"
"

single-riveted circumferential

determined
may

in

\\d

formula

33.

the

showing

99.

on

for

seam

mean

p'
11.

ratio
from

steam-

in Table

Table

Scale

drawing

6"
where

14,
=

16,
R

foot.

letters

show

in

Steel

figure.

according

given

with

Inside

Fig.

IOI,

Lap-joints
in

shown

plates

directions

to

RIVETED

AND

RIVETS

JOINTS.

and

on

iron

rivets.
19 and

pages

Welt-strip.
is used

143

"

for both

Finish

sheet

20.

This

style

of

single- and

ing,
rivet-

double-

Section
'IG.

riveting and
lap-joint.
row

be

In

of rivets

which

lap-jointson

rows

2p.

more

joints are

expensive,

(Fig. 102), which

the

rivet

riveted

These

1OO.

the

features

joint of
single-riveted

the

spaced according

of

some

possesses

and
is

to

the

three
rule

136

better

than

are

not

any

simpler and

of

this

thicknesses

given
the

and

page

a/S"

the

butt-

ana

kind

the

middle

of

plate

should

in

spacing

of

the
the

singleouter

simple lap-joint,but

better
less

for

the

than

expensive.

the

are

butt-joint

144

fail in any

may

lap-joint with

double-riveted

The

of the

one

the

(1) By shearing
Resistance

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

following

rivets

against shearing

(2/

d]t Xft

of

Sa

38,000.

outside

the

(2p

(3) By tearing plate (a) along

shearing

ways

f,

^a

against tearing plate

(Fig. 101)

holding plate (a).

(2) By tearing plate (a) along

Resistance

welt

inside

d]t X

the

of rivets.

row

above

as

(12)

55,000.

intermediate

(13)

-f- the

row

rivet.

one

Resistance

(2p

of solid

Strength

2a)t

"

plate

least

55,ooo.
t X

2p

ft-

(14)

"

"

(16)

resistance

_
"

strength
Exercise

34.

lap-joint

with

sectional

view
Student

Take

the

Make

"

complete
welt,

inside
of

this

must

of solid

make

Double-riveted

Welts.

"

This

'

correct

\".

projected

IOI.

with

The
tion.
inten-

projection.
from

dimensions

the

following

table

17.

LAP-JOINTS

WITH

Butt-joint

style of joint is

double-riveted

zigzag spacing, Fig.

TABLE

The

of

drawings

figure is wrongly

remaining

DOUBLE-RIVETED

plate*

very

INSIDE

with
common

WELTS.

Inside

and
one

Outside
for

longi-

146

DRAWING

in double

for rivets

with

nearly

for

modify

to

from

to

there

being

single shear

Resistance
row

to

sary
neces-

will

as

pulling

out

shearing will

to

be

shear

and

half

two

in

rivets

single shear.

in

areas

fs

be

regard,

plate a

resistance

double

in

rivets

two

the

prevent

5 X

this

in

more

agree

will

butt-joints,it

for

welt-stripsthe

the

between

latter values

the

as

proportions

our

Therefore

later.

appear

shear; and,

general practice

us

DESIGNING,

AND

the

tearing

section

net

of

plate

at

the

outer

is

(2P-d}tft.
Resistance

(2p-2d)t
Resistance

to

crushing

the

the

between

plate

in outer

rivets

shearing

and

rivets

the

tearing

to

inner

of

row

is

row

Xft +

iaft.

plate

in front

of 3 rivets

is

ltd/..fc
and

taken

be

may

for steel

90,000

plate equal
* X

2p X
Exercise

02,

given
If

we

to

but

elevation

Draw

"

butt-joint with

riveted
1

35.

this

T9T",d

consider

the

shearing,

then

makes

strength in

the

the

per

inch

square

for

iron

rivets.

of whole

Strength

Ibs.

80,000

at

too

2p is

to

cross-section

and

inner

welts

of

similar

doubleto

Fig.

resistance

pitch

rivets

1.92

ft

and

outer
=

in width

to

tearing equal

long,

of

because

against shearing.

to

the

better

the

excess

ance
resist-

of

proportion

RIVETS

and

one

that

RIVETED

AND

conforms

to

JOINTS.

good practice is

v=*^+*-W
\--:.:;""""
/j and

/,

are

usually equal

/, but

to

FIG.

TV'

found

"
in thickness
For

the

thicker

than

than

/.

The

remaining

double-riveted

occasionally/,

will

Hartford

give

all

Steam-boiler

dimensions

butt-joints

be

spection
In-

welt-strips -"$" less

t.
see

the

following

table

18.

TABLE
For

102.

Company

Insurance

1 47

"

with

outer

and

inner

welt-strips.

148

DRA

WING

AND

DESIGNING*

Triple-riveted Butt-joint
strips (Fig. 103).
"

side

of

the

butt.

one

two

welts.
resistance

to

Outer

joint has

One

welt-stripand

and

The

This

with

row

two

three

pass

tearing along

line

the

through

xx

inner

of rivets

rows

through

passes
rows

and

Welton

each

boiler-plate

the

sheet

and

is

FIG.

The

resistance

to

pulling

103.

the

plate

out

welt-stripsis
9X

X/f

.85.

from

between

the

The
on

A1VETED

AND

RIVETS

resistance

tearing

to

line yy

on

(2p-2d)tft
A

glance
the

along

rivet

one

36.

like

taken

"

Scale
the

from

figurewill

single

shear

to

Make

4!'

that

show

section

the

drawings
plates
The

foot.
table

rivets

on

for

In.

In.

'"?

In.

il

section

net

rivets.

ft
I

In.

In.

be

In.

Efficiency.

Per

Cent.
86.1

81
9*

86.2

86.1
86.2
86.2
,86.1

9*

If
2T1*

ioi

86.2
86.2

17

86.2

ioi
III

86.2

I7i

86.1
-

12

86.2

10}

86.2

III

86.1
86.2

12

2|

4V
4T"

may

"",

19.

31

33
31
31
34

dimensions

3*

T"

of

butttriple-riveted

iron

other

shear

yy.
a

and

fail

cannot

in double

the

to

In.

joint

rivets

addition

in
net

following

this

two

are

TABLE

"

shearing

laf,.

the

Steel

103.

there

because

equal

Fig.

ij".

in
is

Exercise

joint

the

at

line zzy

plate, which

-and

is

xx

and

149

JOINTS.

IT'*

12*

86.3

20"

86

12

86.3

2|
IT**
If

2|

If

Calculate

might

efficiencyand
be

made.

if

86.1

I3f

86.1

14

86.2

14

86.2

possible

show

where

ment
improve-

ISO

DRA

Exercise
riveted

37

WING

Draw

"

butt-joint

joint (Fig. 104).

be

may

AND

with
t

taken

the

junction

f",

from

"

38

and

fire-box

head

is

staying
engine
square

and

is similar

what

Y.

partialelevation

C.
of

of
a

the

6"

"

staying

for

the

locomotive-boiler

is known
The

as

to

R.
one

the

as

design

foot.

backshown

that

used

in

the

Buchannan,

R.

A A

shows
which

Supt.
a

for

an

Ibs. per

180

Empire

Wm.

crown-bar

croivn-bar

is suitable

24", steam-pressure

designed by
N.

and

sions
dimen-

remaining

foot.

of

cylinders 19"

the

14.. Scale

of

with

of
a

"

locomotive-boilers.

locomotive
Power

jff

for

inch, and

18

drawings

example

an

The

lap-

104.

crown-sheet

Scale

by Fig. 105.
This

Make

"

longitudinal double-

-if".

Tables

FIG.

Exercise

of

single-riveted circumferential

DESIGNING.

State

press
Ex-

of Motive

cross-section

consists

of two

RIVETS

RIVETED

AND

wrought-iron plates 5" deep

at

rivets,

"

thick

The

which,

passing through

is

washer

under
from

of

the

the

and

4"

to

4i" apart,

from

the

these

inside

and

as

as

centres,
of

the

figure,the crown-bars

the

fire-box
are

end

bolts

side

placed

the

As

transverse

the

on

placed

are

will

being placed

sheets.
in

rivets

crown-bars

the

as

many

"

LINER.

These

shown.

by f

between

G, is riveted

through thimble

side of the crown-sheet

at

4"

bar

together

supported

b and

j IRON

platesA

!$!
welded

and

crown-sheet

fire-box

ends.

the

JOINTS.

seen

commodate
ac-

about
from

position

DRAWING

152
the

on

crown-sheet, and
will

sheet

the

Should

these

against

the

to

the

the

from
and

bars

as

remains
shell

link

longitudinal length

crown-sheet

which

is

steam-pressure

held

by

up

fastened

which

the

steam,

to

the

is shown

at

of

4^" apart.

about

support

the

the

is

and

of

to

of

pressure

what

one

the

insufficient

be

crown-sheet

outer

pins,

many

equal spacing,

of the

then

DESIGNING.

allow, with

downv/ard

area

inch,

as

AND

per

equal

square

sting-stays hung

crown-bars
d

by

the

in

links

transverse

cross-section.
The
bolts

flat upper

shell

"f" thick,

to

are

that
To

the
each

of

shown

in

The
and
will be
the

about

the

and

fire-box

that

seen

body

riveted

are

be

placed

f"

between.

as

on

it to

the

fire-box

and

stay-bolts are

The

ends

are

stay-bolts
and

give

with

lines

on

and
liner
the

lengths

many

the

liner, with

To

these

angle-

diameter

similar

shell

riveted
the

J"

to

somewhat

outer

shell

more

liable

each

on

of the

side, and

rod

through

screwed
over

is

\\"

in

outside

and

both

box
fire-

inside.

It

eter
part of the bolt is-J"diam-

f ",

of the

which
the

to

to

between

diameter.

screwed

down

shell

body

just above

carried

are

the

through

outside.

is turned

allows

stay-rods

while

fire-box

dotted

by

part of the outside

screwed

shell

outer

the

stay-

no

106.

curved

the

on

over

bind

has

is stiffened

is shown

can

screwed

and

the

as

transverse

crown-bar,

diameter

Fig.

that

fire-box

D,

at

this liner

to

only

which

which

longitudinal stay-rods i-J"in

bolted

support

riveted

which

3" angle-iron

clearance-space
irons

of

shape

back-head,

shown

as

section, and

transverse

3/rX

together,

the

the

it like those

passing through

outer

of

part of

reduces

unequal expansion

boiler.

break

its stiffness

than

In

certain

in others

of

places
in such

154
if

DRAWING

one

inform

the

break

the

escaping

and

steam

will

water

soon

engineer.

detail

A
at

should

DESIGNING.

AND

view

of

of

one

the

crown-bar

thimbles

is shown

G.
Construction.

from

the

4' 6"

from

left-hand
the

the

Draw

"

perpendicular
and

margin,

margin

upper

the
then

6' 6"

line

centre

longitudinal centre

line

draw

and

the

transverse

and

construct

4*

longitudinal cross-sections

It will

be

in the

seen

followed

convention
blots

and

to

Exercise

stay-rod with
the

"

the

details

been

the

boiler

left
to

the

where

facilitate

gives

example

an

crow-foot for

scale

of 6"

plates

slightly apart

of the

the

shown.

appearance

106

and
to

as

draftsmen

by

Fig.

drawings

of

figure that

have

improve
39.

107.

staying

together they

come

Make

other

and

crown-bars

FIG.

inking

should

this

is

without

drawing.
of

longitudinal

locomotive-boiler.

foot.

AND

RIVETS

Exercise

the

corner

40.

of

Figs. 107

"

locomotive

RIVETED

and

s~

COP

show

108

fire-box

FIG.

155

JOINTS.

examples

of

ring (sometimes

riveting
called

shell

of

108.

PEP.

TT
M-

FIG.

mud-ring)
the

boiler.

to

the

Fig.

of

the

is that

of

bottom
108

109.

fire-box
a

and

outer

large boiler 58"

diameter

156

DRAWING

and

Make

for

is

Fig. 107

Ibs. steam-pressure

180

carrying

boiler

smaller

both

of

drawings

DESIGNING.

AND

per

48"

of

figures as

shown

inch, and

square
diameter

to

waist.

at

0/4."

scale

foot.
Exercise

front

41.

back

and

Both

Make

like

drawing

that

fire-tube

tubes

boiler

tube

for

ring C

the

by

tubes

the

figure

to

in

the

tive.
locomo-

beaded,

the

.and

the

is

no

and

dome-base
formed

and

section

B.

in dies

of

locomotive-boiler

sheets.
scale

of

The

base

by hydraulic

and

ring

Exercise

with

elevation
of

curves

2"

42

Make

"

transverse

intersection
i

foot.

half

sectional

view
between

dome-

dome,
are

of soft

made

pressure.

Scale

swedged, rolled, and

between
shown

setting of

size.

Fig.

steel

the

ferrules

copper

full

show

the

shows
of

tube-sheets

ends

with

and

Fig. 109

"

RIVET

elevation, half outside

and

plan.

the

dome-base

Also

show
and

the

boiler.

IV.

CHAPTER

UNDER

the

shafting

term

Line

Shafting.

This

"

rotating, cylindrical or
for

from

prime

the

the

prime

and

bending

and

the

in

Fig.

Such

mover.

pulleys,

of

enlarged

exceptional
carbon
to

shafting
1

ft. to

is
iron

for
30

now

in

used
this

line

ends

shafting

transportation,

for

some

is

workshops

twisting

subjected
to

the

to

used

torsional
of belts

is usual

throughout,

only

and

moments

pull

"It

etc.

of

extension

an

ways

due

line

long

to

shown

as

occasionally

for

in.

of

almost

country.

shorter

in

or

levers,

being

the

to

used

diameter

ordinary diameters,
ft., the

being

gears,

Steel

purposes.

in

shafting

uniform

of

given

power

are

latter

the

stresses,

shafting

ill,

They

FIG.

of

included

shafting

square

movers.

weight

line

is

name

transmitting turning

factories

make

be

may

axles.

and

of

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

AND

SHAFTING

grade containing

entirely
The
as

for

shafting

commercial

2"

from

lengths being

replacing pulleys,

more

gears,

to

.3 to
in

.4^

ence
prefer-

lengths

3".

run

convenient
etc.

But

of

from
for
the

158

DRAWING

longer lengths

are

Torsional
show

force

produces
is called

RP

FIG.

in

torsional

the

Fig.

on

in

radius

in

the

shaft, and

(T)

on

shaft.

is

is

The

equal

to

tive
respeccircle
This

is transmitted.

the

tension

force

113

pitch

T,

the

uct
prod-

shaft.

FIG.

the

to

the

inches

not

"

114.

Tt,

and

again equal

torsional
force

moment

Pin

torsional

the

to

the
the
is

pounds
moment

inch-pounds.
The

is

on

their

the

113.

the

do

and

112

to

and

inch-pounds, i.e., the

in

power

moment

equal

multiplied by
moment

the

is

lever

the

action

torsional

14 P

usually expressed
into

twisting

FIG.

radius

the

Figs.

"

pinion keyed

of

radius

112.

So

and

which

through

gear

wheel

gear
is the

shafts;
of the

objections

Moment.

Twisting

or

lever,

when

frequently used

considerations."

these

from

arise

DESIGNING.

AND

equal

the

of resistance

moment
to

the

greatest

to

stress

torsion

of

multiplied by

cylindricalshaft
the

modulus

of

section.
Let

Ft be the greatest shearing stress

and

Zt the

modulus

then

(I)

T=FsZt
*

A.

"

P.

Roberts

Company.

AND

SHAFTING

Z"

and

so

77^'=

shafts

for square

shaft

square

pounds

torsional

in

inch-pounds.

Shaft.

"

40,000

Ibs., and

If

moment

Diameter

take

we

Ibs. per

using

length

(3)

of

side

of

in inches;
in

the

and

shearing strength

Find

To

to

..

cylindrical shaft

the

of

diameter

(2)

......

T=.2oMy.;

f,

$9

19635^;

"

.19635^,

T=

cylindricalshafts

for

and

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

the

of

of

inch

safety

For

cylindricaliron

For

cylindricalsteel

For

square

iron

For

square

steel

Wr

of

shafts
shafts

shafts
shafts

ought-iron

shearing

to

and

inch;

square

resistance

square

factor

per

for

4^,
T

soft

T=

iron

steel

at

Steel

equal
50,000

have:

we

for

or

i/2O^3;
2182^';

T=

i849^/3;

T=

231

\d*.

Then

for

shafts

cylindricaliron

(4)

I 720

^^

for square

iron

shafts;

(5)

1849

d=

~T~
for

cylindricalsteel shafts;

(6)

2182

f~

V 23""

for square

steel

shafts.
.

(7)

160

DRAWING

Example
shaft

iron

shaft
at

be

line

pitch

Let

"

the

for the"

an

at

the

of

wheel

if

the

running

get

by

the

33,000

transmitted

horse-power

teeth

on

horse-power

H.P.

gear

diameter

the

by

minute

per

spur
the

the

be

transmitted

on

pressure

would

revolutions

140

of

diameter

total

What

equation (4) we

From

Let

the

Ibs.

DESIGNING.

pitch

horse-power

of

fate

the

60", and

2500

and

the

i.

AND

"

wheel.
12

inch-

396,000

pounds;
n

of revolutions

number

per

minute;

then

PX

'-

'

'

'

"

396,000
6.28

Tx

6.28

140
_

396,000
In

75,000

of the

terms

'

396,000

H.P.,

and
H.P.

Besides
taken

the

account

bending

moment

twisting stresses
of

in
to

be

the

above

considered.

on

shafts

which

formulae,
Let

there
shaft

have

we

is
be

alone

usually

subjected

162

AND

DRAWING

and

belt-pullbeing

500

be

of the

the

diameter
this

In

the

case

Ibs.

800
shaft

factor

DESIGNING.

What

respectively.

should

of

safety will

be

6 and

equation (4)

becomes

T;

800

31,200+

25

inch-lbs.

20,000

3I,200a + 20,000'

68,230;

and

of

Deflection
of

an

inch

as

good

of

bare

allowing
belts, W=
modulus
from

per

Shafting.

foot

of

practice by
shafting
40

Ibs. per

\$d*l.
of transverse

authoritative

length
the

Then

/for

continuous
Iron

W,

of width
for

deflection

maximum

Pencoyd

2.6d*
inch

"

for the

bending

shaftingis given

Works.

and

The

for

vertical

stress

the

weight

loaded

shafts,

pull

of the

alone, taking the

elasticityat 26,000,000,
formulae

of

maximum

we

derive

can

length

between

bearings
/=

V8;3^a

for bare

for loaded

shafts;

(13)

....

shafts.
.

(14)

SHAFTING

3/90
\ /

d*n
H.P.

H.P.

d=

resistance
be

equal

be

the

of

less.

weight*would

shafts

hole

the

be

25$

relation
is

Let
solid

follows

as

'=

shaft

10"

solid

iron.

in

and

less than

that

torsion.

internal

shaft.

Then

its

strength will
to

will

5"

solid

weight

the

solid

and

weigh

be

only

diameter

the

shaft, and

the

between

the

weights

of

solid

and

hollow

weight

of

hollow

d:

shaft, and

Wl

weight

of

then

d:

(16)

d*

the

will

Let

equal.

diameter

of the

The

shaft

4"

increased

are

material

dt the

hollow

shaft, but

of

hollow
are

d^ and

hollow

were

sections

shafts

portion

resisting

shaft

the

hollow

less.

strength only 4.25$

The

the

shaft, and

with

the

weight

solid
of

solid

shaft

the
If

for

respectivelyof

hollow

less than

2.56$

diameters

10"

moduli

the

when

diameter

external

in

torsion

to

for cold-rolled

effective

least

the

is

removed

"

shafts, because

solid

than

iron;

"

Weight

"

wrought

'

"

Shafts.

stronger

/"

55

Hollow

for

"

gives

H. P.

90

Thurston

ft. apart

line-shaftinghangers

For

1 6-

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

AND

of

shaft.

the

hollow

shaft

in

per

cent

of the

weight

of

164

DRAWING

And

the

Let

solid

difference

in

DESIGNING.

strength
hollow

of

strength

shaft

AND

is

given

follows

as

shaft, and

5A

hollow

shafts

strength

of

then

s;
When

d*

weight

; and

are

d?

when

d*

equal strength.

hollow

of

case

shaft

this is

is stiffer

objection

an

if the

of the

The

shaft
in

ship

and

than

solid

shaft

yield

not

under

shafts

would

hollow

shafts

forged

are

of

shafts

as

in the

as

the

to

same

bending

to

it would

little

equal

the

conditions,

some

give

of

are

be

an

straining

storm.

largerhollow

smaller

solid

steamship's propeller-shaft,where

advantage
action

the

"

torsion, i.e., it does

to

readily;

and

of

resistance

solid

the

d?

"

usually forged hollow,

are

rolled

or

solid

but

then

and

the

bored

hollow.

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

We

have
16

of about
of

shafting

what

of

couplings.
on

ft.
to

is known

divisions

the

side

Rigid
coupling

that

seen

to

shafting is
ft.

30

couple
as

long,

these

so

made

only

in short
in

it is necessary

lengths together by

shaft-couplings.

There

long

couplings

farthest

from

Couplings.
that

can

"

only

should
the

When
be

be

placed

close

of

principal

shaft-couplings,viz., rigid, flexible,and

All

lines

means

three

are

lengths

to

clutch

bearings

driving-point.
two

removed

shafts

by

are

joined by

loosening keys

ox

SHAFTING

AND

unscrewing bolts,

such

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

is said

coupling

be

to

6$

rigid or fast

coupling.
Box

Muff

or

Couplings.

is secured

about

keys

each

that

the

depth

the

slacked

easier

than

keyway

is

in

cut

shafts

two

used

home,

driven

shown

together

butt

clearance

Exercise

43.

like

coupling

insure

be

driven

Half

the
the

in

steel

or

left

by
The

necessary
the

same

tighter
depth

and

of

the
The

coupling.

When

ends.
be

so

exactly

keys

two

between

equal tightness of

an

Make

"

them
both

d=

for

of shaft
of metal

thickness

length

of muff

shaft.

Scale
the

from

found

diameter
=

2\"

be

may

D"

complete working drawing

Fig. 115

dimensions

For

should

space

to

the

at

coupling

coupling.

it is not

half

and

bored

are

when

keys,

as

5, Fig. 115.

at

The

shaft

the

the

as

be

long key.

one

afterwards
The

hole

coupling itself,or

should
can

of

The

wrought-iron

then

keys

two

iron.

shaft.

the

long

as

shafts

both

the

to

best, because

in

keyway
moreover,

half

of cast

of

means

length

in

about
is the

method

latter

equal

by

simplest kind

casting and
of

diameter

shaft

the

to

key

sunk
two

finished

fit the

to

out

in the

small

is cored

shaft

is the

It is made

shaft-coupling (Fig. 115).

for the

This

"

of

full

muff

size.

following proportions:

"2^";
in

coupling

2\d +

.4^+

i";

2";

d+2t.
proportions

positions of
gib head,

as

the

taper of key

and

coupling

shown

at

on

in

the

shaft

Fig.

117,

see

in.

page

the
when

key

should

In

some

have

it is difficult to

r66

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

SHAFTING

obtain
When

the
necessary

of

the

the

make

to

equal

coupling

for the

end

the

half

that

of

Fig.

116

to

the

to

of

length

of

purpose

close

is situated

coupling

be

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

small

the

to

access

AND

slackingup.

bearing

keyway
the

67

it will

the

to

left

corresponding

key.
Split-muff Couplings.
divided

into

called

sometimes
shaft

with

The

length
the

and

the

keyway

the

sheet

tin

when

coupling

be

shaft.

The

bolted

on

for

Flange

made

coupling
parts, of
of

cast

the
the

key

in

and

the

keyed

to

iron, and

its

faces

coupling

split-muff

6"

of the

Now

equal

with

which

replaced gives

in diameter
and

clamps

the

it

piece

together,

removed,
shafts

two

fooL

halves

placing

it

tin is then

two

bolting them

shaft, making

Dodge
keyed

the

in

The

drilled

Each

if desired.

shaft.

and

Coupling.

the

other.

holes

Scale

ease

the

the
them

split coupling

great advantage

coupling.

by

key

3"

of

to

its sides.

at

the

of

ends

shaft,

keyed

the

drawings

drilled.

the

ling
coup-

the

on

only

than

of

key.

inside

sheet

and

Plate

or

the

The

removed

solid-muff

the

It is

fits

the

as

halves

the

for

tightly together.
can

over

16

the

between

finished

the

very

bolt-holes

is bored

hole

which

working

Fig.

the

and

planed

the

length

same

finishingthis coupling

In

of

in

together

"" longer

be

may

Make

"

shown

coupling

to

44.

key

form

compression coupling.

of

shows

bolted

and

parts

straight parallelkey

Exercise

are

two

"

to

one

so

as

to

the

shaft
are

template

coupling

shaft,

Mfg.
to

bolts

Fig.

"

should
obtain

so

Co.
two

being
turned
that
be

shows

117
It

is made

shaft

ends, the

right angles

at

and

they
faced

plate
in two-

tion
posito

the

carefully fitted,
can

be

after

duplicated
it has

perfect alignment.

been

168

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

I/O

DRAWING

Exercise

45.
the

that

Unit

diameter

""

number

the

Taking

of

of shaft

of bolts

nearest

2"

shall be

cept
ex-

tional
sec-

-\

of bolt

dimensions

(18)

(19)

118.

be

can

figure in

the

in

elevation

end

shown,

number,

even

diameter

remaining

given

as

XX.

FIG.

The

the

Fig. 117

"";

of

drawings
half

upper

through

view
Let

Make

"

DESIGNING.

AND

found
of

terms

from

the

tions
propor-

d, the diameter

of the

bolt.

taper of the

The
The

shaft

iron, but
steel

the

this

be

may

figure

drawing

made

is shown

required

equal

$"" in 12".

to

sectioned

it may

be

for

wrought

sectioned

with

color.

Figs.
Clutch

in

in

hub

118

and

Company.

119

show

plate couplings

made

by

the

Hill

SHAFTING

Exercise
of
for

46.

"

"

Hill

"

/2

Make

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

drawings

plate coupling
^

and

AND

be

to

for

taken

FOR

bolts

to

of the
to

be

be

bolts
worked

The

determined

Clamp
a

muff

The

20.

The

PLATE

Exercise

45

dimensions
number

of

COUPLINGS.

equation (18), and

from

according

out

of

"HILL"

THE

shaft.

Table

equation (19)

from

Sellers

special form

4J"

for

20.

TABLE
DIMENSIONS

required

as

from

171

to

the

student's

Coupling

coupling

remaining

The

the

proportions

judgment.

(Fig. 120)."

which

diameter

is turned

This
to

is

cylin-

1/2

DRAWING

d'rical form

the

on

DESIGNING.

but

outside,

conical

Two

inside.

AND

sleeves

of

muff

the

and

out

The

three

bolts.

through

of the

bolt-holes,

screwed

one

up,

tighter the

the

firmly together.

them

turned

fit the

to

sleeves

section
fit the

to

the

clamp
also

are

shafts

used

bolts

shafts

the

and

further

to

side

one

the

more

pulled

are

spliton

are

that

so

sleeves

Keys

conical

120.

bored

together by

double

bushes

or

FIG.

inside

has

are

bind

prevent

slipping.
Exercise

Sellers
The
on

47.

For
various

Make

the

clamp coupling.
taper

the diameter

diameter

"

the

conical

e.g.,

if the

full

sleeve

of

of shaft,

use

is
was

diameter

the
the

in

shown

Fig.

12

of

size -.

sleeve

small

4", the

dimensions

diameters

Scale

of

measured
the

drawings

Sellers

2f"
6"

per

foot

long

and

would

clamp

following

of

measure

the

length
large
2f ".

coupling

table.

for

SHAFTING

AND

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

173

174

DRAWING

DESIGNING.

AND

TABLE
SELLERS

Frictional
Butler's

being

muff.
are

to

The

in

each

into

guided

in

used

to

when

steel

instead

inch

"

ends

like

threads
on

from

the

on

pipe

inside
at

of

the

right angles

muff.

the

centre

shafts

shall

lock-nuts
outside

be

full

are

short

enter

The

\"

of the

round

muff

together,

come

are

for

position.

working
that

be

have

nuts

bushes

which

the

to

it is desired

The

shaft.

except

"

whose

when

in its proper

Scale
the

bush

the

they

key-driver

dowel-pins

sectioning

of hatch-lined.

used

other

122,

into

openings (afterthe

the

be

at

conical

when

side, and
are

of

Sellers

the

threaded

nuts

allows

complete

Fig.

keys,

nor

the

views

like the

splitsides

bottom

coupling

the

and

The

the

them

Make

48.

coupling

Butler

out

and
the

will the

only
Exercise

of

for

top

round

splitat

position by small

shown

then

bolts

of these

coupling

holes

see

neither

arrangement
one

provided

grooves

is somewhat

shaft

drive

to

the

It

are

three

shows

122

position by

the

through

remove

it has

this

other;

Fig.

"

bushes

on

removed)

been

in

conical

introduced

to

held

position

COUPLINGS.

coupling.
that

coupling, except
bushes

CLAMP

Coupling.

frictional

21.

of

drawings
the

shaft

appropriately

shall

the
be

colored

size.

should
diameter

be

that

number

is nearest

per
to

the

SHAFTING

AND

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

DRAWING

position by
pieces
The

of the

diameter

outside

of the

taper

lock-nuts

the

be

may

marked

faces

in
.

bushes

into

having projecting

shown

recesses

screwed

are

wrench

spanner

conical

The

diameter.

the

fit into

which

The

nut.

of

means

DESIGNING.

AND

with

end

elevation.

made

f"

small

in
are

12"

on

to

be

finished.
The

d
D

Stuart's

"=

"

diameter

of

diameter

of muff

length

Sellers

the

from

FIG.

wedges

instead

of

conical

halves

of

each

opposite
of

the

shaft.

making,
the

use

on

of

Exercise

shown

in

the

and

whole,

follows:

as

4"/.

coupling, shown

This

"

in

coupling

in

Fig.

having tapered

123.

of the

muff

hold

nuts

cheap

are

2.2$d\

sleeves; these

end

Studs

coupling

shaft;

of muff

Coupling.

Clamp

differs

123,

of this

principal proportions

and

tapered wedges
bored

are

the

wedges

effective

the

to

in

coupling

and
size

place,

without

keys.
49.

Fig.

"

124

Make
for

drawings
a

if"

shaft.

of

Scale

Stuart's
=

full

coupling
size.

as

178

DRAWING

of shaft

diameters
d

Let

"

"

"

"

diameter

of shaft;

diameter

of

length

of muff.

""

shaft

coupling

them

on

Exercise

50.
in

up

shows

Fig. 125

"

the

"d.

flanges

formed

are

propeller-

forging

by

the

and
shaft

the

Assume

Fig. 125.

18"

be

of the

working drawings

as

external

internal

diameter

the

for the

unit

flange coupling
of the

diameter

10",

take

and

proportions.

an

Scale

foot.

Make

"

equivalent solid
2"

"

in which

4.25^;

shaft.

the

to

following proportions:

"

"

various

2f" diameter

to

Shaft-coupling.

Flanged

shaft

J"

2f

from

for shafts

shown

3.25^,

for

coupling

muff;

from

this

in the

given

are

for shafts

Then

of

dimensions

principal

The

DESIGNING.

AND

Dv and

Let

and

the

shaft; then

hollow

the

respectively,of

internal

the

be

D^

from

external

diameter,

equation (15) we

have

of

diameter

an

"^"

diameter

number

radius

equivalent

solid

shaft

unit.

of bolt;
of bolts

of bolt

.2$D -|-2

circle

Resistance

shaft

divided

to

by

shearing
R.

of bolts

"

resistance

to

torsion

of

SHAFTING

AND

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

179

ISO

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

equation (2),

From

(20)
and

taking/,

at

wrought-iron bolts,

It

The

d and

and

that

is evident
d.

for the

50,000

using

steel

factor

find

must

we

following table, by

for solid

FLANGED

"/,

diameter

H '"

height

When

the
and

tapered,
For

safety of 5,

before

A.

Low,

for the

40,000

we

we

can

have

mine
deter-

gives values

of

of nut

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

part of bolt

use

i-J"diameter
bolts

f"

in

of bolt

to

"

are

tapered

diameter

22.

of screwed

bolts

taper of bolt
C

D.

of

and

shafts:

TABLE

shaft

are

12".

centre

or

over

made

often

they

without

(See Exercise
=

are

2.25^.

13.)

usually
heads.

AND

SHAFTING

While

the

diameter
avoid

the

secure

with

increases

C should

of

made

be

"

the

small

as

may

bolt, and

the

be

.$D\

diameter

of

flange

126

and

geared
this

other
is

arrangement
Exercise

steel

shaft

from

Table

51.

3"

128

"

than

to

"

half

the

make

it.

-\-$.gd.

at

This

largest

diameter

their

of

coupling, shown
may

be

will, and

for

the

geared

in

with

slow-moving

Figs.

or

dis-

shafts

effective.

and

The

tapered bolts

126.

drawings

diameter.

in

|^.

half

one

simple

Make

diameter

shown

as

other

in

dimensions

Fig.

127

for

may

be

taken

23.

Spiral-jaw
Figs.

that

used

are

Coupling.

the

from

the

f=d,.

J" larger

is such

127,

to

flanges,and

to

flange

the

as

bolt, yet

the

coupling,

of

height equal

Clutch

of

it is convenient

FIG.

Jaw

in

thickness

cylindrical heads

diameter

increases

diameter

the

in

e=D,-l".
When

bolts

material

tightness

as

the

same

of

use

unnecessary

maximum

of

resistance

shearing

l8l

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

and

Coupling.
129, has

axial

This

form

engagement

of

coupling,

and

is the

shown

commonest

in

182

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

SH

At

AND

TING

TABLE

JAW

23.

COUPLINGS.

CLUTCH

(Dimensions

are

3t

31

3!
4

4l
4f

8f

4i
41
5i

6i

5/8

6|
7*

3/4
i

!i

71

5:
6

Sir

7"

ioi
i3f

9/16
9/i6
5/8
11/16

3/4

3/4

16!
16

Hi

9:

2f

1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
3/4

7/i6

Sir

8J
"i
12}

i/4
3/8
3/8
3/8
7/16
7/i6
7/i6

7/8

5|

4*

^
7"

inches.)

1/2

2|
3*

in

31

2t

183

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

13/16
7/8
15/16

13/16

of gear

by

3/4
I3/16J 3/4
i5/i6| 7/8

13

It is

of its kind.
of

lever

and

fork

readily thrown
working

in

FIG.

the

figure.
of motion

This
in

style of
one

in
a

groove

out

shown

at

the

means

right of

128.

clutch

direction

and

is

adapted

only.

to

the

sion
transmis-

1 84

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

86

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

SHAFTING

AND

SHAFT-COUPLINGS.

.187

188

DRAWING

the

make

and

In

diameter

the

of

diameter

of

part

(21)

take

Table

8.

the

of

coupling

(20)

equation

tapered

AND

the

nearest

use

the

to

shaft,

DESIGNING.

bolt-centre

circle

6"

Scale

suit.

and

equal

to

and

from

commercial

the

bolt

result

diameter

outer

foot.

diameter

mean

the

the

of

of

the

equation
found

in

CHAPTER

PIPES

Pipes.

Copper

tube

pipes

of

Thickness
D

P
/

per

length

internal

of

convey

to

total
P

the

shell

inch,

or

Resist

to

in

of

work,

or

gas.

and

brass

for the

Europe

fire-

purposes.

Internal

pipe

iron, steel*

water,

marine

for other

and

Pressure.
diameter

mean

or

for

pipes;
in inches,
in

inside

pounds

in inches

pipe

tensile

safe

steam,

extent

some

pipe

of

iron, wrought

largely in

pressure

thickness

the

square

to

diameter

of

per

flanges;
inch

square

stress

in

material

in

tending

to

separate

two

pounds

per

inch.

square

of

used

thick

"

ft

shell

cast

most

internal

the

of

Pipes

very

Then

made

used

are

PIPE-COUPLINGS.

of locomotives

boilers

Let

used

are

tubes

or

are

brass, and

and

copper,

pipes

Pipes

"

AND

V.

force
X

/, which
the

is resisted

length

from
2(///J);

of

this

the
we

by
pipe

sections

the
X

two

the

of

nesses
thickpressure

get

PD

This
in

formula

gives a

thickness

somewhat

less than

is used

practice.
189

1 go

DRAWING

Low

A.

D.

AND

DESIGNING.

gives
PD

(2)

'=-*+""
the

and

of k and

values

follows:

as

24.

TABLE

foundry

For
than

and

Y\" thick,
For

tables

and

cast-iron

reasons

long lengths
the

giving

equivalent heads

Pocket-book,"

p.

pipes

see

less than

not

thickness

should

of

Kent's

"

pipes

be

never

^"

less

for various

Mechanical

sures
pres-

Engineers'

189.

PIPE-COUPLINGS.

Cast-iron
of
as

connecting
shown

in

Exercise
like
the

Pipe-couplings.

Fig.

cast-iron

Fig.

131.

55.

Make

131.

"

pipes

is

8".

following formulae.

of

Calculate
Scale

t
"

most

6"
"

cast-iron

remaining
i

foot.

o.02$D

-\~0.327;

0.033^

0.56;

method

common

by flanges cast

drawings

F=

The

"

on

the

pipes

pipe-coupling
dimensions

by

PIPES

"=

"

1.125/7 +

4.25;

1.092/7 +

2.566;

iD

o.Oi

number

weight

W=

joint

has

to

75

up

pressures

pipe

the

foot

per

per

square

with

the

pressures

red

joint may

between

lead

the

o.i/73

(170

inch

/7+

+
and

all over,

flanges faced

Ibs.

3/7*

0.24/7* +

.ooi/78

FIG.

higher

2.56;

0.78/7+

"

flange

"

"

This

0.73

of bolts
of

19!

PIPE-COUPLINGS.

At\D

2.

is used

for

head);

for

ft. of-

131.

be

made

flanges or

with

string smeared

lead, india-rubber, or

cast-iron-pipe flange

gutta-percharing.
Exercise

56

coupling, Fig.
dimensions

to

Make

"

132.
be

taken

drawings
Inside
from

of

of

diameter
Table

25.

pipe
Scale

to

6"

be
=

9",
I

other

foot.

DRAWING

I92

DESIGNING.

AND

25.

TABLE

(.Dimensions

This
and
Sizes
or

table

the
up

less.

was

Master
to

adopted
Steam

24" diameter

by

and
are

FLANGES.

CAST-IRON

STANDARD

Hot

inches.)

in

are

of

conference
Water

designed

Fitters
for

200

committees
Association
Ibs.

pressure

of

the
in

per

A.S.M.E.

July, 1894.
square

inch

I94

DRA

WING

AND

.075^ +

Exercise
socket

57.

Make

"

diameter

of

Ex.

Scale

55.

/=

.045/7 +.8;

.F=:

.04/7+

working

pipe-coupling

cast-iron

10".

pipe
6"

the

for this

dimensions

with

is made

Exercise

"

pipe flange coupling

as

in Ex.

55.

Dimensio'ns

Scale
to

be

in

Fig.

spigot-andInternal

134.

sections

and

similar

to

134.

Ex.

to

are

56.

The

taper of I" in 12"

Make

58.

shown

problem

for

proportions given

part E

for the

drawings

Elevations

FIG.

The

.7

foot.

DESIGNING.

working
like

6"

"

taken

Table

turned

of

an

Elevations

foot.
from

calculated
and

from
fitted

drawings

Fig. 135.

be

25.

8"

cast-iron-

and

sections

drawn

at

joint

these

by

in width

and

copper

pipe 8".
This

"

joint is

the

of

the

smeared

are

drawings

of the

in

of

the

Fig. 136.

on

pipe.
with

with

pipe,

strips cast
fitting-

up

shown
=

axis

perfectlysquare

Make

6"

'95

strengthened

are

the

thickness

bolting

pipe

Scale

with

of

finished

59.

45"

the

before

Exercise

of

flanges

means

to

stripsare

pipes,

for

angle

an

is made

equal

and

pipe-ends

These

PIPE-COUPLINGS.

AND

PIPES

the

and

the
The

ribs
the

flanges
faces

axes

of

FIG.

of Mr.

136.

R.

the

with

red

loose

flange coupling

Inside

lead.

diameter

foot.

invention

of

B.

Pope

of Dumbar-

of

196

Scotland, and

ton,

rings

be

may

steel; the

cast

or

that

Fig. 136
the

is

made

ends

of cast

iron, wrought

latter

is

rings

must

have

joints

exhaust-pipes
The

be

36"

to

very

flanged

efficient

inch.

ring

the

Between

of lead

for
A

Table

6"

should

7.

thick
""""
60.

Exercise

137

of

ends

flange rings, and

on

the

evident

from

pipes

before

"

Make

and

of

pipes

made

Remaining

in

inches.)

from

also

are

to

dimensions

of the

f/x to f"

ma}7

be

the

cast

about

pipes

is

joint shown

full

i.2$d.

137

placed

wide.

the

Scale

into

countersunk

ends

of

Fig.

"

wrought-iron pipes.

countersunk

are

drawings

equal

for

joint

flanged

wrought-iron pipe.
be

following table:

Pipe-couplings.

bolt-heads
the

feed-, and

steam-,

the

from

are

form
the

for

COUPLINGS.

PIPE

Steel

and

Wrought-iron

an

is

26.

(Dimensions

of

It

diameter.

taken

be

may

POPE'S

The

flange

iron, wrought steel,

placed

used

TABLE

The

Bevis.

preferred.

been

ij"

from

dimensions

shows

and

Low

given by

flanged.

are

These

the

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

in

Fig.

size.

may

taken

be
from

taken
Table

from
26.

PIPES

FIG.

The
shown

at

with

sleeve

It is manufactured

Fig. 138.

internal

for

space

This

Pa.

McKeesport,

Works,

of the
lead

is

rivet-heads
the

poured

tightlycalked

in

and

the

these

the

ends

the

steel

National

consists
end

Fig. 138,

pipes

of

Tube

cast-iron

there
into

is

also

are

which

are

138.

ends

flanges become

into
at

on

by

each

at

plainly shown

recesses

pipes

joint

lead

FIG.

inserted

137.

joint for wrought-iron

Converse"

"

197

PIPE-COUPLINGS.

AND

recesses

of the

of the
locked

pipes, and
in

sleeves,

position.

the

around
as

by

Molten

rivet-heads

shown

in

turn

and

Fig. 139.

198

DRAWING

Exercise

61.

Make

"

7" wrought-iron
Fig-

!39-

Scale

6"

pipe, according

wrought-iron
the

on

is used
their
are

in

the

their
on

of
are

flange

the

of

the

the

The

made

in

Exercise

Fig.

140

for

Dimensions

in

given
Ex.

in

as

and

lengths
62.

55.

8"
may

Coal
the

of

Briggs

ring

makes

the

of from

16

shown

screws

20

bolts.

The

from

for

pipes

lugs shown

cast

and

on,

the

between

have

flanges
The

is

pipes

ft.

screwed-flange pipe-coupling

taken

It

Co.
the

on

joint steam-tight.
to

flanges

Iron

and

cylindricalfitting-piece

wrought-iron pipe.
be

cast-iron

standard.

fit the

to

shows

140

together by

Reading

The

Draw

"

Fig.

right-hand flange are

flange.

an

"

finished

surfaces

rubber

gum

same

"

held

and

threads

the

to

the

figure on

other

dimensions

by screwing

pipes

Philadelphia

according

inner

the

Pipe -coupling.

steam-pipes.
made

to

139.

pipe-joint made

ends

by

Converse

foot.

FIG.

Screwed

the

cross-sections

and

joint for

of

drawings

Elevations
=

DESIGNING.

AND

the

Scale

6"

following

table

like

foot.
:

PIPES

AND

PIPE-COUPLINGS.

I99

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

200

27.

TABLE

(Dimensions

Coupling

Screwed-socket

coupling

socket

half-way

screwed

the

end

projecting

length

of

when

length, and

For

samples

other
in

to

of

the

the

of

shows

141

socket

is screwed

each

on

or

and

the

of the

is

screw

butted

are

socket

is

other

socket.

long lengths of pipe

socket,

pipes

half

screwed-

The

pipe,

one

remaining
the

screw

wrought-iron

63.

pipe-coupling

full

the

into

CO.

cut

on

fully on

together

the

into
one

this

to

socket

is

pipe.

steel

pipe-connections,

see

drafting-rooms.

Exercise

Fig.

the

Fig.

"

end

until it is half

back

screwed

and

pipe

the

to

on

IRON

inches.)

wrought-iron pipe.

feasible

it is not

When

for

screwed

then

is

pipe

in

are

AND

COAL

READING

"

PHILA.

OF

CONNECTIONS

STEAM-PIPE

141.

"

fj"

Make
nominal

Elevations

of

drawings

diameter,

and

sections

to

wrought-iron
dimensions

same

as

Ex.

socket

given

in

Scale

55.

size.

Locomotive

142)

is made

Steam-pipe
between

the

Ball
steam

Joint.
branch

"

This

joint (Fig.

pipe (a) and

the

tee-

202

DRAWING

Exercise
locomotive

6"

64.

"

Make

steam-pipe
foot.

AND

drawings,
ball

joint

DESIGNING.

as

to

shown
dimensions

by Fig.

142,

given.

of
Scale

PIPES

with

pipe-coupling made

These

pipes.

flanges

FIG.

steel

The

lead

pipes.
ring

Exercise
iron

Make

65.

"

diameter.

Elevations

The

pipe.

riveted

the

to

wrought-iron

steam-tight by

or

like

Fig.

and

sections

of

steel

pipe

Nominal

143.
like

of

means

shown.

flanges as

drawings

flange coupling

shows

143

143-

the

between

inserted

steel

and

either

for

is made

joint

rings

into

used

are

Fig.

"

for

angle-iron

welded

and

is rolled

angle-iron

Pipe-coupling.

Flange

Wrought-iron

2O3

PIPE-COUPLINGS.

AND

Ex.

with

wrought

size of
Scale

55.

pipe 8"
6"

foot.
Couplings
shown

in

for

Fig.

is used

144

The

etc.
injector-pipes,

and

pipes,
the
up

sleeves
with

the

Exercise
brass

thin
makes
fluted
66.

"

and

Brass

copper
the

on

sleeves

Pipes.

The

"

locomotive-boiler

(a)

and

feed-pipes,
brazed

(b)are

gasket placed

the

between

joint thoroughly tight when

Make

drawings,
outside

as

diameter

shown
to

in

be

Fig.

2j" '.

size.
The

dimensions

coupling

to

the
of

ends
screwed

(c).

nut

pipe-coupling,

Copper

may

be

taken

from

Table

28.

144,
Scale

of

full

204

DRA

WING

AND

DESIGNING.

28.

TABLE

COUPLINGS

FOR

BRASS,

COPPER,

(Dimensions

AND

are

in

WROUGHT-IRON

inches.)

PIPES.

TABLE

AREA

FORM OF SECTION

*'-.
:_i_

0982d,3.

7854AB0982BA2
bd

b2

/\

.118b

JT

b(b-d)

29.

MODULUS OF

MODULUS OF

OFSECTION SECTION Z.

7854

6
6

205

PIPE-COUPLINGS.

AND

PIPES

FORM

OF

SECTION

SECTION Z.

CHAPTEE

BEARINGS,

ALL

the

is

with

connected

Blocks,

is

terminates

or

axis

bearing,

shafts

the

called

manner

the

general

of

ing
accord-

them.

upon
the

they

the

and

parts of

Plummer

When

shaft

of this type

the

parallelto

the

are

work
frame-

machine,

Blocks,

When

weight

the

of

shaft

latter

the

pivotthey

this type
of

are

which

the

the

shaft
a

of

Pillow

the

of

the

shaft

bearing

is

the

and
ing
bear-

employed

shaft, it is termed
is

pressure

is continued

parallel to

through

the

collar-bearing.

collar-bearings are

or

bearings.

axis

vertical

When

is termed

called

are

spherical,of

and

the

bearing surface, Fig. 164,

footstep-bearing.

Journals
on

at

pivot-bearing.

When

is

pressure

supporting

stepthe

the

shaft

Pedestals.

or

When

for

indiscriminately

are

axis

independent

are

in such

receive

acting

the

to

rotating

being designated

bearings

them

of power,

supports

pressure

when

BOX-FRAMES.

supported

types

perpendicular

journal-bearings, and

the

be

various

WALL

transmission

The

of the

direction

pressure

they

in the

rotation.

bearings,

the

to

the

free

allow
of

name

AND

geometrical axis, must

to

as

SOLE-PLATES,

pieces employed

about

VI.

used

horizontal

on

thrust-bearings.
parts of

They
the

are

the

shafts

made

cylindrical is

or

axles

that

revolve

cylindrical, conical,
the

most

or

form.

common

206

To

down

turned
shoulders
upon

length

come

which

the

The
the

of

Area
in

arc

length

to

of the

with

the

This

bearing.

the

164, is D

The

one

of

are

to

form

the

ings
bear-

cent

than

greater

of

The

of

the

chord

journal, multiplied

the

of

called

the

to

the

direction

of
the

by

projected

surface

contact

projected

of

the

sure.
pres-

cylindrical journal-bearing,Fig.

of

area

pivot-bearing, Fig. 278,

collar-bearingis

of

(D*

D?)N.

is

Where

4
is the

collars

and

the

and

machine,

bearing

be

returned

of

the

there
to

frame

is

that

or

restored

bush

The

to

its
end

bearing

of

the

through

as

provision

in

of

journal-

frame

the

of

the

surface

In

Fig. 145.

for wear,

length

the

and

the

shaft,

when

or,

in
or

lined

with

original condition
movement

of

soft

that

the

hole

shaft

bearing
metal,

by renewing
may

form

shaft

fit it with

Such

Fig. 146.

the

are

this

position only by renewing

to
bearing sufficiently
as

form

simplest

hole

frame,

carries

bush,

with

provided

the
no

diameter

outside

by casting projections, which

its initial

oval, reboring the

sleeve

The

"

sufficient

provide

upon

the

of collars.

is increased

bosses,

of

Z", is

by drillinga

to

bearing

lining.

shaft

number

made

is

termed

the

Journal-bearings.

bearing

of the

of

diameter

Solid

be

shafts

practicable the

width

faces

per

is sometimes

area

area

L.

area

the
When

is the

Bearing

it is the

Thus

"

about

be

plane perpendicular

with

contact

the

them

upon

journals revolve.

contact

because

area,

in

journals

bearings.

of their

that

on

which

2O7

BOX-FRAMES.

forged

collars

have

or

journals should

of

of

longitudinalmotion

the

limit

WALL

AND

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS,

the
be

can

part
wears

cal
cylindrimay
and
bush

be
can

or

limited

208

DRAWING

by making the

diameter

AND

of

DESIGNING.

of the

one

journals

diameter

of

forming
the

of

the

limits

in

tion,
direc-

such

end

movement

one

separate

shaft, by

set-screw

the

which

securing

to

than

shaft, thereby

movement

and
collar

the

shoulder

end

less

taper-pin, in

or

position

means

to

as

in

limit

the

other

direction, as shown

in

Fig.

Another

is

to

the

method

shaft

of

throughout
its

end

two

its

by

make
section

in

of

means

collars

arrapged

145.

length, limiting

motion

separate

be

uniform

the

which

three

may

different

positions.
Exercise

67.

journal-bearingssupport-

ing

shaft

2" in

an

Draw

shown

also

one

sleeve,

o.i"/+

".

Parts

with
as

face
sur-

show

limitingthe
either

of

means

diameter

to

in

as

collar,

equal

for

movement

by

bearing

inches, and

arrangement

end

ing
diameter, mak-

of the

area

6 square

two

solid

the

Make

Draw

"

tion
direcloose

one

Fig.

in

145.

bearing if"
a

shown

dimensioned

brass
in

bush

in
or

Fig. 146.
in decimal

210

DRAWING

Construction.

First

"

cylindricalpart

the

equal

the

distance
The

across

Divided
the

shaft
are

of

or

bolts

line

normal

screws.

to

the

FIG.

147.

and

made

"''.

Where

the

nut

"

the

The
resultant

Make

upon

pressures

the

complete
distance

of

equal to,

the

equal

nut

to

half

its

is

the

are

""""
-f-

say,

-f-\"

conditions

for clearance.
distance

such

that

bearings endwise,

parts fastened
division

and

cylindricalpart -f-r, the

will make

angles

placed

be

parted

the

be

can

of the

Bearings.
cannot

bearings

the
b

distance

of

we

lines

centre

bearing.

radius

across

angles

the

the

fillet,which

DESIGNING.

the

draw

of

outside

the

of

radius
half

the

to

AND

together by

generally
on

the

made

bearing.

the

means

on

the

In

the
.oSD

bolts

down

thick.

TV"

is lined

holes

the
the

to

journal
block

is intended
is

metal,

the

holding-

horizontallyadjust

to

be

through

Babbitt

which

by

to

passed

with

through

oblong

made

are

pass

which

grease

bearing
The

journal

two-part

which

is secured

the

design

The

P, upon

C, which

cap

211

BOX-FRAMES.

generally termed

block

semi-liquid

O.

opening

WALL

is

the

this

In

with

lubricated

the

and

CB.

bolts

the

of

It consists

supported,

what

is shown

Fig. 148

bearing.
is

AND

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS.

the

pedestal.
Box-frames

Wall
of

supporting

bearing

building

room

or

frame

with

an

built

are

to

arched

for

into

shafting

another.

Fig.

to

support

top

FIG.

the

sides

keep

the

base

is

the

also

wooden
the

frame

rests,

with
as

machined.

keys

surface

of
and

the

which

passes
shows

149
the

wall

which

one

wall

box-

it.

the

upper

side

raised

machined

stripsFS

in

from

fit into

The

shown

purpose

above

endwise.

To
the

for the

moving

projections 5,

are

wall

On

149.

projecting webs

from

provided

pedestal

surface
are

cast

are

the

Fig.

on

the

adjust

necessary

pedestal

and

150,
sides

of

the

of the
which

upon

each

to

of this

end

frame,

which

pedestal horizontally,

the

thickness
base.

at

wall

The

are

fitted

height

between
is

equal

to

highest point

the

the

cap-bolts CB

the

cap.

the

amount

The

the

of

is

length ^

when

pedestal cap
6"

about

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

212

the

allow

to

engineer

equal to /, the length

of horizontal

allowed

adjustment

clear of

raised
to

of the
on

base, +

the

remove

pedestal

"iff
I

D.R,
FIG.

The

i".

width
is

wall, which

usually
of

proportioning

of the

none

Exercise

such

"

in

wall

square-headed

bolts

the

Make

base.

length L equal
Show

8".
the

to

view

of the

in combination

frame

at

the

suit

to

to

the

and

the

suit

the

elevation

this view

Make

show
also

an

of

it is secured

which
shaft

project
2%'

wall

of

the

below

frame

the

two

the
the
to

of

elevation

cap

view

in

equal

box-frame,

section
end

by

in diameter,

of the

?u

ence,
experi-

placing the pedestal

the

half

of

box-frame

half-sectional
of

The

strength.

wall

width

and

pedestal with

line AB.

of

heads

12"

matter

for

which

to

to

the

of

150,

box-frame,

3/?, and

with

8"

from

average

pedestal and

pedestal to

an

thickness

piece is largelya

half-elevation

pedestal,and

plan

built

Figs. 148

the

positionon

is made

parts being calculated

Draw

69.

shown

designs

"/

150.

also

removed,

and

wall

box-

of the
of the

pedestal

and
the

Construction.

journal,then

top of the

top

of the

the

cap-bolts
the

lines

and

can

from

flange

either

for

line

equal

to

pedestals
is made

i"

may

radius

of

is

made

be

the

washer

of the

top

be

of the
but

capsmall

on

radius
of the
of

centre

of

the

nut

the

of

fillets,

Determine

box-frame

tal
horizon-

diameter

"

radii

J".

wall

brought

-\-the

hole

the

about

to

distance

the

joins

angles
to

of

corners

The

centre

of the

equal

arched

the

from

length

the

nut,

the

across

to

the

thickness
the

the

centres

may

is unnecessary.

distance

equal

The

bolts

the

centre

represents

fillet which

around

this

of the

diameter

the

distance

(equal to

adjustment
the

the

The

bolts

holding-down

which

half

the

centre

represents

by making

of

that

curve

which

bearing.

increasing

shafting

finish.

for

bolt)+

the

cutting out

or

clear

-fa"to \"

journal.

from

which

2,

determined

be

It is obvious

2.

distances

line

arc

of the

centre

now

together by

nearer

the

at

cap

nuts

the

of the

horizontal

and

the

by drawing

cap-flange,and

the

of

bolts

of the

centre

parts of

size.

full

the

determine

213

All

diameter

vertical

the

Draw

"

BOX-FRAMES.

box-frame.

Scale

omitted.

Fill in all dimensions

to

the

proportionalto

pedestal are

lines of the

wall

of the

view

end

sectional

WALL

AND

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS,

the

by making

V, the versed

sine

of the

arc,

equal

to

"

the

Half
method

elevation

employed

with

the

shaft,

that

the

diameter

pass
shown
to

show

with
the

the
form

keep

to

form

the

is greater

is sectioned,

of
than
cover

of

of

the

holes

the

bolt

removed

that

Babbitt

head

the

show

to

lining

the

on

through
diameter.
from

part of

one

the

clearly the

more

from

turning

cap-bolts, and
the

which
The
side

cap-bolts

plan
of

the

also

view

is

bearing,

bearing through which

DRAWING

2I4

the

shaft

base

of the

are

Bearings.

Post
a

is usual

the
the

in

are

with

cap

The

Fig. 148.

O.

holes

screwed

of the

box.

Exercise

70.

side

section,

"

shown

as

shown

bolts

of the

screwed

kept

from

Draw

the

in

Fig. 152.

projected

top
Make

D.

from

proportion

Construction.
of

plan.

then
FIG.

bolts
of the

PB

should

washer

of

151.

be

in

i"

from

ends

base.
at

the

least

of the

the

from

length

care

draw

The

centres
to

that

post,
width

of
the

to

the

the
and

the

centre

distance

equal

in

size.

half

the

base.

in

as

to

space

off

determine
the

times
are

bearing, taking

bearing projects

distance
the

Mark

to

in

of the

three

Draw

"

sufficient

leave

the

the

half

elevation.

Scale

exercise.

preceding

lines

the

nuts

under

dimensioned

not

same

the

two

the

view

as

tapped

plan view

2f '-,and

Parts

the

the

on

end

to

for

when

cast

an

also

Draw

in

centre

case

at

turning

and

elevation

to

W, which

the

cap

by projections h

down

Fig. 150.

shown

as

this

the

to

on

which

to

secured

webs

on

in

arranged

the

it is necessary

being placed
is

be

side,

Fig. 152

because

in

of

exercise.

piece

to

the

on

in

bolts

cap-boltsare

The

being

are

are

the

has

bearing

is cast

bearing

which

grease-cups,

the

of

way

previous

provide

the

four

side

also, as
fitting-strips

base

design

under

in the

as

to

When

"

the

In

Fig. 151.
provide

with

surface, the

vertical

in

proportions

same

is fastened

bearing

the

on
fitting-strips

practicable it

When
the

The

passes.

DESIGNING.

AND

the

radius

BEARINGS,

SOLE-PLATES,

FIG.

148.

AND

WALL

BOX-FRAMES.

21$

2l6

DRAWING

vertical

The

holes

oblong

Wall

support
The

is made

equal

width

is

ij".

to

As
than

\" greater

the
the

bolts.

employed

are

horizontal

shaft

Fig. 153,

which

bolts

DESIGNING.

the

cored,

are

Brackets

bracket,

three

adjustment

the

of

diameter

AND

is

fastened

the

to

the

it and

which

pedestals

carry

parallel and

running

through

pass

to

near

wall

by

wall.

to

wall.
of

means

The

pedestal

BOLTS.

is

secured

to

which

slide

length

of the

the

pedestal
Exercise

in

Fig. 153.

bolt.

through

Draw
the

the

upper

the

in

71.

"

Draw

also

bracket

by
slot

this

wall
a

the
a

surface

By
the

Make

153.

-shaped

bracket.
is from

FIG.

slot

the

be

line

which

to

suitable
the
AB.

bolts

T-headed
the

runs

the

whole

distance

that

adjusted.

bracket

section,
at

arrangement

can

wall

or

square-

the

for

plane
Scale

proportions given

$" square-headed

of

section

half

size.

passing

21

DRAWING

the

of

axis

the

AND

DESIGNING.

bearing will always

coincide

with

that

of

the

journal.
This
thus

form

of
the

keeping

retain

to

the

surfaces.

of

made

be

the

With

which

metal

the

on

would

than
the

the

cast-iron
in

come

melt

the

and

frame, called

braces

side

The

This

has

hangers
the
The
and
made

been

sides

to

the

the

shafts

the

white

ties
irregulari-

any

rapidly

more

Again,
the

babbitt

with

metals

the

journal,

metal

would

is

supported
carried

are

is secured
U

form, which

Fig.

155, and

upon

the

to

head
over-

ceiling

braces
the

the

J, which

bottom

as

in

and

U,

as

made

of

out

extent

some

of the

commonly

the

is the

hanger.

by making

it were,

and

the

ing
connect-

bolts.

with
has

dismounting

form

to

overcome

at

form

to

destroy

bearings

in

cated,
lubri-

Many

with

fail and

shaft

which

shown

may

only.

getting

open

the

boxes

shaft.

used, the

are

sides, as

objection

difficultyin

wall

between

purpose.

material.

and

When

"

forms

both

on

adhere

hanger frame,

Two

one

near

itself

lubricant

materially injuringthe

is not

girders.

the

bearing

if well

boxes

conditions, the

same

Hanger-frame.

Drop

these

harder

will

they

contact,

without

bearing

should

box,

while, under

with

case

the

perfect bearing

and

lubricant

the

adjusts

journal, making
be

for

long box,

cheapest and,

line

and

of

conditions

metal

wears

use

journal

film

is the

prefer to

rapidly

the

these

desirable

engineers, however,

practicalto

unbroken

an

cast-iron, which
most

it

between

pressure

light enough
rubbing

makes

bearing

of

the
the

advantage
shaft, but

comparatively heavy.

of

the mounting
facilitating
is liable to

vibrate

unless

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS,

shows

Fig. 156
Co.
This

by

together

hanger

frames

hanger

parts of the

bearing
they

are

hanger
the

and

F, which

links.
form

match

These
a

with

an

adjusting

plungers are

links

and

first,they

are

into
a

means

forms.
side

one

and

split,and

are

P'

drawn

is

replaced."

the

turing
Manufac-

both

C,

cast

by
the

on

frame
of

to

up

Fig. 156

which

called

in

recesses

the
and

shows

is carried

obtaining

shaft

These

double

vertical

yet

between

plungers.
serve

the

positive

virtuallysolid, and

screwed

on

open

cones

thus

are

which

and

of

21$

155.

adjustable bearing B"

screws

Dodge

corresponding

connection

easilyremoved

the

which

"

taper

upon

FIG.

BOX-FRAMES.

advantages

links L,

detachable

LJ5, drawn

made

the

by making

is attained

WALL

the

combines

which

providing it with
bolts

hanger

AND

pose;
pur-

adjust-

220

DRAWING

ment

they provide

second,

spherical surfaces
socket

The

5.

screws

the

on

The

joint.

DESIGNING.

AND

box

plungers
bearings

the

are

form

to

engage,
locked

are

with

sockets,

in

which
the

ball-and-

position by

lubricated

the

fillingthe

by

the

set-

cups

UR.
\

FIG.

and

O' with

attached

P, which

to

is cast

Exercise

72.

the
on

"

or

oil from

of waste

drippings
OD

grease,

frame
the

Draw

156.

saturated

cotton

the

box

are

with

caught

by hooking the

head

oil.

in the
over

The

oil dish
the

pin

frame.
the

front

and

end

elevations

partly in

section,

the

through

the

side

the

to

hanger

socket
P

joint

of the

the

of the

O'

receive

key

the

adjusting

in

be

the

frame

shown

of

which

and

Design

"

shown

and

156,

easily removed

and

Figs. 155

Make

the

entire

against
The

threads.

by filling

under

ordinary
The

ings
open-

ordinary

at

heated.

become

hole

hexagonal

is turned

screw

hanger- frame

Fig.

in

bearing

fastening a drip-catcherto

front

has

the

press

is solid

bearing

portion

position by

journal.

which

the

plungers

lubricators

as

the

tallow

plungers

means

the

EF.

and

to

when

bearing.
73*

which

SECTIONAL

ELEVATION,
the

by

Exercise

plungers
of

of

end

outer

to

oil, which,

should

melts

made

are

lubricate

to

in

tion
sec-

ball-and-

cut

locked

used

are

the

along

below

with

filled with

are

but

temperatures
The

saturated

is sufficient

and

and

CD,

are

of

plane

extend
boss

passing

size.

The

are

plungers

hollow,

cotton

conditions,
O

the

the

forming

in the

of which

points

half

bearings.

which

plungers

section

lines AB,

of

threads

The

of

cast

are

with

them

the

S, the

plain part

plungers

the

at

threads

while

boss.

set-screws

the

the

shallow

plungers,

length

frame,

adjustable hanger

on

have

P'

and

of the

half-sectional

of

Scale

method

Sellers

shows

"Fig- I57

hanger

plane

line.

centre

221

BOX-FRAMES.

plan and

the

sections
the

passing through

WALL

half

right,

the

at

full-size

also

Draw

Fig. 156,

in

shown

as

of

plan

AND

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS,

suit

the

Fig. 157,

and

156
in

bearing, altering

and

to

the

be

must

so

replaced.

Show

END

and

VIEW,

design

other

frame,

than

arranged

method

that

shown

that

complete

of

arrangement

it
FRONT

projected

PLAN

can

from

elevation.
D

proportionsis

\
.

J",

and

-}-

length
Scale

2
.

of

bearing

half

size.

D.

Unit

of

222

DKA

WING

PIG.

AND

DESIGNING.

BEARINGS,

SOLE-PLATES,

Wall-

The

is

Post-hanger

or
as

the

Wall

frames

of

these

purpose

AND

in

lines

with

hangers

the

bearings

of the

Exercise
VIEWS

the

as

front

sized
the

double

74

shown

in

sections, the

in

plane

CD,

shown

and

in

of

Fig.

and

to

section

EF.

the

on

Fig. 158,

same

PLAN

the

chain

shown

with

and

lubricating-

160.
and

ELEVATION

8"

Scale

same

pedestal.

drop hanger-frames

FRONT

Fig. 159,

elevation.

lines AB,

shown

Draw

"

separate

links, fitted with

brace

design

its

the

serve

designed

are

the

is

hanger

to

22$

158.

principles as

This

Fig. 156.

without

at

and

BOX-FRAMES.

employed

bracket

FIG.

general

WALL

VIEW

foot.

two

END

projected
Show

passing through

also
the

from
full-

frame

224

DRA

WING

AND

FIG.

DESIGNING.

160.

226

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

Bushes,

that
a

Steps,
the

to

of

means

journal with

the

that

that

material

with

without

strength

shaft, gun-metal,

offer

the

be

alone

used
The

case

with
unless

position
the

upon

the

of

direction
resultant

all lost motion

parts.
n

The

Figs. 164
turned,

are

hole
these
with
as

in

forms

can

the
of

the

be

taken

ordinary
to

167.

and

the

into

which

from

forms
The

of

forms

the

rotating

of

as

in

the

they

steel

or

ments.
requirea

metals,
be

may

stroyed
de-

journal (as would

soft

too

are

be

to

exceptionally light load.

In
one

the

frame

depends

majority

of bearings

two

or

the

shown

in

frame

the

directions, and

bearings in

bearings

two-part

bearings
with

without

qualities in

surfaces

by making

supporting

rectangular lugs L,

Fig. 164.

up

sufficient

them,

supporting

in

are

have

it

wear

magnolia"

"

or

pressure.

pressures

of

with

wrought-iron

"

an

the

in

made

withstand

these

quired
re-

all.

bronzes), but

bush

be

in contact

also

their

to

the

fulfils all these

surface

subjected

have

must

will

of

them

resistance, and

the

will

upon
a

babbitt's

"

as

wear,

run

come

some

having

injuring the

without

ing
insur-

must

extent,

possess

without

less frictional

that

limited

metals, such

White

They

supporting

thus

to

friction, and

stresses

metals

Other

higher degree

to

to

parts,
afford

They

journal

journal.

When

yielding.

undue

axis.

bronze

or

journal. They

engage

of

resist the

to

the

which

amount

the

brass

due

given

nately
indiscrimi-

given

lost motion

the

wearing

i.e.,the

they

22/

BOX-FRAMES.

names

support

will allow

minimum

the

about

motion
a

and

the

up

are

proper,

with

taking

WALL

Brasses

or

bearings

in contact

are

AND

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS,

is bored

shaft

Fig. 165,

with

fitted.

are

or

they
with

To
are

shown

are

Figs. 164

two

and
a

165
drical
cylin-

prevent

provided

steady pins P9

226

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

The
The

pins

the

may

shown

forms

either

in

Figs.

machining

it

To
usual

is

be

them

support
divided

on

will

they

wear

the

keep

line

than

thinner

bearings
with

Sole-plates.
brickwork

journal

over

be

is

large

in

driven

pedestal base,
to

it and

the

These

foundation

plate
amount

should

by
be

of movement

end.

This
to

should

be

and,

pressures

be

may

To

shaft

the

as

made

is greatest.

in

equal

to

of

this

they

supporting

of the

Fig. 169.
bolts

(a)

P B,

The

F B.
width

to

masonry

pressure

consist

wood

pedestal

and

the

The

pedestal
pass

The
of

pedestal along

width

pedestal
shaft

of

-f- say

the

ened
is fast-

through

secured

(b)of

can

which

ends

sole-plate is

or

flat cast-

keys K,

which

the

Sole-

of

the

or

upon

purpose

which

upon

pedestal.
bolts

the

joggles J

the

the

secured

usually

means

the

shown

of the

their

to

which

For

surface

between

base

reduce

it is advisable

pressure

spread

surface.

sole-plate by

the

the

to

at

laterallya.long the

to

bevelled

as

cheaper, but

each

part, they

pedestal is

employed.
a

in

Fig. 169.

adjusted horizontallyby

are

the

in

surfaces

bearings

between

flanges F,

or

them

at

resultant

the

moving

necessary

plate with

iron

from

-When

"

it is

Base-plate

part where

shown

fits,as

frame

the

at

The

that

little at

square

and
fitting,

bearings

the

to

in.

bearings subjected

length.

normal

very

provided

are

their

over

is the

support

faces

crank-shaft

on

driven

distorted, owing

to

small

successfully on

or

shaped

facilitate

may

but

be

22$

cast

are

form

to

only, by forming projecting

steady load,

bush

167

square

ends

done

the

and

it is liable

bearings,

on

166

of metal.

distribution

unequal

BOX-FRAMES.

with

cast

The

hot

it become

WALL

fit correspondingly

to

frames.

supporting

should

be

planed

and

octagonal

AND

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS,

the

base

J".

to

sole-

-)-the

230

Base-plates

Adjustable
verticallyand

which

in

Fig. 168)

used

are

be

may

FIG.

effected

by

wooden

keys

shown

Pedestal

have

to

Fig. 169

shows

for

the

surface

the

the

bushes

is in

causing
cap
the

and
wear

is

they

cap

the

as

and

not

the

down

To

cap

keep

the
the

bushes

the
to

pedestal

is taken

up

bind

and

of

place

and

bushes.

the

from
the

cap

being

journal, the

is sometimes

by filingdown

engineers
the

being

of
down

space

filled with
the

when

means

screwed

with

prepared by

brought

by

to

is prepared

provided

space

are

diameter.

block

when

other

wear,

ployed
em-

formed

are

it is

Some
each

in

the

bushes

touch

the

cap

but
fitting,

bushes

8"

to

is

it

adjustable.

yet

When

the

where

pedestal bearing
3"

pedestal, they

by screwing

is

adjustment

used

are

of

unnecessary.

do

laterally(as

the

take

rigid

form

block

facilitate

to

position, and

C B.

that

receive

to

strips are

that

the

the
of the

hand-work

fittingstripsF
planing,

which

supporting shafting from

outer

by

horizontal

Bearings

ordinary

of

either

is made

169.

Fig

bearing

surfaces

inner

suit the

in

adjustment

168.

set-screws

Pillow-block

or

necessary

The

of

means

adjusting bearings

arranged
The

longitudinally.

or

for

vertical

The

horizontally.

by sliding wedges

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

hard-wood

shaft

left between

nearer

the
too

between

hard

make

gether
to-

bolts

far,
the

\yood and
distance-

pieces, thus

in

become
for the

they

wear.

When
and

other

each
be

worn

provided

do

other,

shaft, and

when

they

not

After

nuts.

limited

each

the

the

compensate

in contact

come

distance-piece is used,
double

with

sufficientlyto

down

bushes

the

down

in contact

fit the

bushes

filed

are

no

with

bushes

2$l

BOX-FRAMES.

screwed

be

to

cap

the
the

when

Fig. 169,

the

make

Others

distance.
as

allowing

WALL

AND

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS,

with

cap-bolts should

pedestal

has

been

IHD1AM*

FIG.

adjusted
The

P B.
the
be

to

bolts

PR

moved
To

which
around

suit

the

holes

in

pass

along
facilitate
it

is

the

are

shaft, it is held
the

made

oblong

the

of
fitting

and

across

in

position by

or

the

base
the

is

the

sole-plate through
to

the

allow

pedestal

to

provided

centre.

bolts
which

pedestal

to

it.

transversely to

shaft

carried, the

and

base-

the

edges

169.

The

the

with

piece

upon

fitting-strips

oil-cup is usually

232

DRA

On

169.
O

the

with

cast

WING

C,

cap

made

to

shank, and

when

over

Exercise

shown

"

3'^

the

into

less

oil-cup

an

with

the

of

block

the

of the

centre

and

plane

of

Make

the

section

sufficient
Make

direction.

Construction.

inches

by

Any

method

which

the

the

HALF

TIONAL
SEC-

project a

of

HALF

the

the

to

Scale

either

size.

half

decimals

in

Parts

dimensioned

readily

tal-base
pedes-

\"f in

move

journal).
not

pedestal.

be

can

derived

in

are

marked

from

joggles J
drawijyff*tthe

be

HALF

sole-plateand

knowledge

of

will

and

centre

2D.

the

from

bearing

END-ELEVATION,

pedestal

parts

of

passing through

elevation

dimensioned

of

student
A

169,

and

diameter

the

exercises.

the

the

pedestal

and

PLAN

through

parts

constant.

are

Fig.

4"

All

"

(the

of D

allow

to

of
form

section

SECTIONAL

holes

the

J" pipe tap-

passing transverselythrough

From

HALF

Fig.

in diameter

ELEVATION

of

passing through

length of

with

the

HALF

of section

journal.

END-ELEVATION

HALF

plane

also

plane

3"

than

O,

-|" pipe tap-shank.

the

ELEVATION,

centre

terms

Show

hole

tapped

general arrangement

Fig. 164.

in

PLAN,

at

receive

Draw

76.

SECTIONAL

the

screwed

or

sole-plate, Fig. 169, substituting

and

the

DESIGNING.

pedestals having journals

be

may

AND

understood

in
termined
de-

ous
previ-

is shown

from

the

drawing.
PEDESTAL.

SELF-LUBRICATING

In
the

this

under

revolved
continuous
thus

design, Fig.
side

by

of

their

supply

keeping

the

the

170,

bearing,

friction
of

oil reservoir

an

oil

on

to

in

the
the

which

OR

is formed

on

loose

rings R

are

journal, thereby raising

upper

journal thoroughly

side

of

the

lubricated

bearing,
and

not

234

wasteful,

the

as

oil that

surplus

CC

chambers

in the

caught

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

flows

back

carried

and

the

of

out

bearing

the

to

is

reservoir

OR.
As

the

oil, in this

same

repeatedly,after
useless.

reservoir

and

the

into

the

cap

C.

little

very

with
fit

which
and

projecting

faces

it is not

when

relieved

of the

journal.

of wear,

each

The

lower

piece DP,

of
cap

with
shown

by

it is

vided
pro-

as

the

on

that

to

shaft,

turned

to

strips,
pedestal,
the

remove

the

as

the

the

bush
side

upper

ent
pedestal is practicallyindependbe

can

removed

and

re-babbitted

from

laterally,flanges F

moving

fit inside

the

of

end

machining

are

strips

pedestal.

the

down

the

be

there

as

expense,

which

end

withdraw

made

machining

shaft, so

can

and

machining

projections

oil

new

are

it is cast

called

the

the

bush

the

keep

at

or

the

off,

revolving.

are

piece,

separate

MS,

load

bushes

the

as

little trouble
To

on

the

from

this arrangement

By

cast

to

necessary

bush

reduce

with

concentric

rings

pressure,

upper

corresponding

upon

down

for

is

To

bush

with

openings

if the

see

the

Fig. 171.

made

are

bush

is then

oil is drained

old

These

can

on

wear

lower

The

sketch,

the

engineer

the

and

replenished by pouring

cover.

pedestal is designed

This
be

the

that

be

the

in

screws

then

can

openings

large, so

will

the

By removing

thick

dirty and

it becomes

time

lubricator, is being used

of

form

too

the
go

bush

which

also

far and

bushes,
further

is

keeps

clamping

the
into

distance
the

from

kept

the

turning by

the

cap

shaft.

pieces

DP

pedestal.

To

from

the

distance

being

To

take

are

planed
allow

up

screwed

the
to

this, a

wear

let the
space

SOLE-PLATES,

BEARINGS,

is left

need

be

not

The

squarely

The

large

in

the

in

bolts
to

the

pedestal.

the

bolts

form

diameter

of

of

surface

allow

journal

unless

the

the

upon

it is

common

case

made

in

cast

position by

proper

holes

avoid

square

recesses

in the

pedestal

either

in

for

quite

are

in the

direction.
from

journals

therefore

the

it acts

5"

add

to

the

surface

The
the

rubbing
frictional
be

radiating
of the

as

enough
to

radiating
of

diameter

in

and

resistance

greater.
surface
we

Thus
without
must

the

at

into

energy

sufficiently
large

is

it is

destroy

come

in

surface

the

the
it will

would

and
be

be

the

the

but

through

space
be

larged
en-

increased;

seen

the

increasing
increase

cant,
lubri-

contact

journal,

also

the

generated,

to

the

would

surfaces

journal

mechanical

fast

as

resistance

journal

surfaces

rubbing

would

the

of

great

other.

the

frictional
the

radiate

increasing

of

velocity

the

sit'

to

as

to

fit into

held

converts

become

the

each

to

by

f-t the

which

The

"

area

to

will

allowing
adhere

the

heat

temperature

:o

in this

suitable

is

Bearings.

the

heat, and,

which

so

up.

Length

to

pedestals

through oblong

pedestal

of

lining,

bolts, but

two

longitudinal adjustment

for

babbitt

depend

not

by

bolts

heads

pass

the

pedestal

does

of

pedestal is

which

PBt

allow

This

The

the

down

The
T

of

space

movement.

larger sizes

have

This

cover.

35

thick.

and

held

four.

use

section, and

to

lateral

BOX-FRAMES.

the

and

fit into

journal,

usually

is

WALL

thickness

i"

to

to

prevent

to

cap

practice

the

upon

bolts

cap

made

is

the

f"

from

be

cap

pedestal

than

greater

should

which

the

between

AND

that
work

length

of

bearing.
In

paper

read

before

the

Manchester

(England)

Associa-

236

DRAWING

of

tion
of

of

Professor

should

bearing

unit

Engineers,

heat

is

DESIGNING.

AND

Goodman

such

be

generated

that

not

than

more

of

inch

square

per

that

stated

the

area

thermal

one

bearing

surface

minute.

per

Let

total pressure

"

"w

coefficient

6"

of

speed

in

pounds;

of friction;
of

circumference

in

journal

feet

per

nDN
minute

12

number

of revolutions

of

area

W- X

the

length

diameter

length of journal in inches;

"="

width

the

of

journal in inches;

of the

chord

of work

journal

in contact,

done

in inches.

minute

per

P^S.

eter
diam-

L ;

Foot-pounds
of

inches, i.e., the

in square

bearing

minute;

per

The

the

at

thermal

units

ence
circumferminute

per

PvS
A

and

:"

With

steel

Exercise

6"

in

load
per

77

"

of 35,000

bronze

lubrication,

inches.

z"

white-metal

or

coefficient of

//, the

.0056.

at

pedestal for
self-lubricating

Design

of

form

the

pounds,

and

shown
at

run

in
a

Fig.

speed

to

170,

of 300

shaft

carry

revolutions

minute.
a

plane

lubricators,
SECTION,
at

continuous

taken

diameter,

Show
the

be

may

in

journals running

bearings,having
friction

which
g-p-,.from

:"

of section
a

the

the centre,

ta-1,a

ELEVATION,

HALF

QUARTER

plane
a

passing through
END

HALF

HALF
PLAN

HALF-SECTIONAL

of

PLAN

with

HALF

passing through

of the
the

centre

and

ELEVATION

section

the

ELEVATION,

left-hand

cover

(C)

of

of

one

the

TRANSVKRSF,

the

pedestal

side of the

removed,

pedesQUAR-

BEARINGS,

SOLE-PLATES,

TER-SECTIONAL

the

the

PLAN,

shaft.

the

of

centre

Make

and

END

VIEW,

and

elevation

All

journal,
various

of

points
except
sizes.

the

of

3"

those

the

TRANSVERSE

ring-joint

parts

passing

through

foot.
lower

bush,

showing

ELEVATION,

SECTION,

as

proportional

are

the

HALF-SECTIONAL

HALF

BOX-FRAMES.

section

to

of

drawings
and

WALL

plane
Scale

full-size

also

ELEVATION

HALF

of

AND

plan

shown.

to

which

HALF

and

the

are

diameter

constant

(D)
for

of

the

journals

VII.

CHAPTER

GEARING.

BELT

Belts.
for

belting

flat

bands,
The

chains,

most

known

Leather

is

often

from

belt

the

part
of the

rim

and

their

rope,

steel

with

gum

under

are

leather

and

India-rubber

and

of

latter

is

third

an

greater than

former.

Belts.

the

pulley; i.e.,regarding
have

the

with

there

belt, provided

the
Motion

"

another

to

adhesion

superior, having

by

pulley

conditions,

most

uniform
is

belt

velocity

same

linear

slipping of

no

as

be

may

inextensible
the

as

outside

pulley.
to

driven

revolutions

The

coated

than

Motion

one

it will

of

Referring
driver

found

one

of

means

every

be

to

velocity by
on

hemp

or

general practice

durable

Transmission

the

in

more

is claimed

transmitted

wire

etc.

driving the

for main

which

used

belts.

gum

as

flat

catgut,

of material

gutta-percha, India-rubber,

cotton,

common

latter

the

cotton,

kinds

different

many

leather,

are

camel-hair,

canvas,

but

the

Among

"

speed

Fig.

let

171,

d^ and

d^ be the

let

pulleys respectively,and
per

of the

minute
rim

and

of the

the

diameter

of the

TV, and

velocity of

the

A7, be
belt.

driver

N,

V
.

...

238

(i)

239

GEARING.

BELT

FIG.

and

the

speed

of the

rim

of the

171.

driven

(2)
therefore

N,

d,

N,

or

d,N,

d,N,

or

=
.

""i
In
the

all

pulley

questions concerning
diameters

should

be

the
taken

velocity
to

the

ratio

centre

(3)

a,

of

belting

of the

belt

240

DRAWING

thus

thickness;
nominal

the

Example
is

there
The

i.

shaft

belt

the

formula

From

model

an

electric

driven

carries

by

pulley 6"

on

in diameter

30"

of

R.

is 1450

motor

It has
and

fast

been

in R.

P.

and

centred

less than

belts

M.,

when

balanced

should

curved

the

Find

the

speed

Fig. 171.

,0

the

have

have
the

the

chord

All
shaft.

of

pulleys

the

arc

that

should

large pulleys
than
be

small

carefully

Driving-pulleys carrying

perfectly flat

convexity

be

pulley.

economical

more

should

belts

of

of the

face

much

belts.

on

width

by experience

are

slow-speed

shifting-beltsshould

pulleys

The

"

demonstrated

running

pulleys and

by

get

Rules.

cent

per

on

B.

get

Practical

25

connected

diameter

P. M.

A".-4X4-i.SXT-

about

from

counter-shaft

^"_4X4_ILX30_

Some

motor.

pulley i-J"diameter

15" pulley

(3) we

Substituting we

it

Sibley College

model

valve-motion

of the

small

so

axle.

of the

speed

is

For

at

another

model

valve-motion

belt.

error.

driving-wheel pulley

the

belt

be

draughting-room

motor
to

the

of

the

of

much

the

belt

carries

to

The

thickness

without
In

"

of

passes

This

the

thickness

one

pulley would

the

of

diameter

plus

valve-molion

shaft

which

virtual

diameter

neglected

be

may

the

calculations

other

DESIGNING.

AND

of

\"

should

surface.
to

be

12"
the

All
of
same.

other

width;
For

242

DRAWING

suitable

most

then

1450

diameter

the

of

speed
P.

R.

483

the

largest pulley on

for the

necessary

"

DESIGNING.

AND

counter-shaft

the

M.

shaft,
counter-

the

Between

will

be

engine

and

8.32.

Let

18
n

the

counter-shaft

ratio

diameter

pulley

the

of

diameter

the

pulley on

the

with

of

to

Tl

First

the

determine

dynamo
=

the

the

find

the

of

size

work

the

172.

by

the
the

minute;

per

5"
v

its

6"

have

to

of

"

the

the

connect

find

the

of

the

side

dynamo
rim

"("""""-"";""

to

lower

connecting-

nearly.

."

necessary

will

we

on

FIG.

done

"

belt

counter-shaft

pull

then

0.32

;.. :..-v

......

working

foot-lbs.

198,000

_.,.;..

50"

be

will be

counter-shaft
"Y

To

fly-wheel

6 X

value
belt.

33,000

dynamo

="

pulley

6rr
at

runs

"

1450

==

2277

feet

per

minute;

therefore

98OOO
T
*

"

"

"

~"

87 Ibs.

Let

the

centres

of the

dynamo

2277
shaft

and

counter-shaft

be

15

feet

apart, then

(see Fig. 172)

BELT

y^
6

tan.

180"

0.0174

log.

20

of the

2.50

T,

1.50

r,

217.5,

Ibs.

70

Richards
which

in

TT

2.25".
measure

find

we

175.75

.4343

2.5",

find

we

width

70

~-

.3 X

that

7;

217.5

of

-*-

3.05

is the

.3974

2.50

J-S0

r,

o,

and

J45"

belt, then

2j".

2.06, say

"

for the

Transmission
for the
all

for

enough

near

T,

-5-

following rule

the

is

says

87

Rules

Practical

gives
he

of natural

thus:

inch

per

145
Some

table

therefore

T;

2.50
=

equations

.04

logarithms

2.50,

these

tan.

log. Tt

of

number

Combining

allowing

Then
table

that

175.75,

3-05.

from

"3974?

find

we

"

from

and

.04,

I oO

trig, functions
a

"?"

""

"

243

","

g//

"

GEARING.

size

of Power."
of

that

cases

driving-belts,
arise

nary
in ordi-

practice.
FX
H.P.

(4)

Where

the

velocity

the

width

the

area

the

of the

of the

given

belt

BELTS

SINGLE

following table

On

smooth

On

wooden

On

covered

iron

pulleys
pulleys
pulleys

GUM

H.

different

BELTS

AVERAGE

in

THICKNESS.

P.

On

smooth

65 ft.

On

wooden

ft.

On

covered

50

conditions

ft.

80

per minute.

30.

THICKNESS.
i

in feet

in feet.

suit

to

TABLE

LEATHER

belt

iron

pulleys
pulleys
pulleys

H.P.

60

ft.

50

ft.

35

ft.

244

DRAWING

should

Belts
too

be

but

narrow,

of

should

thickness

pulleys

on

often

are

wide.
As

"

belts

belts

should

and

manner

their
be

used

at

very

running

have

position

width

should

belts

Large
work,

in

increase

Double

diameter.

electrical

in

possible; they

as

increase.

in such

them

through

Belts.

12"

as

wide

as

too

also

over

high speeds,

made

never

Thickness

DESIGNING.

AND

slots
to

as

punched

prevent

air

cushion.
The

tension,

working
of

sq. in. for

Ibs. per

320

for thickness

following proportions

based

laced

Book,

according
a

safe

safe

responding
cor-

working

stress

Unwin

given by

Kent's

see

allow

Mr.

to

tension

working

authorities

many

and

31.

formulae

and

belt

Engineers'

Pocket

876.

page

For

rules

other

safe

joints, are

TABLE

For

on

of

A.

of

tension

Ibs.

only 45

W.

Smith,

Ibs.

7"

under

ordinary
inch

per

experiments
be

may

had

per

of

conditions,
width;

have

shown

inch

of

but
that

width

of

belt.
of

Proportions
a

centre

of

"7,

centre

of bolt

width

of

pulley
shaft

Pulleys (Figs.

set-screw

belt

face

diameter.

from
"

see

from

end

edge

of

Example

f (b +

0.4).

173

and

of hub

flange

174).
"

ij"/,.
ijdfa.

2.

(Unwin)

.'.
"

(5)

BELT

GEARING.

245

246

DKAW1NG

AND

DESIGNING.

GEARING.

BELT

d,

of bolt

"/,

diam.

d^

set- screw

for
of

"

in solid

of set-screw

diameter

diameter

centre

of rim

radius

at

in

24?

pulley
rim

splitpulley at

key

\d +

and

hub

-iV". (6)
"

(6)

eq.

.2$d.

pulley.
bolt from

of rim

inside

d^-+ /, -f-i""

(7)

IS

of

end

arms

"

F
g

4 +

t".

width

of

arm

at

rim

width

of

arm

at

centre

"

"6337

\h.

of

pulley

/BD

")

belt*
~T~ single
"*"*"

/"

thickness

length

number

by

of

arm

of hub
of

\B

arms

be

thickness

of rib

thickness

of belt

/,

thickness

of rim

/,

inside

==

thickness

B.

to

"^ +

The

4.

nearest

surrounding

.6t

hub

hub

Table

see

"

between

/,

D.

radius
Exercise

per

min.

84.

"

develops

fan

per

proper

min.

V~BD +

diameters

revolving

from
of

of the

from

8 H.P.

Diam.

.31 d.

(9)

for

singlebelt.

(10)

pulley crown

is obtained

Power
rev.

of

arms

-"- 2.

i
=

divisible

31.

-f-.005

.14

7?

number

taken.

taper of pulley rim

of

(8)

...

should

.-V,

,/

and
an

3 to

with

an

8"

has

4"

double

"

(n)

5 "

speed

of

pulley on

1800

its shaft.

engine fly-wheel running

fly-wheel

intermediate

5 feet.

at

Determine

pulleys and

rev.

make

75
the

suit-

248

DRAWING

173

See

Example

2,

ing

the

on

Dodge

that

stated

in most

(1) They

(2) The
iron

(3) The
an

iron

to

are

throw

to

keys

and

secured

the

same

are

are

to
to

exact

fit the

bore

built

least

the
of

use

pulley

keys.
that

exceeds
33

to

prevents

the
any

is the

as

on

cent.

per

pulley

balance,

on

case

The

halves

two

of

kiln-dried

shaft, then
the

of

The
hard

the

segments,
the

pulley

bushings
wood,

then

fit

to

thoroughly
each

bush

is

carefully turned

pulley.

They

then

are

on

cut

halves."

85.

"

Make

complete working drawings

pulley 14" diam., shaft

as

the

of wooden

made

of

will hold

wooden

of

bolts

size of

pulley

shaft, and

with

and

follows

used.

are

shaft

at

the

out

poplar.

bored

transversely in

be

pulley

shafts

counterbored

split loose

the

the

to

air-dried, then

Exercise

weakens

iron

wooden

pulley

the

nor

of

made

being

outside

with

to

fastening

"They

"

the

of

wooden

equal

set-screws

different-sized

the

of

as

than

friction.

reducing

bushings

on

amount

an

mars

Construction.
face

belt

method

neither

when

and

wooden

bushings,

better
are

report

pulleys, lessening the weight

iron

fastening

with

of

wooden

with

for this

given

reasons

on

Institute, in

wood-split pulleys are

an4 bearings

shafts

pulley

tendency

Pulley

lighterthan

are

grip

(4) The
shaft

Wood-split

quite firmly, dispensing

shaft

the

on

Franklin

compression

steel

or

the

of the

line shaft

the

on

"

of

Committee

The

(Fig. 175).

cases

Some

pulleys.

Fig.

to

p. 241.

Arts

the

and

similar

them,

foot.

"

Pulley

Wood-split
Science

6"

Scale

Fig. 174.

or

largest of

of the

working drawing

able

DESIGNING.

AND

shown

in

Fig.

175.

2"

diam.

Scale

9"

of

wooden

Projections
=

foot.

to

250

DRAWING

AND

All-wrought-steel
by
on

paper

Institute
for the

of

Am.

Pulley.
Pulley

the

subject by

Mr.

in

June 1897,

the

shaft

be

can

without

Co.

This
is shown
G.

E.

pulley

Budd

in

as

factured
manu-

Fig. 176.

before

the

following advantages

In

Franklin
claimed

are

used

keys

or

in the

heaviest

set-screws,

service, clamped

and

show

never

to

sign

slipping.

(2) There

is

no

machining required.

FIG.

are

"

all-wrought-steelpulley:

(1) They
the

the

DESIGNING.

cut

pressure.

with

shears

and

The

rims

and

arms

176.

pressed

into

shape

with

hydraulic

no

of

symmetry

form, requiring

counterbalance.

(4) Being
it

and

of material

(3) Economy

2$

GEARING.

BELT

fully

is

as

made

of

light

as

the

and

best
wood

the

material,

strongest
and

pulley,

much

more

durable.
Construction.
the

is made

rim

the
and

the

at

face

the

rim

edges

the

preventing

It

segments.

give

scraping

of

rolled, giving

are

of

belt

the

once

the

on

fastening it
neat

in

that

seen

flanges

means

be

is divided

The

longitudinally.

of

The

it may

Fig. 176

to

four

once

centre

arms.

of

up

and

transversely
rim

Referring

"

to

appearance

throwing

it off

or

on.

The

hub

connected

to

to

each

parts

of

manner

of

half

the

by

rim
of

half

the

have

and

is made

the

fastening

shown

strong

for

their

86.

Make

Exercise

"

4!'

Scale

Cone-pulleys

easily by

most

has

the

belt

when
the

change

to

necessary

series

the

shall
belt

velocity

fit all

direction

of

to

the

in

true

in

and

power
of

hub

parts,

'arms

Fig. 177,

two

flat

are

The

rotation.

and

their

and

rim,

them

make

working

drawing

Fig.

"to

177

ceptionally
ex-

of

all-

the

T:he : "dimensions

be

tools
This

speed.

diameters

pairs

will

machine

cone-pulleys.

whose

is shifted

ratio

spider

operating

means

of steps

four

is

purpose.

shown

In

"

into

steel, and

foot.

at

wrought-steel pulley
given.

arms

as

corrugated section,

in the

heavy

The

pulley.

the

of

divided

spider

lying

edges

cylinders

of

from

one

changed.

an

pair

often

is

accomplished
driven

proportioned

are

steps with

The

is

it

pulley
so

equal tension,
of

steps

to

that
and

another

252

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

GEARING.

BELT

of Belts

Length
Let

"

of belt ;

length

L
D

(Fig. 178)."

large pulley;

diam.

of

diam.

of small
between

distance

/=

pulley

D
ti

angle

sine

whose

of

centres

pulleys:

-\- d
-j"

few

crossed

belts and

D-d
for
2l

open

FIG.

From
cos

of

sines

crossed

belt

table

belts.

178.

find

the

angle

in

degrees

and

6.
for

Then

(12)
and

for

an

open

belt

-("" +

d) +

0(D

d) +

2l

cos

(13,

254

DRAWING

The
/

length

constant

are

the

only

necessary

To

belt
to

design

pair

d^

the

the

the

is

an

arc

ing
taper-

cones

an

of

belt:

open

leys
pul-

opposite

10,

given by
let

296,

p.

us

d,.

find

to

the

diameters

opposite

of

d^d3 and

d^

cones.

and

D^D^D^D^

and

at

centre

with
the

the

steps

to

circles

of

but

and

to

of

arc

lines

pair

the

dtdt and

radii

and

centre

approximation,

All

D".

that

experiment.

by

tangent

common

of

perpendicular EF.

found

to

tangent

-3I4/

tangents

and

erect

belt-lengthas

same

respectively,draw
method

known

circles

diameters

A,

arc

is

given.

point

will be

draw

to

for

E., vol.

of the

giving

Dt and

similar

pairs, it

centres.

draw
A

M.

and

EF

arc

necessary

all

graphical method

be

to

distance

centre

find

cone-pulleysso

Dldl.

the

to

S.

draw

diameters

Make

steps

and

d and

on

diameters

AAAA

Cc in the

to

A.

centres

centre

tangent

tangent

of

tension

equal

the

using

required

Bisect

With

pair

cone-pulleys

between

the

are

to

Draw

So

of

let it be

Around

draw

of

the

distance

C and

of

pair

following data

equal

in

(1) Diameters

Then

have

when

is constant

designing

d^d^d^d^

And

Smith

the

(2) /

and

A.

suppose

will

use

(Fig. 1/9).
C.

in

belt

ways.

AAAA

Mr.

DESIGNING.

crossed

therefore

crossed

opposite

Let

of the

that

AND

dt it is only
arc

and

the
close

required steps.
enough

cone

given pair.

cdt cd^

of

D, and

A,

drawn

for all

A,

cdt
This

practical

purposes.
Exercise

Dl

87.

"

18", A

Referring
=

Fig. 179:

to

14", A

10"

and

First,

assume

and

dl

eters
diam=

6", and

BELT

find the
to

with

corresponding

of the

diameters

graphical method

Smith's

255

GEARING.

opposite steps

just explained

ing
accord-

in connection

Fig. 179.
make

Second,

complete working drawings

half

cone-pulleys, showing
elevation

side

Fig.

Scale

80.

6"

OF

PROPORTIONS

Let

thickness

of

thickness

of hub

CONE

The

length

"

face

of hub

radius

elevation

like

a\

V RD,

14

+ J" from

eq.

(10);

.43^ ;

$B.

dimensions

remaining

end

half

PULLEY.

of rim

edge

half

and

the

foot.

also

of

one

longitudinal cross-section
and

combined,

of

taken

be

may

from

the

ing
follow-

table.

32.

TABLE

(Dimensions

Rope

Pulleys.

grooved rims,
the

groove

little greater

shown

in

usually45".

is

semicircular

as

Rope

"

at

the

than

bottom,
the

radius

in

inches.)

made

pulleys are
Figs.
The
the
of

181

and

grooves
radius
the

rope.

of cast

182.
for

of

The

iron

with

angle

of

guide pulleys are

the
The*

curve

being

diameter

of

256

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

258

pulley measured

rope

that

less than

the

smallest

the

diameter
case

be

top wherever

on

of contact

of

Britain.

This

1.

has

It

belt

where

of the

pulley ;

the

gearing,

slack

possible, so

is the

the

and
form

of

side

of

the

increase

to

as

be

rope

the

arc

pulley.
groove

inclined

flat sides

not

6)A

should

rope

rope.

the rope

between

Fig.

long

used

other

at

use

the

each

to

in Great
from

45"

60".

to

The

general practice
shown

groove
form

allows

wear

over

than

it does

in
the

the

entire

88.
"

rope

of rope
Take

pulley
to

be
the

to

rope

if".

the

of the

sides
groove,

form

curved.

are

of
This

distributing the

rope,

making

it last

longer

of the

section

of the

rim

shown

in

181.

Diam.

groove.

drawing

five grooves,
Scale

is to

in the

rotate

flat-sided

with

other

where

surface

Make

America

in

Fig. 182,

in the

Exercise
a

of the

in the

rule

following

diameter

the

of

centre

(loD +

should

the

given by

Dl

As

the

to

Dl

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

full

dimensions

TABLE

(Dimensions

as

Fig.

size.
from

the

33.
in inches.)

following table.

of

BELT

GEARING.

259

260

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

-A-l"'G"

Exercise

89.

Make

26l

GEARING.

BELT

of

drawing

the

"

shown

in

Remaining

Fig.

182.

dimensions

of

Diam

may

taken

be

34.

TABLE

(Dimensions

to

rope

in

inches.)

pulley

rope
be

ij"
from

Scale

Table

rim

section

full
34.

size.

VIII.

CHAPTER

GEARING.

TOOTHED

PROPORTIONS

circular

p'

diametral

pitch

pitch (/

/')

Fig. 183.

TEETH.

IRON

OF

3.1416;

T '-f-p'

'

pitch diameter
of teeth

number

of tooth

I'

flank

thickness

for

.04

.05 for

of tooth

addendum

/=

of tooth

.06

for wheels

the

total

of

force

.^p\

.35^

to

.48^

for cast-iron

-5/ for

.4/5

teeth,

teeth;

cut

the

radius

7V=

the

number

the

horse-power

gears,

by

transmitted

of the

of the

R=

="

of the

pitch

pitch

tooth

line

circle

of revolutions
transmitted

wheel

one

"

7^"

in feet

in

of the

by

gearing;

mortise

high velocity and

corner

velocity

mill

ordinary

the

"="

hand-wheels,

through
V

',

per

another

to

63020-^^;

second

inches;
wheel
the

per

minute;

wheel.
262

TEETH

WOOD

/' =

of wood

thickness

Exercise

of

gear

teeth

the

the

At

making
the

action

angle of

mortise

angle

the

wheel

find

will be

quotient
be

inches
of teeth

/:

laid
in the
:

the

off with

15"

the

with

2.5.

of the

by p'

C draw

line L,

pitch line,and

the

Or

of

number

degrees

of the

will be

horizontal

the

protractor.

circumference

cuts

183.

of

number

quotient

spur

L.

to

360" by

diameter

of teeth

pitch circle

the

Divide
the

the

compute

FIG.

To

pitch

15".

number

circle tangent

base

diametral

or

for

where
of

the teeth

construct

C, and

line

centre

point

an

To

rack, p'

and

pitch circle by dividing

may

with

.6/.

"

system,

Draw

cog

(Fig. 183.)

90.

15

Involute

draw

wheel.

meshing
mesh

to

usuallymade

are

-4/;

teeth

iron

wheels

of the

teeth

iron

of

thickness

for mortise

cogs

for the

than

thicker

or

263

GEARING.

TOOTHED

the

in

divide

the

pitch circle by
pitch.

Or

divide

the

teeth:

arc/,

which

number
the
a

of

number

quadrant

264

DRAWING

the

of

point

circle.
the

circle with

pitch

the

point

where

the

outline

Next

pitch

of the

the

on

the

The

to

tangent

of

piece

mark

of

circle

tooth

into

fourth

every

division

tooth

wheel

for

the

equal
the

and

equal

15

intersects

of the

of the

the

the

addendum
the

pitch
half

to

pitch line

it intersects

stick

another

the

mark

second

tracing,with
point

-a

has

number
It

will

forming

be

the
the

base

similar

way

to

generating line

the

of

the

part above
must

rotate

line L

about

line ; at

the

line

then

be

the

rotated

the

that

extends
curve

needle,

be

below

point

point

on

sufficient
tooth.

involute

is

the

to

conical

curve

the

generated

pitch line, except

in the

of intersecti

puncture

of the
the

the

to

first

until

addendum

with

point

the

will

points

tooth
of

this

it the

tangent

to

it counterclockwise

the

through

similar
the

is

Take

tangent

becomes

figure

line; this part

the

is

form

to

by

addendum

line to

find

to

seen

line L

drawing-paper:

found

been

the

wheel

point

where

base

dum
adden-

upon

the

at

4.H pencil sharpened

Continue

curve.

trace

puncture

needle;

the

on

the

the

wheel-tooth

needle, and, removing

until

tracing
the

small

the

to

of

radius

rack.

celluloid, and

needle, and

line

of the

curve

with

tangent

root

of the

point

until

line at

in the

the

at

stick

line

the

thin

or

wheel

is drawn

line

make

and

Now

rack

involute

the

of

wheel, and

tracing-paper

needle.

adjust

line

the

of

straightline L,

the

hair-springdivider

thickness

addendum

describe

To

base

the

pitch

line of

root

line

base

off

lay

DESIGNING.

rack.

Draw

the

from

parts, and
the

AND

that

pitch
in

the

opposite direction.

266

For

values

intermediate

Example.

number

intermediate

any

"

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

found

easilybe

can

gear-wheel

teeth

of

has

proportionally

calculation.

by

teeth, and

30

5.23

the

number

radius

flank

A
and
to

line

on

the
This

when

30

then

the

the

face

other

pitch line

and

mesh

following

5.06,

the

the

it is

the

clearance.

for

the

rack-teeth:

straightline
the

of

drawn

face

found

point

is

face

true

will be

of the

pitch

with

of Gears":

found
the

at

to

less than

convenient

circular

rim

flank

right angles

circular-arc

rack-tooth

the

the

by dividing 2.10"

pinion having

joined

to

equal

radius

tables

"Teeth

half

with

diametral

Grant's

is

of

rounding

is

radial, and

provided

is

L ; the

it is to
The

from

half

is

radius

rule

special
one

tooth

of the

fillet whose

nearest

4^" nearly.

"

The
with

is' 31;

by/7 (1.25),making

divided

be

to

table

in the

of teeth

number

the

centre

by/'.

is necessary
28

teeth.

for comparing

pitch ; they

are

TOOTHED

Exercise

wheel

spur-gear
12

(Fig. 184.)"

91.

teeth.

/'

and

pinion

and

For

piece

drawing
point
while
distance

first
to

of intersection

B
a

curve

of

similar
For
the

with

point
the

way
the

face

face

point

edge

arc

pencil ;

the

of the

will describe

pinion

Other
curves

with

as

to

this will

be

points

may

the

needle, and
a

small
At

the

removing

the

B.

arc

make

A
the

over

celluloid

arc

the

through

tangent
puncture

point

be

in

found

the
in

required.

pinion-tooth
the

needle, and,
so

it

as

arc

Through

a.

intersects

other

draw

place

the

rotate

each

on

point

puncture

another

edge.

the

epitrochoids,

wheel-teeth

needle, and

the

complete

to

celluloid

second

the

at

at

place

needle, adjust the

arc

the

the

make

until

circles

pitch

at

needle

right

the

to

mark

and

the

for

non-interchangeable.

celluloid, and

arc

celluloid

the

on

holding

point

to

and

40

epicycloids and

of
or

teeth

184.

are

tracing-paper

tangent

teeth

addendum

the

of

the

have

to

system,

by rollingthe

found

are

follows
on

of

curves

the

construct

wheel

FIG.

The

To

Walker

2.10.

26?

GEARING.

curve

ab.

roll

arc

on

arc

A,

268

DRAWING

To

the

draw

celluloid

celluloid

the

lett

The
on

the

and

on

flank
arc

A,

is

wheel-tooth

of

the

tangent

to

arc

B, and

when

DESIGNING.

flank

make

of the

AND

puncture

point

at

a,

trace

through b\

" will describe

pinion-tooth
the

point b'

is

then

When

the

curve

wiil describe

ab
roll

flank

of the

the

arc

to

tooth.

by rolling arc
curve.

on

the

on

then

found

arc

TOOTHED

Exercise
HALF

PLAN,

and

pinion

Draw

(Fig. 185.)

92.

269

GEARING.

"

and

HALF

SECTIONAL

the

wheel

to

the

of

PLAN

have

60

HALF

and

ELEVATION,

the

wheel

spur-gear

pinion

15

teeth.

/=2.5.
Draw

all

involute

made

185

is the

Robert

"

Poole

the

Sons

for

elevation,

of

drawing

Sibley College

to

of

quadrant

one

of

use

spur-gear

Baltimore,

as

model

in

drafting-room.

have

Draw

circles

and

equal

model

worm

used

of the

be

wheel

axes

wheel

is to

Radial

flank

those

drawn

the

wheel

radius

of
at

have
the

wheel

and

and

be

found

this

problem.

involute

right angles

in

and

rack
to

if

of the

pitch

they

of

curves

Construct

50 teeth,

as

radial, the

R!

right

at

the

were

rolling
teeth

developed

respectively.

will

"

E'

the

at

developed

same

are

face

other,

D'

and

and

the

the

each

to

are

the

generate

with

to

draw

flanks

the

since
to

F'

drawn,

(Fig. 187.)

94.

the
like

drawn

The

the

2.10.

Draw

and
are

pinion

in connection

and

right angles

at

axes.

to

of this

Exercise

the

And

C'

and

teeth

the

in diameter

circles

use

p'

TION,
CROSS-SEC-

pinion.

other,

teeth,

24

other.

gears.

each

to

and

pitch circles, and

from

which

on

the

each

to

spur

pitch

of

distance

angles

are

pinion

lines

radii

proper

for

the

centre

the

circles

bevel-gear wheel

right angles

at

ELEVATION,

non-interchangeable.

system,

find

of

and

50

"

PLAN

be

to

are

Draw

(Fig. 186.)

93.

and

will

Fig

presented

Exercise

for

in

Messrs.

by

and

Md.,

teeth

system.

wheel

the

the

line

the

the
;

that

drafting-room

and

worm-wheel
worm-teeth

is, the

Ly when

line

to

face
L

be

edge
makes

270
the

DRA

angle

of

15"

WING

with

the

AND

DESIGNING.

horizontal

pitch

line

H,

as

shown

c~

by

the
The

the

to

worm,

the

itself is

wrought

longitudinal cross-section
teeth

of the

except

axis, and

usually
iron

or

wheel

that
the

made

are

grooves

material
of cast

malleable

in

cast

Fig. 187.

made

are

cut

by

in the

is hardened

iron, but
iron.

similar

cutter

threads

steel.
is sometimes

to

parallel

The

worm

made

of

the

cross-sectional

the

proportions

teeth

Exercise

horse-power

find

the

the

51

of

of the

cast-

revolutions

51",

of

pressure

.00873^^

pitch /

number

diameter

bisect

otherwise

a;

those

used

iron gear-

wheel

as

same

to

wheel

one

.00873

90,

teeth

can

pitch
the

the

on

25.5

9"0

other

then

.0447

circle

be

now

found

3.1416,

3.1416
-

minute

per

280.

wnole

(V=

circular

The

*~

the

Design

"

transmitted

find

First

the

at

as

187.

(Fig. 188.)

95.

pitch-circlediameter

the

be

may

FIG.

given

placed

rack.

and

for wheel

of the

so

wheel-tooth

the

of

area

be

should

pitch line

horizontal

The

271

GEARING.

TOOTHED

nearest

even

number.

by multiplying
and

dividing by

272

DRAWING

DESIGNING.

AND

FIG.

Let
of the

the

represent

pitch

line may

be

188.

of

number

expressed

teeth
as

; then

follows:

12

and

the

pressure

the

on

550

12

teeth

6o

is

H
-

pTN

6'

396000

pTN

the

velocity

274

Wheels.

of Gear

Arms

sections

shown

are

in

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

DRA

Figs. 189

used

for

191

shows

to

for

Fig.' 192

and

light

When

heavy

mostly

light wheels;

Fig.

that

is

monly
com-

wheels, that

spur

in

that

and

gears,

spur

gears.

.48^

cross-

is

section

for bevel

Fig. 189

arm

Fig. 189

another
in

of

shapes

192.

pulleys

used

in

usual

The

"

thickness

the

of
__

the

Unwin

teeth,

-^

gives

"

VbRy

Vn

measured

J"

Taper
the

rim.

the

radius

of

in

much

to

Unwin

to

tapered

to

necessary

gives
facilitate

on

the

of

the

the

of

each

number

the

teeth

at

the

toward

of arms;

|f

at

the

the

to

direction

give

.$p.

The

removal

of

at

of the

teeth

shaft

and

not

add

rim.

resistance

the

in

be

shown

as

of the

feathers

or

width

the
may

breadth

centre

wheeh

side

b=

wheel;

the

of

ribs

bending

arms.

12"

Fig. 193, or|- the

The

are

in

breadth

from

they

centre

cross-feathers, which

measured

force, but

the

the

the

at

lateral

do

of

the

of

the

the

driving

stiffness

feathers

to

arms

to

the

should

be

from

the

pattern

sand.
To

determine

give '"2 +
taken.

4-

the

The

number

nearest

of

arms

number

in

wheel,

divisible

by

Low

"

should

Bevis

be

TOOTHED

Unwin

diameter,

six

and

arms

eight

of

Rims

is

for wheels

used

commonly

from

The

to

in

the

on

The

rims

for

ft. in

ft. in diameter.
rim

sections

shown

section

in

are

Fig. 193

light wheels.

other

closely

agree

the

d=

subject:

.48/".

over

8 ft. in diameter,

to

usual

The

204.

not

16

8 to

following proportions

The

edge

of from

Wheels."

Gear

wheels

for

arms

for wheels

arms

Figs. 193

in

shown

four

gives

275

GEARING.

thickness

proportions

with

most

of the
are

rim

shown

thorities
au-

at

in

the
the

figures.
In

the

bevel

thickest

part of the

Figs.

the

FIG.

20

and

FIG.

and

bevel

fixed

either

round

iron

given

in the

wheels

by
pins

shown

in

be

\d.
of

examples

keys
shown

figuresagree

Figs. 198

mortise

as

shown

in

Fig.

closely with

in
202.

mortise

Fig.
The

to

gears

FIG.

198.

respectively; the

wood
as

should

rim
show

202

197.

spur

gears

for

199.

teeth
201,

200

or

are

by

proportions

good practice.

Shrouding.

extends

and

teeth

When

"

shrouded.

Figs. 203

pitch circle
of

pinion

pair

points

of

for the

prevents

be

can

the
weak

their

give

wheels
as

form

of the

failure

from

form

teeth

are

the

100

per

teeth

Fig.

excessive

Hubs

of

examples
shown
The

in

of

Wheels.

Gear
hubs

to

Figs. 189,
thickness

of

"

191,

and

metal

192,

in

at

the

In

the

extend

may
this

to

sates
compen-

wheels, and

wear.

201.

FIG.

203

Figs. 205,

correspond

cent.

small

FIG.

FIG.

than

204;

in very

be

to

shown

as

root

shrouding
in

said

of shrouded

circle

the

at

the

annular

an

examples

about

shown

teeth

to

pitch

thicker

no

than

is wider

as

two

the

strengthened

of gear

so

teeth, the

to

are

wheel

point

204

out

which

teeth

203,

the

and

By shrouding

teeth.

the

ends

of

rim

of the

the

Fig.

the

towards

ring uniting

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

to

the

206, and

207

examples

of

204.

give
arms

respectively.

surrounding

the

bore

of

gear

wheel

is

width

of the

given by
arm

should

keyway

Reuleaux

measured

at

the

be

reinforced

metal

for

the

over

In

sometimes

strengthened

both

the

of the

centre

of

length

the

wrought-iron

by

hub,

the

The

and

wheel

wheels

large

wheel).

the

if

keyway

duty.

heavy

.4" (when

.4/1+

full

the

cut

277

GEARING.

TOOTHED

the

is

tended
in-

the

hubs

are

rings

shrunk

on

the

ends;
metal

the

steel

with

the

and

the

width

of

"

in
the

ring

\w.

cooling;

from
these

hub

divided

referred

large

thickness

of

amount

to

initial
slots

is held

above.

teeth.

FIG.

206.

is sometimes

hub

give relief

to

strips,and

is

FIG.

wheels

bore,

arms

rings

205.

heavy

contraction

or

the

under

the

FIG.

In

is made

thickness

are

207.

of

metal

ing
surround-

slotted

across

between

strains
then

due

to

filled with

firmly together by

unequal
metal
the

iron

OF

THE

UNIVERSITY

IX.

CHAPTER

VALVES,

Valves.
fluid

through

which

divides
which

rise

which

those

have

The

and

of two

made

every

cast-iron

them.

between

to

The

lower

diameter, and

small

foot-valves

top of the valve-box.

strainer, A

shows

for

of

valve-face

when

from

most

common

having
is

used

are

the

vertical section

valve-seat, B

main

VB

to

hold

would

pump

being choked

and

with

foot-valves
and

leather

the

suction

9" suction-pipe.

is the

closed.

perforated

is called
the

is that

starting.

valve

box

(i) Flap-

"

(3)slide-valves,

boxes, called the valve-box

into the

foot-valve

seat

The

before

The

In

207

classes:

Foot-valves

"

time

piece.

Fig.

the

its seat

together by flanges,and

bolted

holes

Strainer.

solids.

other

or

flow

or
hinge ; (2) lift-valves,

seat.

with

protects the

strainer

stones

into three

with

open

in contact

charged

be

regulatingthe

long suction-pipes; otherwise

in

to

valves

parallelto

move

Foot-valve
water

for

device

perpendicularlyto

part of the valve

the

is

OIL-CUPS.

opening.

an

those

valves, or
those

valve

Unwin

Prof.

or

"

AND

COCKS,

is

strainer,

clack-valve
with

strainer

circular
or

snore-

generally screwed

three

is the

are

half

plans of

valve-box, 5 the

valve, and

an

auxiliary
278

VALVES,

AND

COCKS,

FIG.

207.

OIL-CUPS.

279

280

DRAWING

valve

on

break

clack.

Mr.

the

which
that

clack-box
the

hardly

shocks

Lincoln,

E.

of

15"
the

the

in

1887,

great

very

cussion
con-

alone, with

placed

was

the
the

on

perceptible.

was

in

5" supplementary

clack

ear

sound

England,

with

reducing
the

relief or

England,

clack

or

or

feature
in

even

of

is called

is

suction-pipe.

double-valve

This
from

the

to

entrance

of

hand

the

clack

M.

by using

tremor

of

main

purpose

when

even

of

15"

had

was

style

Inst.

used

for the

clack

DESIGNING.

Teague,

Henry

reported having

result

This

B.

before

read

paper

of

top

AND

almost

gives

large

and

pumps,

freedom

complete

therefore

works

very

quietly.
The

the
the

valve-box

half

and

in the

opening

an

the

that

of

opening

is fitted

with

the

It

an

one

has

with

at

The
the

bolt

X,

in

together
equal

the

main

is the

top and

an

the

to

of

area

This

referred

about

is

one

auxiliary
above.

to

together
with

valve

main

tween
joint be-

f-inch rivets,

with

valve-plate,held

sectional
be

the

opening.

lower

fastened

should

to

clack-valve

and

forms

two

elevation.

made

one

of the

tenth

of

diameter

respective valve-openings.

shown

in

and

"

Fig.

brass

also

Scale
Valve.

disk

D,

The

guard.

grating by

drawings

and

207,

strainer.

india-rubber

the

Make

96.

India-rubber

to

and

plan

laps L

Exercise

box

and

upper

the

screws

strainer.

centre

third

or

"" leather,

of

valve-plate, riveted

bottom

and

valve, made

main

3"
"

B.

and

elevation

strainer

of the

valve-

foot.
valve

(Fig.208)

grating

rubber

stud-bolt

foot-valve

outside

an

This

brass

of

guard
The

or

seat

and

s,

valve

purpose

consists
and
are

of

of

an

rated
perfo-

attached
the

guard

282

DRAWING

AND

FIG. 209.

DESIGNING.

is to

of the

flexure
such

40
The

square

thickness

of

should

f"

be

Exercise

of

97.

in

diameter

in

TV'.

Ibs. per
a

Fig.

complete drawing
Scale

the

conical

guard

Unit

=
.

of india

19

rubber

thickness

of the

india-rubber

thickness

of the

grating-lip

of the

depth

diameter

of

stud-body

diameter

of

stud

diameter

of

holding-down

depth

thickness

width

diameter

of

98.

Make

similar

to

Exercise
disk-valve

of

"

pumps
for

good

not

"

of the india-rubber
The

projection

good

in

Fig. 209.
Use

practice.

of unit.

=15.5
disk

1.6

"

1.75

"

2.75

"

2.75

valve.

of

and

is shown

disk

ceed
ex-

\/^

diameter

of

not

large valves

are

f Jillsize.

diameter

be

inch.

square

208.

for

valves

d=

should

does

cqndensers

following proportions represent

nearest

much

cause

grating

disk
in

"

India-rubber

perforations in

the

to

pressure

india-rubber

the

Make

"

shown

as

The
the

100

the

perforations

inch.

-J".

to

over

pressures

6"

over

The

of the

area

is closed

valve

the

high.

large enough

The

disk.

Ibs. per

i.e., valves

be

283

OIL-CUPS.

risingtoo

not

rubber

when

that

valve

should

grating

the

in

from

valve

the

prevent

AND

COCKS,

VALVES,

seat-body

bolt

1.75

="

1.25

grating

=2.50

of

.65

"

.75

"

grating-rib

seat-lip
guard

Fig.

208.

10".

"

12.00

complete drawing

of

an

Scale

india-rubber

9"

foot.

284

DRA

WING

AND

FIG.

DESIGNING.

210.

Lift-

or

and

Springs

rods

or

are

place them

to
a

45",

wings
is

is

valve

circular

disk

easily fitted

and

ground together.

these

To

at

Fig.

21

The

straight.

sary
neces-

the

valve

stroke

The

1.

amount

follows

as

each

of

usually a taper

it is

give

showr

as

bevelled

are

when

seating at

new

projected

has

valves

position.

shown

determined

be

may

ally
usu-

seat

provide

seat

are

are

and

close

be

valves

disk

horizontal

driven

sometimes

the

to

may

of the

outside

used

features

the

slightly,as

arbitrary,and

The

are

and

curved

are

and

in

partialrotation

essential

between

edges

of

angle

the

to

The

seat.

These

"

The

28$

OIL-CUPS.

(Fig. 210).

"Wing-valves
of brass.

made

AND

COCKS,

VALVES,

in

the

J"

in

of

the

the

curving

figure.
12", but
lift of

Let
of

area

diameter

in seat

opening
of

in seat;

opening

lift of valve.

Then
a

Taking

unit

Exercise

in

""

==

thickness

length

100.

Fig.

and

proportion

Scale
Make

"

valve

means

of

drawing
full

spindle

8 ;

as

at

small

in

shown

end.

Fig.

210

to

the

size.
of the

wing-valve as

curved

size.

Spindle-valves (Fig. 212)."

by

1.3 ;

wings

full

Scale

211.

V^~then

.2

(l)

.35^.

of seat

the

Draw

"

of disk

of

thickness

given.

Exercise

shown

of

99.

dimensions

.7854^'

and

These

valves

bridge ;

are

otherwise

guided
they

trally
cen-

are

286

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

FIG.

211,

VALVES,

COCKS,

FIG.

AND

212.

OIL-CUPS.

288

DRAWING

similar
The
a

the

to

the

flat seat

and

have

but

pumps,
Let

the

of pressure
the

crushing

The

valve

Ibs. ; and
Exercise

shown

in

lift of

the

ribs.

The

four

so

not

as

pressure

Make

per

Scale

212.

=
",

bevelled

narrow

These

"

small

and

valve-seat.

Gun-metal

To

lighten them

they

and

valve

much

are

as

used

fast-running pumps.

should

interfere

iron,

cast

Ibs.

spindle

valves

it is surrounded

ribs

phosphor-

Ibs. ;

2000

the

for

full size.

(Fig- 213).

usual

ference
dif-

; then

inch

square

of

drawings

the

The

the

on

india-rubber, 700

to

be

with

as

the

is the

should

be

cage

narrow

free
best

made

for

proportions

by

the

with

guide

three

safety will

as

flow

To

of the

material

in

or

mit,
per-

fluid above

for the

balls.

hollow.
ball-valves

are

given

below:

Unit

inside

distance

of

.2

V~d.

ball

diameter

thickness

c=

of

diameter

in

edges.

maximum

of the valve

and

ball

metal

the

leather

deep well-pumps

light duty

bevelled

gun-metal,

"

with

bearing-edges measured

inch

square

for

for

Ball-valves

the

made

Ibs. ;

101.

Fig.

sometimes

seat.

safe

is 3000

1000

in pumps.

valve, /

sides

two

per

and

greatest

bronze

the

on

pressure

of the

edges

of the

light work

used

the

over

of the

axis

also

and

the width

W(Fig.2 io)

perpendicularlyto

face

advantage

no

for

spindle-valveare

leather

used

but

wing-valve,

wing-valve and

DESIGNING.

AND

of

seat-casing

ball-guide

between

guides

I.34*/.

\.\2d.

.9 times
a

-f-iV'-

unit.

290

f=
g

DRAWING

AND

length of

seat-shank

3 times

thickness

of

1.2

DESIGNING.

seat-flange

h
k
=

lift of valve

work

Exercise

102.

Fig. 213.

valve-seat

Ty

of

and

this

of the

should

the

of

the

The

William

M.

those

to

Barr

i".

exceed

not

similar

"

valve
in

cast

hole

Fig.
for

shown

14 shows

cold

in

in the

valve-seat

The

spindle

india-rubber
This

spindle.
is screwed

nary
ordi-

an

water.

The

piece.

one

of the

diameter

valve.

lift.

i% full size.

style

polished,and

and

small

Disk-valves.

spindle are

larger than

action

Scale

1.2

drawings

example

turned

Make

"

India-rubber

Flat

with

best

lift of ball-valves

the

that

says

of ball-shell

thickness

valves

These

"

1.8

unit.

is
cftsl^

allows

into

is

free

place with

"
a

pitch

of

eight

for all sizes

up

threads
to

the

to

Springs give good

and

be

maintained

Mr.

M.

Barr

gives

for india-rubber

results

2\" valves;

No.

W.
valves

the

35.

TABLE

2"

may

4^''diameter.

dimensions
following"

for

inch, which

if made
10

wire

with
for

No.

3"

and

12

brass

wire

3^" valves,

VALVES,

CCCKS,

AND

OIL

CUPS.

29I

I
FIG.

214.

292

spring
will

be

may

give

full

Five

of the
six coils

to

elasticity.
Make

"

in

-valves.
The

hand.

drawings

Fig.

for the

the

to

214,

with

mixed
The

in

cold

for

used

Fig.

india-rubber

dimensions

flat-disk
Scale

given.

when

Exercise

104.

controlled
as

valve

of the

by

Make

"

also

and

such

is made
the

water

of

valve

leather

or

india-rubber

is

drawings

This

"

The

throttle-valve

plainly

so

of

shown

globe-valve

elevation.

right-end

hand.

is

in

Fig.

shown

in

unnecessary.

(Fig. 216).

Stop-valve

is used

hot

for

description seems

Fig. 215,

When

by

graphite.

construction

that

valve-face

closed

and

opened

are

14 is for steam.

the

water

and

valves

These

"

valve

india-rubber,

215

valve-disk.

the

of

diameter

outside

size.

Globe

is

103.

shown

as

that

.5

"

The

4J- valves.

and

suitable

Exercise

valve,

4"

8 for

No.

and

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

Scale

is another

particularvalve
by

the

Ball

as

style of
shown

size.

full

lift-valve

in the

Engine Co.,

who

figure

kindly

drawings.

sent

Let
/

thickness

pressure

d=

diameter
safe

/"
Take
use

and

2000

factor

about

2200

for
of

cast

casing;

in Ibs. per
of the

iron

and

sphere

17,500

which

in

of

inches;
material.

for

gives 2500

latter; then

4/

inch

square

bursting strength

safety 8,
for the

of

yellow brass,
for

the

and

former

VALVES,

OIL-

AND

COCKS,

rr

--//

Fro.

215.

CUPS.

293

294

DRAWING

AND

F-'H
FIG.

216.

DESIGNING.

valve-chest,

the

through

The
the

of

length
of the

length
Exercise

in

105.

216.

Fig.

Foster

Safety
106.
in

Cocks.

The

motion.
of
in

seat

In

Fig.

O is the

and

cock

outlet

bring

the

casing

the

cast

and

the

close

Fig. 218,

and

plan

the

to

clearance.

the

to

shown

as

of

root

or

rotation

the

of

Boiler-check

half

truncated

rotary

which

sists
con-

rotating

cone

pipe.

C the

conical

casing or

By rotating
line

in

casing.

In

the

with

this

the

seat.

plug
the

in

inlet

position

in either

plug opposite

the

direction

solid

parts of

valve.
of

drawings

the

to

the

views

sectional

end

view.

is shown
and

of
on

with

is that

cock

through 90"

in the

the

of

brought

are

in addition

wing-valve,opened

Foster

operate

plug.

pipe

Make

"

and

Fig. 219

equal

working drawings

the

of

and

plug,

openings

107.

In

shape

Further

Exercise

sectional

form

openings
of

is open.

will

in

in the

/*isthe

the

for

is

stop-valve

7 shows

style

common

opening through

direction

one

about

figure.

which

valves

are

same

218

made

Scale, full size.

made

of the

'2

drawing

217.

most

plug

Make

Cocks

"

pass

Boiler-check.

"

Fig.

J"

6""

in the

Fig.

"

must

valve-seat.

valve-stem

the

inlet

the

shown

as

Check-valve.

shown

of

of 6"

be

(i)

foot.

Boiler

Exercise
as

4."

should

of

drawings

diameter

thread, instead

the

Make

"

the

on

lift of valve

nut

seat

of the

diameter

by formula

its

and

opening

thread

the

Scale

the

Make

outside

the

"J" larger than

valve

the

so

determined

be

may
The

lift-valves.

winged

for

valve

the

lift of

The

OIL-CUPS.

AND

COCKS,

VALVES,

closed

blow-off

by

cock

piston

blow-offcock
given

make

shown
a

half

Scale, full size.

which
which

is
in turn

really

is op-

296

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

298

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

VALVES,

crated
on

by

means

its seat

by

of
the

compressed

the

piston is pushed

ing

the

the

discharge-pipeD.
Exercise

219.

of

contents

108.

"

air.

into

against

the

Make

boiler

the
the

to

The

in the

steam-pressure

air is introduced

OIL-CUPS.

AND

COCKS,

299

wing- valve
boiler.

is held

When

cylinder C through

pressed
com-

the

valve, opening it and

blow

through

complete drawings

as

the

shown

pipe

allow-

cock

in

into

Fig.

Scale, full size.

Oil-cups.
"

There

are

many

forms

of

oil-cups. Figs.

220

DRAWING

300

to

225

used

inclusive

material

is

220

is

the

locomotives

in the

Fig.

show

AND

brass, cast

is filled with

in

of

construction
of the

of

one

DESIGNING.

the

simplest
piece.

one

waste

Lehigh

and

oil.

some

of the

oil-cups

Valley Railway.
of

forms

charged, the

When

This

oil-cups.

cup

is used

The

voir
reser-

the

on

link-hanger.
Fig. 22
the

rocker-box

shows
and

another

simple

cross-head.

form

of

oil-cup,used

to

oil

VALVES,

Fig.
end;

222

is

Fig.

223
The

stem.

of the

drawing

cross-wires

prevent

shows
flow

AND

COCKS,

of the

oil-cup for

the' waste

from

form

of oil- cup

another

oil is

301

OIL-CUPS.

the

main

rod, front

being thrown

regulated by

used
the

out.

the

on

valve

spindle S,

and

TO BE BRAZED

the
of

duty

of the

brass
-jJj"

Fig.

224

spring

wire

is to

J" long

gives

form

hold

when
of

it in

position.

This

is made

unloaded.

oil-cup for

the

front

end

of

the

302

DRAWING

AND

FIG.

DESIGNING.

224.

VALVES,

COCKS,

AND

OIL-CUPS.

303

MILLE*

1BTSDS.

FIG.

225.

304

DRAWING

main

rod

flow

of

the

Fig.
of

the

oil

is

is

of

Exercise

225

in

the

It

form

of

this

when

Scale,

Make

it

of

desired

full

in

this

the

case

controlled.

the

on

regulated

drawings,

more

is

that

seen

guides.
by

the

The

flow

raising

or

the

hand.

by

"

or

be

used

cup
also

case

spindle

one

will

mechanically

also

is

109.

of

to

oil

225

lowering

220

cross-head.

on

DESIGNING.

AND

size.

the

to

as

directed

oil-cups
fill

unoccupied

the

by

illustrated

space

in

on

structor,
in-

Figs.
ing-paper.
.draw-

3o6
In

Fig. 226

valve, and

is

given

of the

also

and

the

the

valve
Outside

Lap,

to

simply lap

FIG.

the

valve

which

its central
but

shortens

the

Inside
the

overlaps the

position.

exhaust,

Lap,
bridge

the
the

the

the

is the

;i" +

F=

slide-

The

valve

steam-ports
under

side

of

of

2L.

darkened

is the

plane

cylinder.
Fare

and

portion

226.

when

steam-port

has

Lap

it hastens
time

of the

valve-face

The

length equal
or

position, X

exhaust-port.
with

of

longitudinalsection

valve-seat

in its central

is shown

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

no

effect

cut-off,

on

the

valve

is in

compression

prolongs expansion,

or

and

port is open.
smaller

between

expansion, hastens

darkened

portion

the

steam-

and

increases

and

/ which

laps
over-

exhaust-ports,prolongs
compression,

retards

ENGINE

the

does

but

exhaust,

30?

DETAILS.

affect

not

the

admission

or

twice

the

of

point

cut-off.
The

Travel

it

if the
the

Eccentric

"

the

of

sum

equal

is

travel

width

Lead

crank

with

the

crank

is at

The

have

increased

The

II,

90"
COE

therefore

of

eccentric.
twice

to

the

the

over-

ahead

the

90"

behind

the

angle DOFis

is therefore

valve

the

of the

the

of

degrees

illustrated

in

90"

ahead

the

angle

should
every

over

the

advance.
the

the

For

crank

short

of advance.

of

of
the

is

90"

behind

the

diagram

of the

crank,

the
case

behind

90"

over

90"

of the

of the

of

rocker, and

of

with

OD

eccentric.
the

in

CO

eccentric.

crank,

before, and

as

centre-line

angle

centre

number

short

centre-line

OF

speed

without

the

of

231,

eccentric

crank

is

case

the

OE

centre

(See Fig.

is the

eccentric

of

number

of

the

is increased

of it,and

angle

I.)

quickened.

of

angle

Plate

opened

increased

lead

of

when

engine

has

stroke.

be

it, and

the

the

AO

is the

centre-line

of the

Let

follows:

as

the

by

running,

centre-line

first

The

the
be

is

it is the

crank.

let AO

the

or

travel

(See Fig. 236,

the

when

centre-line

the

of

smooth

of Advance
the

rocker

Then

the

lap plus

of motion

beginning

valve

made

which

amount

lead, and

which

of

line

tance
dis-

direction;

equal

and

of admission.

point

obtain

of the

angle

centre-line

the

Angle

degrees
ahead

the

To

I.)

operation

the

at

Plate

is also

steam-port

is the

is the

Lead

steam-port

Plate

the

of

Angle

the

the

It

total

if any.

The

with

eccentricityof

Straps.")

and

in either

equal lengths, then

the

twice

to

to

position

of

are

equal

is

its central

rocker

of the

valve

valve

the

from

moves

arms

(See

of

and

is

rocker
a

line
Then

crank, and

308

DRAWING

Clearance

Inside
of

valve

the

shown

the

valve

exhaust,

hastens

cut-off

Overtravel

I.

It

the

piston

from

the

gives

the

and

later

side
in-

clearance
the

on

of

the

as

shown

in

Fig.

the

cut-off,

of

valve
232,

retards

release.

when

is the
This

either

between

space

the

the

is at

piston

the

utilizes
Plate

the

faces

of

beginning

return

obtain
to

point

is to

prevent

when

the

the

and

piston

brasses

the

on

motion.
on

when

reaches

piston

the

crank-circle

the

valve

for

the

of

the

power

which

cuts

remainder

off

the

of

the

(See Fig.

steam.

full

the

follows

steam

piston

has

yielding

the

its

completed

cushion

stop without

for the
shock

closing
stroke.

of

the

haust
ex-

This

is

reciprocatingparts

before

beginning

cut-off

and

the

stroke.

Expansion
the

the

expansive

of

the

before

come

lost

cause

the

I.)

Compression

to

between

clearance

cylinder, and

the

from

is

crank

the

of

steam

done

and

wear

distance

cylinder-head

of Cut-off

centre

stroke

to

as

the

effect

no

edge

steam

port,

is all that

valve

Clearance

Point

to

the

distance

sharpness

connecting-rod

233,

centre;

Inside

has

but

increases

striking

live

the

instead

between

bridge.

the

cylinder-head.

the

on

lap,

stroke.

Piston
the

when

clearance

the

and

Cylinder Clearance

of the

bridge

fully opening

and

compression,

the

the

delays compression,

is

after

Plate

inside

admission.

or

travels

of

opposite

it shows

Fig. 226,

of

edge

the

is

overlapping

/ in

at

DESIGNING.

AND

point

begins
of

at

exhaust.

the

point

of

(See Figs.

233

to

235

continues
in

Plate

DETAILS.

ENGINE

period

During

this

outside

lap plus

popular

most

valve.

valve.

the

into

are

pressure-plateP

when

four

on

that

part of

pncking-strips.

the

and

top

hold

when

to

there
to

the

sides

preventing
of

the

used

stripsagainst the pressure-plateand

acting

is

of

means

on

is admitted

steam-tight joint

is

of

one

used

on

Fig. 227

construction

grooves

the

and

the

by

chest, but

forming

This

engines.

in

the

steam

the

to

of

four

rect-

227.

fitted

Semi-elliptic springs

stripsagainst

used

parts

1*1G

angular packing-strips

marine

large

is effected

balance

The

equal

"

slide-valves

and

different'

the

clearly shows
this

Balance-valve

combination

stationary

locomotives,

distance

lap.

Allen-Richardson

The
the

inside

the

travels

valve

the

309

the

valve

top of the

the
is

no

packing-

chest
of the
the

it forces
grooves,

steam

enclosed

in

steam

from

by

the

Exercise
also

no.

Allen

The
shown

at

additional

of

sides

of

objections

it

to

valve

this
are

M.

March,

American

The

Balance

applied

is

to

from

pressure
formed

by

given

the

with

two

or

their

The

Manager

side

bored

diameter
the

the

M.

M.
"

by

placing

of

The

The

cone.

where

of

The

American

cones

in diameter

steam-chest

was

Balance

forced
in

cover

furnished
Slide-valve

by

is

place,

is

Mr.
Co.

down

either

require.
First, the

either
are

with

their

than

being

joint

are

balance is:

corresponding degree

description

in

rings,which

the

live-steam

circumstances

the

snap-

that, by their
of the

or

and

This

necessity requires, are

valve.
a

valve

when

of

consists

excluding

cone

it, as

to

American

It

(See Fig. 228.)

bolted

smaller

so

above

or

to

thus

cover,

construction

cones,

inner

are

cone,

valves

with

cast

or

by

The

Date

to

The

"

the

snap-ring which,

over

mechanical

The

on

lowing
fol-

1899;

up

between

formed

area.

bevelled

slightlyexpanded

to

the

the

Railway

slide-valve.

of

type

any

steam-chest

side of the

under

cone

Am.

The

and
of

May

20,

Slide-valve.

Balance

steam-tight joint being

cast

cut-offs.

slide-valve

Locomotive

"

time,

same

proceedings

1897;

in the

the

short

vol.

in

McShane.

Chas.

E.,

and

1896;

Association,

S.

Club,

Railway

Western

in

A.

societies:

the

discussed

this

steam-port

at

plain

port

of

means

same

with

the

over

By

valve

the

thereby increasing the steam-supply

advantages

supplementary

the

to

and

Fig. 227,

foot.

is the

is admitted

both

from

in

exhaust-arch.

the

steam

port

8"

of this valve

above

just

shown

as

Scale

top.

feature

cylinder

the

drawings

of the

plan

half

Make

"

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

3IO

bolted

bevelled

that

of the
ing
work-

required
on

the

position, the
J. T. Wilson,

cone

rings
Generai

ENGINE

themselves
their

under

are

tension

elasticitywhen

own

admitted

the

to

not

steam-chest

of the

circumference

DETAILS.

decrease

its diameter,

taper of

the

and

of the

the
at

be

moves

as

that

noted

part
the

drift,

is shut
as

in

of

cone

tendency

the

off from

the

the

to

close

its bevelled
to

acts

of this
the

wear

valve

or

pressure

on

face

lift it.

entire
it

and

By

or

the

careful

228.

all lateral
the

by

when

steam

pressure

on

engine

locomotives, the valve

being

ring, now
face

of the

and

itself.

It will

to

held

the

the

is free

to

be

ing
its work-

assume

engine
leave

ring

also

When

its circumference.
and

by

it will

cone,

is avoided,

ring is absolutely compelled

position by
steam

operation

that

seen

to

tightly against

steam-pressure
once

has

also

steam

FIG.

consideration

supported

The

steam.

exerts

owing

thus

are

under

ring, which

the

cone

and

allowed

its seat

to

until

DRAWING

312

the

cone

and
from
with

the

other

formed.

being

by allowing
The

the

the

of

The

cylinders are

bevelled

lift

to

feature

\"

FIG.

porting when
when

pressure
wear,

the

under

not

under

positive action
steam-joint.

rings of respective size"

Owing
be

rings can
of

balance

affected

the

to

by

can

back

be

at

ring self-sup-

supported by

automatic

it

of
any

secured
or

the

the

possible

the

for

adjustment
and

steam-

self-maintaining

also

to

duplicate

the

repairs.

absence

duplicated

is

vacuum

off its seat.

all conditions,

in

perfectlyrelieved

therefore

and

steam,

It renders

forcing

229.

steam,

under

fect
per-

communication

which

ring renders

the

in

is

piston

direct

cylinder, in

the

end

valve

the

also

affords

This

cover.

which

air

cylinder,and

of the

end

the

of

relief

ample

one

with

in contact

comes

DESIGNING.

AND

upward

by

lateral
future
this

wear

time.

on

the

The

design,

because

The

valve

pressure.

cones

new

greatest

area

it
in

is least

order

to

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

FIG.

231.

ENGINE

In

I let AB

Plate

the

to

the

crank

lay

off the

also

and
Crank
will

of

angle EOB,
the

arc

the

arc

the

of

points

with

follow

us

the

distance

relations
the

left-hand

valve

When

the

the

valve

equal

forward

travel, as

to

port X

mfy

the

actual

As

the

crank

when

the

central
to

to

steam,
When

crank

have

the

the

This

shown

in

lap,

outside

lap.

b, k, and

d
mission
ad-

equal

the

to

is at

the

tion
posi-

lead.

These

the

distance

gives

the

to

its central

open

position, and
steam

at

amount

an

beginning

is connected

Fig.

of the

leaves

Z*

at

position

of its
the

directly to

is
is

the

at

Of,

valve

distance

the

maximum

being

of

valve

as

shown

is

in

its

ing
open-

Om.

to

the

overtravel

begins

Port

ab.

the

and

to

position

position of

The

to

accomplished

perpendicular

extreme

steam-port

lap

L*

its central

232.

equal

the

the

to

from

is the

is

steam

width

crank

from

231.

piston

travelled

EO.

cut-off

inside

a,

is

its central

eccentric

position is equal
and

de

lap plus

is shown

revolution, beginning

moved

Fig.

reaches

is

At

rocker.

to

at

figure.

one

from

the

the

will

the

to

position

the

to

in

when

crank

distance

of the

has

steam-port

valve, i.e., without

OE

valve

travelled

stroke, and

forward

this

In

equal

has

lead

the

to

through

clearlyshown

are

which
the

Ee

the

arcs

in the

indicated

A.

the

these

to

advance.

to

of

From

arrow.

of

equal

centre-line

cut-off, compression, release, and

crank

dead-point
lead, and

outside

equal

the

the

equal

radius

tangent

the

angle

radius

ameter
circle,equal in di-

LI

of

the

to

with

afd

respectively,as
Let

direction

with

bgk

valve

valve, and

equal

positions drawn
give

the

the

in

rotating

describe

the

represent

travel

31$

DETAILS.

return,

and

from

now

Fig.

its

closed
233.

right-hand steam-port

is

DRAWING

closed

Fig.

under

crank

the

opening

port

Z,1.

to

the

and

at

^Y, Fig. 235,

crank

valve

is

the

the

the

crank

valve
to

has

that

shown

as

shown

in

Fig.

F,

at

valve

shown

to

in

steam

the

from

Fig
to

lead

position Fig.
in the

l\ Fig. 238,

the

moved

was

236,

port

the

F,

valve

de, equal

231.

travel

which

crank

of

point

piston begins,

equal

At

at

as

the

on

steam

admitting

Fig.

and

232.

F, and

port

the

of the

its maximum

in

of

is

the

find,

we

amount

an

at

position

attained

from

steam

port

valve

time

point
stroke

shown

opening

At

the

backward

having opened

the

position L

on

the

release

to

during

At

L]

reaches

compression

that

to

begins

compression

234.

When

and

exhaust,

to

DESIGNING.

AND

new

forward

opposite
the

valve

stroke

237

the

direction
cuts

off

begins.

/3

FIG.

Exercise

112.

239.

(Fig. 239.)

"

Given.

Travel

Angle

Required
=

of advance.

5"'.

Outside

30".

Inside

Cut-off

8o# of stroke.

Outside

Compression

Width

of steam-port

90$
i

of stroke.

J''.

Inside

lap.

lap.
lead.
lead.

Maximum
Overtravel.

port

opening.

ENGINE

Draw

travel

the
and

from

perpendicular to

at

is the

the

describe

of

point

point

k.

At

circle.

Ea

Then

is

hf

the

point

From

the

erect

through

OU

Through
and

A2

the

valve

Eb

circle
the

radius

as

bgk

to

describe
inside

lead, (9/the maximum

90$ of

tangent

port opening

radius

position at

and

at

the

lap, de

port-opening,

arc

the
and

overtravel.

Exercise

113.

(Fig. 240.)

"

Given.

Required.

Cut-off

80$ of stroke.

Travel

\"

Lap

"

Lead

to

angles.
line

lead

ed.

Draw

equal

OL*t the

parallelto

lap plus

AB

line
the

valve.

of advance.

J".

scale

Draw

of the

Angle

Draw

the

and

the

crank

centre

Draw

stroke,

cut

to

the

of cut-off.

lay off

scale

equal

OL3

centre

is the
as

EOB

Draw

required lap, Eb

the

inside

lead, ke the

lap

radius

in /'.

half

to

the

to

24",

of

With

OL*, which

inside

with

the

afd.

With

2\"

represent

stroke

Ea.

compression.
the

describe

AB

scribe
De-

equal

angle

perpendicular to

b draw

Through

b.

h.

erect

radius

the

circle

draw

circle

lap

stroke, and

of

position at
OL*

off

Let

valve

another.

one

"

lay

80$

the

crank

the

30".

cut

Ea

off Al

lay

perpendicular to
this

to

eccentric

the

From

of advance

angle

with

ACB

arc

eccentricityof

or

full size.

of twice

right angles

at

valve-circle

the
the

CO

and

AB

317

DETAILS.

lead

to

position
at

3 4

twice

full size AB
of

distance

parallelto

above

crank

it.

AB

With

CO

it

radius

Draw

equal

distance

right

at

cut-off.

at

above
at

and

to

the

equal

equal

to

to

the

given lap
lap

circle

and

d.

Then

find

by

trial

centre

afd tangent

through

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

on

OD,

to

with

the

line

and

centre

line

3 4,
2

describe

and
the

at

the

draw

the

points

circle

valve

ACB.
AB

is the

travel

of

the

valve, and

EOB

the

angle of

vance.
ad-

FIG.

Exercise

114

"

241.

(Fig. 241.)
Given.

Cut-off
Admission
Maximum

port-opening

Required.

8o#

of the

stroke.

Travel

90$

of the

stroke.

Lead.

Of (Fig. 240). Angle

Lap.

of the

valve,

of Advance.

DETAILS.

ENGINE

and

AB

Draw

crank

the

of

CO

point

crank

position at cut-off, and

given

maximum

the

line

Through
is the

The

Draw

line.

draw

fa parallel
of

centre

and

Then

AB

lap

draw
is the

angle of advance,

the

to

circle.
the

115

Bisect

the

travel

of

and

the

de

OL*,

the

Lead

valve, Ea

and

AB
a

radius

the
3 4,

centre

and

line

valve

AB.

to

the

Draw

the

to

of

2.

stroke.

Angle

BOE

lap,

right angles.

at

the
it.

lead-line
With

that

Through

centre

maximum

circle

of advance.

Lap.

Of (Fig. 240). Travel

CO

and

parallel to

the

242.

I".

port-opening

equal

mf.

lead.

of the

80^

position OL\

fm.

Required.

AB

this

on

(Fig. 242.)

"

Cut-off

Draw

with

fn

describe

Given.

Maximum

LOL*
be

the

to

parallel to

right angles

at

OL't the

make

aE

tion
posi-

equal

angle

and

and

nm,

line Ee

radius

lap-circlewill

Through

FIG.

Exercise

to

the

Draw

/with

the

of

centre

OL,

admission.

arc

/;;/ perpendicular

ACB,

circle

of

port-opening.

OE.

Draw

right angles.

at

the

at

319

at

Locate
a

be

Jrawn

this centre

the

distance

describe

port-opening.
can

of valve.

arc

Find

tangent
draw

OE.

to

crank

de

from

3 4

with

by

trial

OL*,

arc

DRAWING

320
BOE

Then

OE

is the

equal

is

the

to

stroke

the

From
OE

of

travel

valve

the

equal
At

From

eccentricityand
found

the

on

around

the

the

has

of

lap

abc

arc

because
a

distance

the

the

the

the
no

gfh

position

centre-line

of

from

will

OE

will

always

its central

rotated
its

arrow,

the

be

be

eter;
diam-

be

the

to

given

as

crank

opposite
O

for

distance

position

after

given angle.

any

crank
OB

and

valve

and
as

the

an

same

circle

imaginary
results

let them
crank

will

be

in
tained
ob-

way.

the

valve

will then

will have
to

the

imaginary crank, through

valve

valve

is fixed

having

with

from

line

arrow,

intersects

equal

OB

rotating the

simpler

the

position of

half

and

true

the

point

circle

direction

through

the

the

together

line

point

of the

rotate

much

OL,

Draw
the

of

direction

the

and

AO,

the

travelled

moved

and

in

in

has

instead

on

when

abc

arcs

stroke

of advance,

circle

the

valve

fixed

remain
the

with

crank
But

valve

centre

the

which

with

circumference

intersection

to

eccentric

the

forward

position of

angle

if the

and

the

the

equal

and

laps respectively.

inside

of

of

path

of advance,

circle

draw

the

OE.

the

since

valve

coincide

with

eccentric
Now

and

would

crank

of the

the

angle

sent
repre-

crank.

of the

the

to

centre

beginning

the

circle ACBD

the

eccentricity of

or

outside

the

to

equal

twice

II let AB

Plate

In

"

centre-line

describe

is used.

rocker

the

off OE

lay

diameter

as

piston,

the

and

lap, and

valve.

Diagram

the

the

Ea

of advance,

of the

travel

of

crank-pin,

the

angle

Valve

Zeuner

The

DESIGNING.

AND

be

circle at
at

the

travelle4 from

Oc, equal

to

the

lap.

the

the

point

point

point

c.

where
The

of admission,

its central

position

322

ERA

This
In

is

edge

/ of

port

the

the

valve

the

OB

When
then

The

shaded

and

ke the
Fis

fj,
The
until

to

to

Fig. 246.

is

before
At

the

valve

in

crank

and

crank

reaches

position

the

when

of the

to
new

Z8 it will be

the

tion
por-

close

to

port X,

Fig.

port X
The

is about

port

distance
to

open

continues

it

point

forward

of

to
tinues
con-

begins

L?.

Now

angle

L?OL.

reaches
the

OE

247.

position L\ when
crank

and

to

and

seen

the

shaded

travelled

through

the

time

port is fully open

the

continues

returned

beginning

the

steam-port,

same

in

has

Fig. 248.

position L1

fully closed

has

the

travel.

right angles

at

shown

valve

position, and

shown
the

at

the

its

port is fully closed

position L4

position, as

position U

until the

the

begins

in

is in the

valve

(Fig. 245).

shown

as

close, and

by

place, as
crank

the

at

shown

the

have

lead, and

of

and

at

the

position

overtravel

and

will

the

of

valve

its central

OE

Z8 the

compression begins
At

exhaust

the

position

pq,

opening

as

OB

to

the

stroke.

244.

at

crank

until

full

to

Fig.

\.Q

arrives

its central

so

the

is in its middle

the

extreme

steam

steam

valve

equal

the

the

from

the

crank

the

exhaust,

open,

the

returns

now

the

takes

from

reached

travelling

forward

Oc

to

equal

amount

and

position

amount

exhaust,

is the

JF

and

the

overtravel,

to

the

of

equal

an

is

admitting

dead-centre,

an

of

of

reaches

attained

amount

when

At

point

has

fully open

valve

the

part bk shows

When

Og

crank

valve

cut-off

the

the
have

will

port

exhaust

valve

imaginary crank,

steam

to

The

243.

beginning

being

to

Fig

distance

port X

port

on

DESIGNING.

the

crank

travelled

the

to

the

before

position and,

opened

is

imaginary

have

will

in

opposite

just

When

AND

clearly shown

direction

WING

admission

little

stroke.
from

Fig. 250

that

the

DETAILS.

ENGINE

fullyopen

Fis

port

in

shown

stroke

backward

for the

travel

the

reached

has

valve

the

that

and

port X

the

steam,

to

323

the

exhaust,

to

position

extreme

just

"

fullyopen

opposite

of

of the

its

tion
posi-

Fig. 245.
C

$0%

Stroke
r

-90%Stroke
FIG.

116

Exercise
as

in Ex.

stroke

of the

as

diameter,
the

of the

equal
radius

the

as

to

the

Ok

width

describe

scale

equal

half

to

the

the
erect

g,

OL9

From

OL*
the

arc

of the

steam-port,

the

3^4.

arc

and

B2

L*.

intersects

gfh.

the

angle

or

equal

Ok

J",

scribe
de-

8o#

to

crank-pin
cut-off.

at

equal

From
with

to

90$

OL', and

Draw
the

of

On

circle, with

valve

lay off
to

of

crank

the

the

cuts

path

the

cut

to

of

the

valve,

off Bl

lay

perpendicular

where

describe

of the

to

the

to

at

equal

full size.

twice

travel

position

abc.

the

equal

to

From

where
arc

OE

perpendicular

OL*,
a,

the

Oakc.
a

point

centre

angle

erect

point

stroke, and

through
with

Draw

the

scale

CO

and

AB

represent

off

conditions

same

Draw

convenient

any

let ACB

lay

circle

describe

centre

of the

equal

valve

V '.

Through
as

stroke, and

in

arc

to

piston, and

30", with

the

Bilgram diagram.
AB

From

crank-pin.
advance

the

Make

right angles.

Assume

(Fig. 252).

"

for

1 12

252.

valve

circle,

off

lay

centre

bk

and

324

DRAWING

Then

Oa

is the

lead, 5^ the

opening,

AND

required lap, Og

inside

and

KE

DESIGNING.

exhaust

or

the

the

lead, OE

inside

the

lap,

de

maximum

the

port-

overtravel.
C

O
FIG.

Exercise
as

Draw

AB

position

Bisect

intersect

Then
is the

CO

lap, scale
Oa

the

angle

Exercise

the

of the

the

points
to

half

118.

Point

of admission

Lead

On

OB,
Oh

OE
and

AB

and

and

OL\

assume

radius

equal

point

/where

valve

circle which

the

the

to

bisectors
may

now

valve, and

COE

aOe.
the

travel

of the

Required.

80$

of stroke.

Travel

90$

of stroke.

Lap.

J".

CO

at

right angles,

Bisect

any

point

the

arc

he.

of valve.

Angle

the
as

gh perpendicular to

describe

(Fig- 254.)

"

of cut-off.

OL

crank

of advance.

Point

tions

the

with

off de

Given.

Draw

OL3,

abc

arc

Lay

before.

as

centre

equal

is

describe

Oc, and

and

through
OE

conditions

same

Draw

right angles.

at

From

cut-off.

will be

drawn

the

113.
and

the

to

lead.

be

at

Assume

(Fig. 253.)

"

in Ex.

given

equal

117.

253.

angle

g,
OL.

and

Draw

LOL*

draw
With

of advance.
the

with

crank
the

posi-

line

OE.

gf perpendicular
center

and

to

radius

ENGINE

Now

the

angles gOB

the

325

gOL

and

cut-off; therefore

and

admission

DETAILS.

lead

the

for

constant

are

will vary

given

directlyas

eccentricity.

Let

be

Og

assumed

an

lead, and

the

eccentricity,then

ef

lead

the

given

"/"as the required eccentricity is

is to

the

to

will

be

its

responding
cor-

lead

assumed

assumed

eccentricity

os.
Lay
Draw

off Ol

With
O

the

circle

Then

Exercise
Ex.

On

equal

ef.

to

2g.

Oe

to

abc.

arc

is the
half
119.

AB

crank

given

the

minus
OE

the

lead

given

and

centre

describe

diameter

as

of

required angle
travel

of the

(Fig. 255.)

"

CE

and

position

OE

advance,

valve, and

Assume

with

the

right angles

at
at

draw

line

to

cut-off, Oa, the

port-owning.

maximum

bg. Through
dee

equal

O2

and

the

the

Oa

the

the

centricity
ec-

lap.

conditions

as

in

115.

Draw
the

given lead,

Oaec.

COE
or

the

to

parallelto

radius

describe

valve

IE

and

2g,

equal

ad

at

Oc, and

At

each

b erect

it to

the

OL\
intersect

OL\

Draw

given lead,

right angles to
produce

other.

and

Ob,

the

perpendicular

Bisect

y%- at

the

angle

g.

Join

326
ag,

DRAWING

and

describe

radius

arc//",cutting

parallelto kct cutting O^g

to

With

Ob.

cf parallel to

draw

DESIGNING.

AND

in k.

ag

in the

and

centre

as

Join ck,

and

Draw

point "?,.

cf

draw

as

O^e parallel

O,A.

Frame

Engine
engines

are

frames,

and

owing
also

Figs. 256
type.

of cast

made
the

to

complicated

because

it

258 show

to

It is that

used

This

iron.

gives

an

the

by

the

engine

is the

able
suit-

most

in most

found

sections

frame

horizontal

for

rigidity.

necessary

Buckeye

the

lap.

Frames

"

half

O^a

advance,

Ote the

Bed-plate.

or

usually

material

valve, and

of the

required travel

of

required angle

is the

Ock

Then

of the

Engine

"

Co.

"

Tangye
of

Salem,

Mass.
Exercise

258.

Scale

120.

\%'

Make

"

"

drawings

foot.

as

shown

in

Figs. 256

to

ENGINE

DETAILS.

327

328

Cylinder.
of

tough, close-grained

almost

cylinders are

Steam-engine

"

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

iron

cast

hard

as

always
be

can

as

made

safely

worked.

of Cylinder, D.

Diameter
Let

the

effective

mean

inch

square
L

length

=.

area

PL
Then

M.

of stroke

of

piston

E.

in

pounds

per

P. ;

feet ;

in

in square

of strokes

number

of steam

pressure

inches;
minute.

per

I.H.P.

indicated

or

horse-power,

and

33000
I.H.P.

33000
j

PLN
The

effective

mean

the

absolute

initial

boiler
of

ratio

and

expansion

_j_ hyp.

P=

Thickness

P,

Ibs. ;

length

travelled

steam,

i.e., the

7$ for loss between

"

by

in inches

of stroke

piston

in

inches

-=-

before

off.

is cut

steam

Let

the

cylinder.

distance

Then

from

found

of

pressure

-j-15

gauge-pressure

be

may

formula:

following
Let/

pressure

log.

back-pressure.

--

of Cylinder,

t.

boiler-pressure

of

steam

per

square

inch

in

pounds;
D

"

Whitham
or

diameter
"

vertical

of

cylinder
the

recommends

cylinders

of

in inches.

following

large

or

small

formula
diameter

for

izontal
hor-

where

33"
The
the

than

The

the

of

less

cylinder.
is

length

the

types

area

follows

as

of the

usually i"

is

locomotives

in

ports

diameter

other

In

of

length

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

o.8Z".

generally made
given by

is

steam-port

authorities

many

AV
a

"

where

A
v

of the

area

velocity of

"

minute
V '=

Figs. 259

262

to

shows

this
of
the

frame

30"

shown
;

of the

264

in

in

122

Make

"

section

1000

90

Number

Buckeye

tal
horizon-

Engine
the

through

the

Co.
of

centre

the

through

showing

heads

position

and
the

on

Fig. 261,

exhaust-

opening

for

suitable

for

covers

engine-frame

is bolted

to

the

the

end

end

of

261.

(Scalei^"

Figs. 259

of

plan.

of

drawings

Make

"

steam-pressure
stroke.

Fig.

the

by

view

the

in

262.

to

in

feet per

(from

minute

per

working drawings

made

are

When

121.

Exercise

that

262

Fig.

shown

Figs. 259

feet

in

cross-section

cylinder, shown

Exercise
in

the

back-end

and

cylinder.

the

show

260

261

valve-rod, and

Figs. 263

piston

longitudinal

Fig.

passage,

of

cylinder

cylinder,Fig.

the

6000

of steam-port.

steam-engine
Fig. 259

port

1200);

area

the

through

steam

inches

in square

velocity
to

piston

the
to

262

design

of

square

of strokes

as

shown

foot.}
cylinder

develop

to

Ibs. per

steam-cylinder

per

I.H.P.

100

inch
minute

similar

cut-off
220.

to

Stroke
at

50$

ENGINE

DETAILS.

331

332

DRAWING

Exercise
in

Figs. 263
Pistons.

which

fluid

by

and

264.

(Scale i\"

piston

that

is

fro inside

and

to

of

part
hollow

section

and

fluid

valves

which

made

are

engine

an

cylinder

acting against

or

shown

foot.)

cylinder heads

of

or

pump

either

driven

they

pressure

brass, wrought

are

iron,

steel.

or

with

piston

side

one

drawings

circular

iron,

cast

"Make

pressure

usually of

of the

123.

"

slides

DESIGNING.

AND

the

to

is called

other

the

permit
a

bucket

fluid

and

to

from

pass

is used

in

pump

cylinders.
A
of the

called

cylinder, is

Steam-pistons.
as

the

single-actingpiston, guided by

to

the

prevent

piston

the

to

The

"

plunger

and

steam-piston
from

steam

is also

used

should

be

from

passing

in

pumps.

designed
side

one

of

so

the

other.

spring packing-ringsshould
than

more

stuffing-box instead

should

piston

for

is necessary
be

not

the

inder
cyl-

steam-tightness.
than

heavier

no

against

press

is

for

necessary

strength.
The

weight
the

prevent
The

above

be

be
of the

wear

firmly connected

designs

have

distributed

been

so

to

as

cylinder.
the

to

piston-rod.

adopted

to

the

secure

requirements.

Foundry

are

should

piston
internal

must

different

Fig. 265

is

plain

Machine

-"

being

core

the

excessive

piston

Many

of

removed

afterwards

by

which

when

necessary.

are

used
The

used

piston,

Company.

plugged

bolts

box

It is cast

three

holes, shown

up.

The

in

the

packing

consists

the
one

in the

small

two

remove

to

by

piston

holes
from

of two

Southwark

piece;

the

front, which
are

the

cast-iron

for eye-

cylinder
spring

ENGINE

rings

cut

place

into

by

Exercise

(Scale 6"
Fig.
the

method

Make

333

The

figure.

ends

riveted

drawings

rod

over.

shown

as

is forced

in

Fig. 265.

foot.)

266.

This

Engine
of

in the
the

and

pressure

124."

Ball

in detail

shown

as

DETAILS.

is another

style of
The

Company.
the

securing

box

pattern,

of

packing

style

piston-rod

used
and

plainly shown

are

by
the

in

the

Fig. 266,

and

figure.

FIG.

Exercise

125.

Fig. 267

held

by

126.

Exercise

for

Fig.

267

Take

dimensions

Fig. 268,
Empire
shown

State
in the

an

of

which

over

"

Make

from
cast-iron

figure.

the

through

spider, S,
The

the

end

drawings

engine

Express

in

built-up piston

spring-rings.

nut

shown

as

section

end

common

It consists

cast-iron

and

drawings

266.

of the

centre

foot.)

shows

locomotives.
two

half

(Scale6''

piston.

and

Make

"

make

in addition

FIG.

265.

Table
box

whose

36.
piston

locomotive.

of the
a

rod

(Scale 6"

Its

into

place

is riveted.
like

built-up piston

cylinder

used

largely in

ring, a follower, F9
is forced

rod

of

used

is
=

in the

18''

24''.

foot.)

cylinder of

construction

is

the

plainly

334
Exercise

268.

127.

(Scale6"
Fig. 269

is

Make

"

steel

box

FIG.

TABLE

15

3f

if

16

18

2}

19

20
22

J|

of the

drawings

piston shown

in

Fig.

foot.)

cast-

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

2
8

2"
3

pattern

cast

in

two

parts and

267.
36.

if
if

It

ENGINE

DETAILS.

FK;

2.x;.

335

336

DRAWING

L_

AND

DESIGNING.

338

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

ENGINE

the

means

at

will.

sheet

follower

The

packing
is made

packing

339
be

may
of

adjusted

layers

of

renewed

or

cloth

cotton

and

rubber.

Exercise
fn

and

DETAILS.

131

Make

"

of

drawings

water-piston

shown

as

(Scale full size.)

Fig. 272.

"In

Connecting-rods.

the

connects

other

and

steam

crank

rotating

the

engines

with

the

necting-rod
con-

ing
reciprocat-

cross-head.
There

are

methods

Figs.

for

employed

are

show

276

to

273

styles

many

connecting-rods,

taking

good

and

locomotive,

of

the

up

of rods

examples

marine

of

wear

of

engines

and

various

the

brasses.

used

the

in stationary,
modern

most

types.

their

"

by
head
the

"

Tangye

brasses

of

means

the

Fig.

has

274

the

The

take

to

Iron

City

Erie

up

Buckeye

The

crank

and

The

Co.

Engine
end

adjustment

block

end.

solid, the

is

for

is had

wear

The

screws.

for

cross-

strap is firmly bound

cotter-key

and

gib,

which

also

to
trols
con-

wear.

ends

straps and

The

strap-bolts.

employed

strap

the

and

steel

for

adjustment

between
the

with

rod

of the

babbitt,

strap

by

engine.

tapered

is called

end
end

with

used

of

type

lined

are

r"d

is tne

Fig- 273

front
the

construction
the

wear

Works

are

use

back.

and
rod

to

of this

Keys

prevent
rod

and

plainly shown
this

rod

on

the

shear

the
in the

their

serted
in-

are

of

method

figure.

stationary

engines.
Exercise

(Scale 6"

Exercise

132
i

"

Make

the

drawings

as

shown

in

Fig. 273.

as

shown

in

Fig.

foot.)
133

"

Make

the

drawings

274,

340

DRAWING

AND

DESIGNING.

ENGINE

DETAILS.

341

342

DRAWING

half

that

except

(Scale6"

on

of this

rod

end

A.

Vogt,

S.

the
As

key

is

improved

the

end

of

the

that

reason

whereas

the
in

of

centre

first,by
on

by

the

an

prevent

the

locking
the

the

key B,

It is

quite

bottom
a

recess

nut.

the

The

is also

evident

that

up

changes

but

ends
the

to

the

of

in

this rod

is marked

lower

against
key

to

nut

is

much

marked

B\

and

the

last

ing
clamp-

block

drive

against.

and

To

keeper-block

is provided

of the

This

fits and

keeper-block
by

is

is closed,

this bolt

C;

member

blocked
there

which

marked

the

in

was

increased

which

C,

tion,
direc-

same

crosshead-pin

course

key

nut

that

little,for

keying

of

for the

and

distance

fork

fork

other
an-

the

of the

bolt

end

meet

is in the

rod

moved

has

very

detail

same

which

front

of

the

been

both

matter

which

into

has

closed

the

ent,
entirely differ-

in

centre

and

of the

is

brasses

of

of the

up

fork

the

surface

slacking

the

with

made

enclosed

plains
ex-

forked, but

brasses

are

is

which

both

to

of

Mr.

He

rear,

of

as

key

members

two

forming

at

combined

The

by

the

rod

block,

by

invented

to

the

end

open

next,

brass

form

and

U-shaped

Fig. 275;

of all

old

crank-pin

The

gradually.

of the

and

wear

the

Pennsylvania

company.

rod

main

the

keying

opposite directions,
from

the

of

the

the

end

as

length

the

by

design

of

of

closing the

rod

actual

the

wear,

XX.

follows:

as

open

side

the

of

end

through

passenger-locomotives.

engineer

good effect, viz.,

back

an

back

for

forward

the

from

the

closing

the

and

fast

improvements

of

section

used

their

mechanical

before,

method

be

connecting-rod

Company

crank

shall

plan

fact.)
is the

Fig. 27$
Railroad

the

of

DESIGNING.

AND

fork.
a

set-screw

less chance

for

set-screw

extends

forward
in

the
of

is

to

block.

shearing

ENGINE

DETAILS.

343

344

bolt

the
which

the

in

is not

the

and

bolt

the

offsettingof

or

on

when

the

bolt

can

be

it

Exercise

lifted

134.

(Scale 6"

The

or

all but

the

sides

The

sides

hole

to

which

of the
the

event

of

end

take

place,

can

readily be

out,

unscrewing

bolt

of

was

connected
disthe

slightly forward,

top.
shown

as

in

Fig. 275.

the

stub

but

it is also

cause
be-

largely

is

occasionally seen

stub

is

usually forged solidly on

is finished
the

be

has

be

be

in the

bored

unless
the

completed

until

after

slotted

lathe.

drilled.

than

been

motives.
loco-

on

thicker

to

are

by turning
bolt-holes

now

may

will not

hole

connecting-rod

engines,

and

brasses
brasses

marine

and

planed

the

receive

top

or

then

are

bottom

whole

marine

on

end

rod, and

the

is called

crank-pin

the

key

drawings

stationary engines

on

and

rod
used

it is often
used

thing

the

the

at

Make

"

of

form

This

out

there

foot.}

moving

and

than

if it should

even

whole

likely,the

very

in this

key

; but

design

former

by, first, driving

nut

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

off

and

The

the

top

sides, in
the

cap

bolted

on

again.
It will be

equal
does

not

the

to

weaken

cross-head, but
is constructed
A
is

diameter

detail

given

in

Exercise

(Scale 2"

it will
same

of

Fig. 65,

page

"

Make

foot.}

it

rod

is made

bolt

each

down

of the

makes

in the

the

bottom

that

seen

as

drawing

135.
=

be

this

turned

are

the

at

of

end

the

bolts

bolt, but

the

cross-head

The

the

that

seen

to

eter
diam-

threads.

This

elastic.

more

forked

half

to

of the

suit

forked

the
end

large end.
and

its

locking

arrangement

96.
drawings

as

shown

in

Fig.

276.

of

Diameter

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

"

Thurs-

gives

ton

where

a"/Dl,VP+C=

0.15

for fast

0.08

for moderate

"
/,

diameter

"

for fast

engines,

length

"

speed

of

speed

Whitham

and

larger at

diameter
the

times
the

Sennett

at

diameter

middle

in feet.

give

0.

FIG.

08

connecting-rod

d=

the

engines,

for moderate

Seatons, Marks,

For

middle,

at

"=.

J"

1.

Section.

Circular

Connecting-rod,

and

the
at

277.

crank-pin
the

cross

tapers about

gives diameter

at

"

Whitham

end

head

end.

$"

the

to

middle

necks

=~

"

60

The
foot.

VP;

gives
rod

is

DETAILS.

ENGINE

Locomotive
of

rods

Connecting-rods.
section

uniformly tapered

Depth of

than

Rod.

the

less

or

"J''less

Main

On

"

the

depth

main

rod

of

The

"

in

are

the

rod

with
the

at

stub;

sizes of

rectangular
follows:

practice as

engines

of the

depth

347

cylinders 14"
crank

end

is made

14" diameter,

over

ameter
di-

-J"

less.

Depth of

Depth of Side-rods.

"""narrower

about

at

The

"

than

he ad

cross-

end

depth
of

that

the

"/,.

the

of
stub

side-rod

end,

and

is made
of uniform

depth throughout.
Thickness

of side -rods

Pivot

Step

or

is

pressure
is carried
a

bearing
the

centre

applied

Bearing.
in the

entirely upon
of this type

bearing

of the

/,.

the
the

surfaces

bearing,

that

In

"

this

direction

of

of

the

end

oil should
from
the

the

be

under

oil, under

bearing

axis, and

shaft.

always
the

of

form

the

In

the

the
load

lubricating

introduced

tween
be-

and

in

the

influence

of

the

side

34-8

The

surface.

bearing

in

bath

surrounds

basin

oil, thus

in

the

through
of oil

the
is

from

disk

BD

shaft

of the

with

between

lugs

the

allows

by

the

of

means

of

upon

the
a

'allowing the

with
to

worn

the
allow

disk
the

whole

although
shaft

bearing adjustable, and

over

its entire
The

is

prevented
in

contact

disk
from
with

to

is

turning
the

with

lugs /.

which

fit

journal-box.

slightlyspherical and
This

coincides

-pressure

of

shaft

also

upon

rests

side

of

end
has

the

to

limited

the
a

is

slightly

journal-box

remain

become

motion,

tance
dis-

in

tact
con-

sufficiently

thus

making

the

ing
maintaining a perfect bear-

under

longer

secured

its axis

side
of

is

which

until

shaft

bush

have

capable

surface
BD

the

motion

for

upper

of the

projection

lateral

the

side

over

down

the

on

is

which

BD,

flow

under

bush

of

shaft

slightlyspherical.

set-screws

disk

the

projections E,

tipped

The

of the

of the

The

In

continuous

on

surface

is also
be

to

shaft.

sphericalprojection cast
bottom,

inner

which

the

steel

the

by

oil-

journal-

journal-boxy,

(B).

journal-boxy

journal-box

that

carried

of

shaft

side

prevent

fit the

to

bush

the

surface

upon

the
on

To

the

the

to

side

upper

is carried.

where

lubrication.

under

made

the

kept submerged

OB

insure

are

the

upon

brass

with

cast

side

under

To

BD.

is turned

the

to

on

disk

be

can

rubbing

running

Fig. 278,

oil-basin

holes, grooves

the

against turning

with

in the

the

the

entire

from

efficient

and

//, and

and

provided

rests

hole

journal-box,

end

The

which

oil passes

hole

which

upon

journal-box,
constant

through

of the

in

insuring

the

through

box

obtained

are

as

the

over

shown

oil,

of

the

the

Fig. 278

results

best

distributed

will be

centrifugalforce,

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

all
than

the
The

ordinary working
the

shaft

shaft

by

the

diameter,
flat sides

journal-box

is

ditions.
con-

and
ing
com-

hexagonal

ENGINE

DETAILS.

350

DRAWING

in cross-section, and

.S

set-screws

pivot

tapered

with

against turning

pressing against

the

journals

it to

the

diameter

the

shaft

flat faces.

for

allow

to

top

increasing

step bearing is suitable

or

the

towards

without

It is held

oil-basin.

the

is

distance

tip the required

DESIGNING.

AND

This

the

by
form

\\"

from

of

of

to

3^"

zero

at

as

the

in diameter.

As
the

the

velocity of
to

centre

friction
the

by
the
D

the

to

the

smaller

the

with

will be

will the
found

of the

per

by

and
increase

it will

be

journal, within
inch

square

tendency
the

from

will

wear

Thus

circumference.
D

varies

circumference,

velocity,the

the

pressure

more

the

at

diameter

the

surface

bearing

maximum

increases

centre

the

to

be

wear

that

seen

limits

the

on

from

mined
deter-

rubbing

faces',
sur-

reduced.

formula

which

from

(I)

where

intensityof

with

which

area,

continuously
load

total

T=

weight
Exercise

278,
a

to

HALF

planes
a

HALF

136.

carry

"

SECTIONAL

of

section

PLAN

and

of the

of

rubbing

shaft

and

bearing

1450

ELEVATION,

Ibs.

HALF

of
at

SECTIONAL

of

projected

bearing running
Ibs.

300

is the

surface, which

its attachments.
of the

Show

passing through
a

form
taken

be

inch

square

this

may
the

on

Design

load

per

pressure

form
a

shown

HALF
END

the

of

PLAN,

Fig.

ELEVATION,

SECTIONAL
centre

in

the

VIEW,
the

the

bearing,

plane

of

sec-

proportions
the

and
The

jo

the

passing through

tion

/?

disk

bearing

Scale

rnals.

of

line ab.

be made

may
are

Bearings.

vertical

by

as

in

Fig.

the

side

the
the

downward

by

caused

with

obtained,
at

is

inclination
with

generally part

one

up

Bearing

the

and
the

is also

by screwing

only

babbitt

the

be

the

provided

shaft

returned

strips.

The

with

down

to

cap

in

as

in the
the

the

will be
its

the

the

C.

The

The

is

of

280.

bearing

which

A,

In

nected
con-

and

up

this

wear

design,
and

in

move

vertical

forward

moved

bushing

is taken

wear

screws

cap

be

can

engines

of this form

shaft.

wheels,
fly-

frame-work

Figs. 279

horizontal

against

of

horizontal

on

that

up

pressures.

The

example

only, by screwing

bearings wear,
can

An

where

adjusting-gibs
up

bearings

"

take

parting

45".

at

take

to

transmitted

weight

both

line,

horizontal

adjustment

of

engine frame,

Fig. 279,

direction

is taken

the

in

crank

of the

Three-part
is shown

direction

the

generally madthe

the

to

bearing, by

two-part

of

thrust

and

vertically to
due

is effected

adjustment

horizontal

and

with

inclination

an

of

wear

centre

bearings

pull

and

pressure

Vertical

etc.

sure
pres-

greatest

horizontal

horizontal

the

by

greatest

adjustment

the

on

for

connecting-rod,

the

along

caused

wear

+ Ty

bearings carrying

have

crank-shaft

designed

be

.oSD

bush,

The

shaft, and

the

The

170.

brass

of

for all sizes

"

engine

bearing, parted

two-part

engines should
up

below

and

above

unit

constant

acting nearly vertically; consequently

will be

the

of

The

size.
Main

or

crank-shaft

the

centre

in inches

full

Crank-shaft

the

at

thickness

The

at the

dimensioned

parts

bearing

"''.

35

DETAILS.

ENGINE

as

down,

original position by renewing

is made

to

projections which

fit into
fit

over

the
the

frame,
outside

and

of

352
the

insuring that

frame, thus
To

keep

the

cap

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

DRA

(C)

it will sit

FIG.

clamping
each

too

nal.
jour-

far

and

279.

shaft, it is provided with

an

adjusting-screwat

corner.

The

lubricator

which

the

These

are

the

the

screwed

being

from

its

squarely upon

oil is

conveyed

filled with

bearing

too

consists
to

cotton

rapidly.

This

of
the
to

pocket

cast

in the

bearing through

keep
system

the

oil from

of lubrication

the

cap

holes

flowing
is

from
H.
into

efficient,

354

weight

of the

either

augmented

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

relieved

or

this

shaft, but

fly-wheelsand

may

be

of

the

transmission

the

by

pressure

power.

this

rule, and

reliable

Cap."

The
the

the

stresses

the

and

of the

cap

caused

to

well

up

flat

possible
the

around
The

plate.

bearing,

upward

the

from

sure
pres-

connecting-rod

formula

the

by

in

bearing equal

as

angularityof

the

by

the

much

as

cap

carried

is

frame

a
(C) is practically

cap

is found

the

relieve

To

of

observed

SHAFT.

THE

OF

DIAMETER

THE

TWICE

generally

is

length

the

make

is to

country,

which

one

This
used

the

transmit

to

will have

cap-studs

sufficient

pressure/'

maximum

and,

power,

of p

value

the

augmented

be

may

pressure

the

on

will be

cap

the

the

under

increased

be

gearing
that

insure

to

strength

should

the

by

cap

by

is
and

tions,
condi-

worst

Then

\oofc.
found

which

the

the

formala

"'"
where

P
R

ratio of

the

6 times
on

Then

steam-pressure

"

length

The

beam

total
"

of

throw

which

the

of

length

the

on

connecting-rod

connecting-rod

is

of crank.

cap

the

load

bending

piston ;

The

generally

is distributed

is

moment

~,

is in the
over

and

LT*
sistance

to

bending

is

Therefore

"?"/"

#'r """"';
7"
"

to

throw
made

equal

moment

to

of

condition

its entire

the

of crank.

surface.

of

re-

ENGINE

DETAILS.

355

which

from

//x/xe

"

where

of cap

length

thickness

p'

total

/=

/=

strength

of

of

cap-studs;
material,

the

Studs.

which

will be

be

may

taken

by

found

(/')on

pressure
the

by

of thread

bottom

at

maximum

is resisted

area

Area

The

"

cap

effective

their

at

Ibs.

the

of

side

X/'

cap;

between

5000

under

on

distance

Diameter

of cap

load

studs
the

CB.

the

fore
There-

formula

"

where

ft

number

of studs

strength

of

of

Table
of

the

found

Having
No.

the

having

adjusting-studs (A)
in

""""for

the

and

the

bottom

which

of the

take

the
The

area.

inch

square

is

6"

journal

is

threads,

or

diameter

of

be

to

the

made

less, and

increased

turn

diameter

nearest

(s) may

set-screws

journal

the

inch

every

at

per

of threads.

required

the

when

diameter

area

Ibs.

5000

bottom

66, from

8, page

screw

material

at

area

increased
6"

above

in

diameter.
Gibs.

The
their

thickness

"

The
at

height
/

should

of the
be

gibs (G)
equal

to

should

",

of

be
the

f,

and

shaft

diameter.

Adjusting-wedges.
wedges

and

screws,

as

"

in

Instead

Fig. 280,

of

using

another

three

adjusting

arrangement

is to

as

in

Fig.
the

The

and

wedge

one

use

gib

and

thickness

":he diameter

the

latter

the

the

of

arrangement
the

with

is in contact

of

with

adjusting-screw

one

In

282.

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

wedges

at

the

(A) -f i",

screw

frame

two

guide-pins,

the

wedge

its entire

should

top

their

and

be
width

FIG.

FIG.

three

used

are

should
The

journal (L).
in 6

to

in 8.

the

enter

taper of
The

wedge

the

distance

equal

J times
when

282.

length

be

may
be

to

the

wedges
should

than

screw

less

be

not

28

length.

of

the

from

made

sufficientlylong
when

its diameter

to

the

is full down.

wedge
Top

and

of

the

Blocks.

Bottom

part of
that

FIG.

280.

ports
sup-

the

bottom

top block

"

block

.15, of the

The

thickness

should

journal

be

t at

equal

diameter.

to

the
.23,

nest
thin-

and

ENGINE

Exercise

137.

Design

"

Fig. 279,

in

shown

steam-pressure

200

journal (D) 4".

VIEW,

the

Exercise
shown

in

an

The

bearing
and

direction

Show
the

plane

Show

also

wedges,

as

in

Exercise
shown

Ball
of

section
the

220

Ibs.

steam-

stroke

30" long,

per

in

and

PLAN,

of

J"

in

Make

PART

areas

either
D

the

SECTIONAL

the

passing through

the

of

Scale

Design

"

Fig.

282.

given

Bearings.

balls

inch,

square

'.
$""

of

form

horizontal

adjustment

drawing

281.

Fig.

conditions

shaft, thus

bearing

of

the

"

taking

8"

adjusting

the

to

crank-shaft

Make

device

of the

between

place

substituting rolling
are

reducing

the

of

Scale

the

for

friction

bush

in

and

the

foot.

consists

the

ing;
bear-

supporting

sliding friction.

only slightlyflattened

suitable

4!'to

journal

form

ment
arrange-

proportions

138.
for

and

screws

foot.

bearing

the

in Exercise

This

the

of

centre

foot.

perfect spheres placed

the

of

Fig. 280, substituting the adjusting-wedge

in

the

diameter,

PART

detail

139

shown
for

of

4."to

Scale

journal.

for

adjustment

ELEVATION,

an

of

PLAN

journal 9".

of the

diameter

vertical

HALF

SECTIONAL

bearing

in

horizontal

zontal
hori-

and
A

HALF

of

foot.

proportioned

have
a

the

diameter

SECTIONAL

crank-shaft

steam-pressure

to

HALF

to

cylinder 18"

initial

and

the

ELEVATION,

VIEW,

8"

Scale

Fig. 280,

engine having

and

Design

"

END

steam-

vertical

HALF

HALF

PLAN,

side.

138.

Show

HALF

right-hand

PLAN,

f".

of

have

to

form

10", initial

stroke

inch, and

square

the

horizontal

diameter,

bearing

ELEVATION,

SECTIONAL
END

The

in

bearing of

for

proportioned

Ibs. per

adjustment

357

crank-shaft

cylinder 9"

engine, having

the

DETAILS.

points, the

As
wear

the
the
will

35"

DRAWING

be

comparatively
the

minimum,
are

of

made
The

the

with

the
In

balls

through

the

they

roll.

line

drawn

in

of the

ball

and

points

of Balls.

speed

number

and

is

Steel

"

by crushing,

balls

direction

their

should

be

period

of revolutions

in

the

the

to

number,

into

the

the

upon

opinion

as

line

the

drawn

the

revolve

sure
pres-

other

side

on

true

do

not

depending

usefulness

would

those

to

is

larger the
the

thus

possible,

as

fewer

the

then

fail

which

they

roll.

the

proper

size

of the

the

the

There

fewer

of

ball

balls
a

to

will

of

is

the

shaft, and

number

by

that

reducing

practicallimit

balls

upon

indicate

to

seem

would

to

of

proportion

therefore

bearing

surfaces
of

that

and

The

points.

fact

in

pressure

pressure

increasing their strength; but' there

owing

wise
other-

have

rolling under

This

large

as

in which

balls

when

entirely avoided.

balls

pressure.

the

will

of

of friction.

contact-point on

(as in Fig. 285), then

sliding friction

Size

in the

form

45",

amount

for

pass

only

of

four-point bearing

through

pass

the

axis, but

true

of the

should

acts

angle

an

is suitable

roll

contact

one

results

considerable

In

at

ing
accord-

in

Thus

give good

Fig. 284

only.

load

will

on

have

through

points.

revolve

they

designated

are

two

acts

to

which

balls

the

pressures

therefore

shown

should

which

other

not

and

one

acts

both

that

Fig. 283

will

direction

of the

points

amount

possible.

as

bearings

in

of all the

design

vertical

the

in

motion

axis

the

hard

as

the

upon

of ball

direction

shown

surfaces

which

upon

between

the

fail

the

resultant

The

of

reduce

to

the

tempered

number

in

bearing

screw

and

forms

DESIGNING.

so,

three-point bearing

midway

the

steel

surfaces

points

rapid ;

balls

different

to

AND

this
be

bearing
crushing

versity
great di-

in relation

to

ENGINE

load

and

The

speed.

average

proportion

of shaft

used

DETAILS.

size

horizontal

NO.

TABLE

thickness

The

Ball

Races.

balls

roll

should

not

ball, and

the

width

W=

the

of the

angles
a

race

"

This

of balls.
second

to

safe

be

to

.003

assume

diameter

Dl of the

Fig. 285

the

ball

as

circle

1
=

table

to

of

sines

whole

number;

The

d
I

sin

ball

each

pair

80"

place,
of

amount

fore
there-

taking the

2d.

In

d+c

find

every

into

Then
=

The

it will

.004;

80

-~

the

angle

80"

of balls
if not,

and

number

balls.

of the

6 in

degrees

sponding
corre-

Then

x.

The

balls

2t

"

211

From

In

the

practice.

(d)

left between

to

which

upon

diameter.

45".

.002

360"
angle $0

ball

get

good
=

fair

diameter

diameter

made

the

from

made

generally

is

clearance

the

rolling of

free

the

the

surfaces

J the

first to

is necessary,

insure

the

(c)is

clearance

of

slight amount

(/)of

generally

are

grooves

ball to

37.

times

i"

gives

37

bearings.

less than

be

No.

of the

diameter

practice for

in

in Table

given

of the

359

we

must
must

be

80"

(4)

within

increase

.001

the diameter

of

being

Z?,. Thus

360

DRAWING

supposing
increase

that

D^

formula

Taking

No

get in the

to

21,

DESIGNING.

AND

we

gives n

whole

next

find

can

then

20.75,

must

we

of balls.

number

Z", by the formula

(5)

I8o"
sin

Load

bearing

Bearings.

on

is

function

FIG.

"

of

As

already explained,

both

speed
FIG.

283.

and

load.

284.

the

life of

Therefore

FIG.

if

286.

A4U"

FIG.

the

speed
or

the

is

285.

increased, the load

the

proportion

life of
of

ball

the
to

be

must

bearing will
the

shaft

be

correspondingly
shortened.

diameter

given

creased
de-

Using
in

Table

362
balls

the

The

minimum.

in the

while

cages

are

not

be

should

the

large cages
balls

made

from

less than

f%"
" the

on

to

piece, as

one

in

positionby springing the

top is fastened
in

are

to

in

runs

is reduced

grooves

made

are

ball

every

wear

put into

are

side, by rivets, after the

The

to

cages

balls

thus

spirals
;

tendency

small

the

and

Fig. 287,
cage,

the

DESIGNING.

AND

in

arranged

are

path, and

separate
a

WING

DRA

to

position, as
The

\" thick.

diameter

of

the

in

under

Fig.

288.

thickness

the

ball, and

(t)
the

DR

FIG.

288.

distance

centres

The

hub

be

ball

races

is screwed

greater than

diameter
L

J".

than

are

the

to

287.

shaft

"

of

2t

of
be

may

diameter.

diameter

means

3*/, but

the ball

ball

by

of which

of

not

apart.

one

made
less

or

.2D,

more

than

but

%D.

.12D.
D'

or

of the

less

not

(5),the

set-screws

should

The

not

FIG.

over.

subjected

2D
The

when
load

is less than

and

will determine

speed
the

to

2",

and

which

number

1.7 when

this

type of

of balls.

is 2"

bearing is

Taking

the size

proportion

of ball in
No.

then

37,

from

to

3"53

DETAILS.

ENGINE

the

of the

shaft

from

Table

bearing

of the

form

shown

diameter
6

No.

formula

fc
Exercise

141.

in

Fig. 287

at

speed

for

"

Design
4" shaft,

the

walls

passed through
will

adjust

rod.

To

"

of

shows

any
a

vertical

Scale

leakage,

full

when

filled with

elastic

an

material

the

irregularitieson

surface
for

stuffing-box suitable

to

the

may

cylinder-head,

cylinder-head,as

in

Fig.

290.

work
rod

is

which
of

the

horizontal

289.

piston-rod? and

stuffing-box SB

run

size.

rods

Fig. 290

be
as

made
in

for

arranged

one

steam-engine piston-rod.

The
bolted

760 Ibs. and

containing fluid, the

FIG.

steam-engine

of

per minute.

chamber

load

carry

prevent

cavity

itself to

Fig. 289

to

revolutions

of 600

Stuffing-boxes.
through

thrust

separate

Fig. 289,

Part

of

the

or

box

cast

SB

piece
with

and
the

is bored

DRAWING

AND

FIG.

DESIGNING.

290.

ENGINE

the

larger than

of

is

which

in

as

"

generally decided
box

the

box

the

longer

The

the

would

require

made

under

will the

2D

\\D

\\D
D

.7$L

/, =

in diameter,
brass

for

the

of

stuffing-box
which

under
for

than

the

low

longer

the

last.
suitable

are

be

for

used

2"

between

4"

"

for

average

high

sures
pres-

pressure,

often

in

but

diameter;
"

"

4" in diameter

for rods

over

in nearest

\D

3"

and

3"

"

it is used

high

are

less in diameter;

or

"

"

ing
pack-

gland G,

4"

with

conditions,

any

could

2"

for rods
"

under

repacked comparatively

for rods

the

lined

longer

packing

and

be

to

The

down

rods

conditions

generally

speeds,

tallow.

or

iron

cast

following proportions
and

of

proportions

However,

pressure.

packing consisting

by screwing
for

leaving a

Fig. 290.

by

is

oil

brass

and

The

Proportions.

thus

of

Fig. 289,

larger rods,

the

with

rod

generally made
in

as

is filled with

which

the

thus

piston-rod PR,

saturated

pressed against

is

of the

rod

material

fibrous

the

around

space

diameter

365

DETAILS.

T^

;
.

/?'=

1.75/7 +.25;

d=

.2D;

C=

\\D-\-2d;

"

2D;

d'

Exercise

is to
Make

/=.5/?

be
D

142.

used,
=

Exercise

i";

"

for

i%"
143

Draw
a

from

f"

stuffing-box, in

to

which

J".
soft

packing

horizontal-engine piston-rod (Fig. 289).

in diameter.
"

=.

Draw

Scale

full size.

stuffing-box (Fig. 290), in which

366

DRA

soft

is to

packing

8"

Scale

1".

Metallic

devised

Packing.

in

shown

design showing

the

and

in

cut

are

in

will

joint
is

face

with
free

binds

the

to

rod
from

movement)

by

Metallic

rock
nor

the

144.

Packing

"

which

the

flat

the

casing

on

constrains

flange
P

or

Draw
shown

face
G

with
the

on

back

of

the

or

P'

which

the

by
the

spring

forced

follower

F.
into

close

and

against

rests

ball-and-socket

P'

As

the

ring R,

which

cup

packing
The

way.
rod

spiral

follower

the

of

The

the

the

form

section.

is

packing

B, and

cup

forms

it in any

back

in

on

of

"double

cup-rings

preventer

or

the

being

The

drawing

preventer

Exercise

PR.

casing
on

and

//, the

cup

ring R,

outer

prevented

the

shaped

the

slide

to

conical,

are

form

piston-rods

cylinder

acting

the

Metallic

of this

the

cup

the

of

ordinary

partly

the

nearer

piston-rod

of

the

is free

turn

the

against
flat

the

with

and

the

rings A,
into

One

as

Fig. 291

steam-pressure

correspondingly

press

is known
of

packings

States

application

front

forced

packing

the

by

United

babbitt-metal

the

vertical

metallic

the

In

the

and

and

rings A, By

the.

aided

be

The

On

5.

spring

of

packings.

sets

tandem.

of

halves

of

cylinder-cover

soft

form

practically two

consists

packing

This

section

in

shown

of

high-pressure steam-engine

291.
is

Thickness

the
as

packing arranged
is

replace
known

for

cylinder

designs

Many

"

is that

Fig.

packing"

4" '.

H.-P.

foot.

to

suitable

packing

the

to

successful

most

Packing.

been

have

used, for the

be

Make

steam-engine.

DESIGNING.

AND

WING

never

packing

(beyond
coming

in

in

is

small

contact

P1 '.
the
in

arrangement

Fig. 291.

Scale

of

United

full

size.

States

ENGINE

DETAILS.

mm
IH

HALVES

SPRINGS
4 cms

Ba,Cnwt
wrmit

+"
ii

D. R.

FIG.

291.

CUTOUT

OUTSIDE

DUM"

368

inclined

of its

it out
the

is

To

straight path.

piston-rod

is

end

bend

unless

the

provided

with

to

special

an

or

rence
occur-

which

cross-head

the

piston-rod
such

prevent

it

moving

according

running, and,
to

is

piston

pressure

tend

would

employed,

are

means

engine

is

connecting-rod

the

in which

downward

or

the

the

When

"

direction

upward

an

in which

direction

force

the

toward

will exert

Guides.

and

Cross-heads

DESIGNING.

AND

DRAWING

R
FIG.

slides

surfaces

on

that

292.

the

parallelwith

are

piston-rod,

called

guides.
Blocks.

Cross-head
before
the

connecting-rod

nearly

at

will reach

right angles

Taking

L
R

/'

load
"

of the

intensity of
velocity of
area

the

off

obliquity of
the

is

crank

(Fig. 292).

connecting-rod

steam-pressure

by

cut

piston ;

on

V=
A

thrust

line BO

is not

steam

when

maximum

the

with

caused

thrust

the

midstroke,,then

that

Assuming

"

of the

per

pressure
cross-head

per

inch

R:\BO\AO.

inch

square

in feet

bearing-surfacein

then
L:

square

per

minute;

square

inches,

"

37"

DRAWING

resultant
resistance
shown

the

at

in

the

by

velocity

inch

projected

the

and

the

cross-head

have

will

its

of

point

rubbing-surfaces,

the
the

allowable

inch.

in

/)"

total

load

piston, i.e., the

of

the

per

that

says

as

is taken

pin

is

generally

inch

square

as

pressure

per

the

made

inch

of

maximum
X

to

is

much

as

initial steam-pressure

pin

the

in direction

square

as

cross-

joint, as

the

Ibs. per

1200

the

on

of

designs

some

exceed

(d X

form

pressure

Seaton

never

the

to

constantly changing

high, reaching

length

is attached
this

In

pressure

the

should

the

on

guides

connecting-rod

square

area

When

piston,

The

magnitude,

Ibs. per

load

the

pin CP, Fig. 293.

comparatively

square

of

centre

"

is low

and

1400

on

Fig. 292.

Wrist-pin.
head

(K)

pressure

DESIGNING.

IND

of

area

equal

from

1.3^.

to

Taking

the

length

"/, then

p
When

the

length

of the

value

of/'

d"

VL-^-^o

pin

equal

is made

of its diameter,

to

then

Taking

amply

the

pin proportioned
strong

Guide-bars.
frame

the

cross-head

resist

to

When

"

guides
are

are

turned

then

1200,

and

either

to

VL

of the

30.

above

formulae

(10)

will be

bending.
the

guiding-surfaces

bored
as

and
in

the

are

part

of the

bearing-surfaceson

Fig. 297.

This

the

arrangement

ENGINE

DETAILS.

371

3/2

DRAWING

the

reduces

it

as

to
liability

in

of

(when

cross-head

the

joints is
the

varying

taken

cross-head

of

Strength
when

occurs

bending
bending

The
to

which

the

Guides.

Where

is

as

bars

(CB) project

the

stroke

of

made

be

may

Guide.
on

the

this arrangement
side

greatest

nearly
the

an"3

is the

which

over

the

at

on

pressure
the

at

centre.

of

moment

modulus

Guide-bars

the
=

"

length
i"

of

The

of the

verticallyby

of

of

end

the

bars

Then

the

resistance

to

section, given in

clearance,

shown

in

is

Fig. 293

(Atlas Engine

Works).

294.

pressure

cross-head

-f-end

end.

cycloidal engine

the

is

distance-pieces

block

the

arrangement

piston-rod,
the

between

each

at

FIG.

each

of

29.

Length

used

The

"

RL'
is =~z~

fZ.

Four-bar

With

travel

connecting-rod

the

across

of rectangular

iron).
the

to

the

on

wear

blocks

cross-head

moment

No.

Table

that

ridges, due

cut

are

of cast

ing-surface
bear-

stroke.

each

the

as

the

generally

(when

section
of

grooves

up,

the

of

ends

the

also

but

separate

are

in

good point

labor

made

guide-bars

formation

the

prevent

the

steel)or

always
the

When

fittingup.

flat,and

is

decreases

only

not

error

are

To

of parts, which

number

designing,

DESIGNING,

AND

which

Pis
is

equally
guided

sliding on

the

distributed

laterallyas
inner

surfaces

on

well
of

ENGINE

G.

guide-bars

the

head

the

by

The

boxes,

should

of the

cross-head,

head
which

the

each

on

The

No.

the

than
held

is

the

Fig.

of

position by

generally

made

may

form

iron

cast

of

guide-bar

steel, and

or

then

calculating for

both

ends

the

and

used

in this

of

bar
at

found

the

in the

their

length.

determined

be

may

following
and

the

by

the

the

made
manner

secured

h "A the

height

of

length L,

rectangular section,

centre,

by

design

breadth

the
a

loaded

will be

centre

bearing-

proportioned

determined

Having

set-

Then

8.

4
The

"

be

cross-

of the

b of the
to

that

piston-rod,

means

equal

bearing-surfaces

with
the

the

breadth

the

stuffing-

coincide
of

cross-

prevent

the

shank

diameter

in

To

on

not

the

the

to

294.

pressure

through

arrangement

bar

of

area

formula

this

in

piston-rod

hole

and

is secured

undue

of the

larger

In

5.

surfaces

axis

3/3

PR

shown

exerting

adjustable

is

screws

the

made

is

piston-rod

arrangement

piston-rod from

the

DE7*AILS.

at

bar

at

equation

RL'

btf_
_

which

from

XL'X6
,

where

Take

(h X
Then
web

h'

b)

"

the
-7-

be

may

4#.

taken

.75

3000

h, then

(A'X b),and
height

at

taking

of the

web

for cast
the
the
at

area

iron, and
of

thickness
the

centre

the

for steel.

6000
web

/-of the
will

will
web

equal

be
=

area

.4^.
of

374

DRAWING

The

guides
be

strain

greatest
the

to

made
of

J"

in

verticallyby

the

bars.

the

cylinder

145,

Draw

2".

or

The

case

both

the

to

which

faces
rubbing-sur-

the

guide-

upper

bars

15"

guide

suitable

293

for

stroke.

inch.

through

the

cross-head

engine having

an

Initial

Speed
four

and

revolutions

300

times

sure
steam-pres-

the

length

per
of

the

foot.
of

the

the

adjusting-nut
of

arrangement

and

fastening

diameter

of

the

the
the

cross-

piston-

piston-rod

full size.
"

When

cross-head

of

and

the

above

below

one

shown

type

the
is

arrangement

guide-bars

two

above

one

guide-bars

latter

are

adjusted

Fig. 295,

to

lower

bars

are

The

on

four-bar

connecting-rod

details

either
a

in

made

are

the

bars

GB.

the

to

Fig.

square

Guide.

arranged

blocks

cross-head, taking the

Scale

bars

and

The
shown

Nt

nut

the

in

show

Two-bar

this

Draw

"

4"

and

the

B,

may

curacy
slight inac-

any

by oil-cupsscrewed

per

also

pin,
to

the

in diameter

Scale

crank.

rod

12"

and

minute,

S'

guide-bar

shown

Ibs.

75

bolts

They

up.

the

through

of the
screw

for

the

secure

cross-head.

the

on

arrangement

head

the

allow

holes

which

screwing

to

To

oil is transmitted

Exercise

of

lubricated
The

holes

is due

diameter

means

into

are

stud-bolts

the

adjusted laterally by

is screwed

the

diameter.

workmanship,

larger than

Ty

DESIGNING

engine-frame
i

on

AND

the
in

used

shown

commonly

used

they

are

piston-rod (in

Fig. 297

as

piston

one

are

in

is

used)

Fig. 296.

in locomotive

construction.
The
is

running

pressure

is

on

the

running forward,
back

and

as

the

guide, UG,

upper
and

on

engine

the
is

lower

generally

when

the

tive
locomo-

guide, LG,
run

forward

when
more

ENGINE

DETAILS.

375

DRAWING

back, the

than

than

smaller
In

this

with

top

and

of the

slide-block

position, it

by driving

fit and

steel

be

may

strips of
the

remove

shank

the

tapered

cast

has

is cut

made

provided

babbitt

after

the

the

bolts

through

cotter

and

metal

piston-rod easily

and,

down

gripped by screwing

is

bar

C is of

which

SB

To

cross-head,

lower

upper.

cross-head

the

design

bottom.

the

from

the

bearing-surface on

that

brass

DESIGNING.

AND

rod

CB

it and

is in

and

the

cured
se-

cross-

shank.

head

hole

The

guide-blocks

and

end

to

allow

The

146.

pin CP,

cross-head

Cross-heads.

as

in

be

the

to

296,

at

one

ment
arrange-

foot.

guide-block

W.

take

the

or

cylinder

guide-bar

SB,

Scale
the

up

accomplished

and

Figs. 293

to

washer

Adjustments

may

and

slide-blocks

C, and

pin.

other.

cross-head

j"

cross-head

the

to

the

at

Scale

cotter

"

original setting
bars,

the

the

of

details

Also

frame

Fig. 296.

in

shown

lubricatingthe
fastened

are

Draw

"

for

GB

guide-bar

Exercise

is to

half

size.

or

for

wear

by moving

GB,

the

guide-

slide-blocks, as

in

Fig.

297.
this

In

the

design

connecting-rod

which

end,

case-hardened

is of

piston-rod
by

screwed

the
has

for the
The

nut

diameter

is hollowed

upon

the

kept

from

is

to

receive

pin CP.

The

turning

the

pin

by

the

K.

is screwed
The

LN.

flat surfaces
nut

and

screw

PR

works

steel

^-inch square-headed
The

cross-head

on

into

socket
the

the

into

top and

cross-head
which

bottom

the
to

and
rod

give

PR

cured
se-

is

ance
clear-

N.
at

the

end

of the

socket

is

equal

to

the

dis-

3/8

DRAWING

tance

the

across

DESIGNING.

AND

flats, and

"

back

tapers

of

inch

an

the

to

larger diameter.
bearing-surfaces

The
the

corresponding

are

bored

the

up

surfaces

inclined
for

of

diameter

the

Exercise

Fig.

Scale

full

and

required
the

d draw

de

The

bottom

of

of

the

the

the

cross-head,

holes

horizontal

this

To

movement.

horizontally,on

cross-head

SIDE

of

minus

the

motion

the

ELEVATION,

and

the

form
END

SECTIONAL

find

vertical

they

of

the

shown

in

ELEVATION

the

PLAN,

centre

the

from
C

to

line drawn

centre

the

draw

equal

the

inclination

plane

cross-head

of

pin.

line

off.

on

of the

pin

CP

motion

the

at

of the

vertical

through

cd

the

to

necessary

mark

movement,

the horizontal

to

lateral

the

inch.

an

To

"

distance

through

equal

by

with

projections on

move

length

they fit,

provided

are

over

their

which

and

size.

Construction.

ab

the

passing through

section

the

of

SECTION,

IN

fit

turned,

are

upon

blocks

top and

to

showing

297,

PARTLY

the

Draw

"

The

prevent

studs, and

147.

frame,

slide-blocks

equal

verticallyT^

move

to

upon

distance

the

on

sides, which

the

wear,

slide-blocks

radius.

same

cross-head,

top of the
take

surfaces

under

the

on

grooves

the

to

the

on

the
to

line

centre

the

right angles

give

point C,
ab

to

slide-blocks, and

and

through

movement.

points

will have

ce

the

required

inclination.

Fig. 298
cruiser
of the

shows

Olympia.

form

In

this

cross-head, and

connecting-rod
cross-head

end.

by

the

of

design

there
The
bolts

cross-head

are

the

To

on

the

wrist-pin CP

SB

allow

are

the

secured
removal

U.

S.

is outside

bearing-surfaces

two

slide-blocks
B.

used

on

the

to

the

of

the

ENGINE

lipsL
the

bolts

Fig.

by
is

299

the

the

of

removal

The

held
the

piston-rod

shown

nut

in

of the

position,one
and

Fig. 67,

sketch

isometric

an

is in

is removable

S.

set-screws

cross-head

the

block

facilitate

To

with

provided

each

on

B.

cross-head

the

while

slide-blocks

379

DETAILS.

of

in

place by

piece L,

PR

it is

is secured

to

100.

page

the

jecting
pro-

complete

cross-

head.
FIG.

299.

FIG.

Exercise
head

"

in

shown
and

PLAN,
section

Draw

148.

Fig.

radius

the

crank

of

of

PLAN

the

centre

the

ELEVATION,

FRONT

of

of

the

form

top, the

the

cross-

wrist-pin.

HALF

plane

of

Scale

4.

foot.

Eccentrics.
the

Show

299.

passing through

incites to the

general arrangement

SECTIONAL

HALF

298.

"

eccentric

The

crank-pin

and

the

is

is greater than

shaft,

as

shown

the
in

of
sum

Fig.

in which

crank
of the
300,

radii of

where

the

380

DRAWING

is shown

crank
It

by

for

is used

and

the

as

(owing
is used

in

circular

The

distance

sheave.
the

eccentricity

from

the

The

stroke

of

eccentric

is

Fig.

represents

301

slide-valve

of

generally

called

passed

to

on

of

centre

equal

to

the

the

shaft

the

eccentric

is

the

o-

the

acts)it

comparatively

to

eccentric
the

The

pulley.
end

for

used

the

over

friction

crank

is
of

centre

worked

the
the

by

throw.

engine.

position

the

crank,

the

than

throw

of

locomotive
sheave

of

reciprocating piece

twice
an

that

motion.

300.

throw

or

with

which
the

full lines.

by

reciprocating

power

at

where

FIG.

short.

into

more

leverage

preference only

eccentric

is identical

absorbs

greater

the

lines, and

its action

eccentric

the

to

dotted

converting

this purpose

For

DESIGNING.

AND

of

the

working

eccentric
When

it

shaft, the

proper
cannot

sheave

the
is

be
is

the

screws

of

centre

centre

the

partsT^

in two

made

the

shaft

may

used

that part.

in

The

P', parted

and

at

eccentric, and

line of the

strain

and

come

on

381

DETAILS.

ENGINE

eccentric-rod

line

right angles
held

the stronger

fasteningthe

on

sheave
"7?

passing through

to

the

together by

horizontal

studs.

part, /", the key and

to

the

is secured

shaft
to

are

the

That

set-

placed

on

strap 5 by

382
bolts

the

when

the

Proportions.
"", with

"

will

then

found

by

DESIGNING.

hole

through

that

the

thickness

the

for

strap,

rod

ER

may

be

of

the

sheave

the

adjusted

valve.
The

"

AND

elongated

is

B^

setting

\D

The

"1 B^ B^

centre-bolt

be

WPNG

DRA

-f-2r

\"

of

minimum

The

sheave

breadth

The

2/.

of the

diameter

be

may

of

sheave

the

may

formula

the

L
=

where

load

D'

==

diameter

allowable

ft "="

Breadth

of

resist

where

of

size
the

d^

"

X:

key

key

of

load

the

diameter

"='

load

safe

The
the

two

size

should

have

i" times

"

strap-bolts
the

by

the

at

by

per

of
of

maximum

the

thickness.

5^

should

projected
100

Ibs.

bottom
the

of the

eccentric

of bolts, which

square

bolts, may

be

be

proportioned

to

eccentric.

threads;

may

be

taken

at

2000

inch.

rod-bolts, assuming

inch

square

.iD.

strength

of the

fitted

per

driven

Ibs.

sheave;

pressure

driven

===

f't

the

of

eccentric

the

by

which

area,

Thickness

The

driven

^x7'

found

by

the
the

load

formula

is resisted

by

f
C

taken

be

may

between

at

centres

The

marked

parts

for

3000

made

be

may

383

DETAILS.

ENGINE

distance

^d'.

decimals

in

The

iron.

wrought

proportional

are

to

B,

the

breadth.

Exercise

and

area

the

through

the

ER

"'

per

pressure

shown

views

towards

looking"

VIEW

proportioned

301,

to

carry

inch

square

of

load

of

projected

Ibs.

50

Draw

Fig.
the

taking

Ibs.,

2300

in

eccentric-sheave

of

arrangement

"

shown

strap

the

Draw

149

eccentric

1".

Scale

in

the

at

Fig.

right,
the

half

line

size.

301

also

the

plane

cd.

Make

SECTIONAL

of

section

the

END

passing

eccentric-rod

386

INDEX.

Connecting-rods,
Co.,

Engine

Buckeye

Connecting-rods,
341

Connecting-rods,

Diameter

Connecting-rods,

Erie

Works,

of, 346
Iron

City

341

Marine,

Connecting-rods,

344

Diameter

Cylinder,

Length

of steam,
of

Cylinder, Steam,

steam,

329

328

Thickness

Cylinder,

328

of

Cylinder

head,

Cylinder

steam-port,

328

steam,

329
329

D
of locomotive,

Proportions

Connecting-rods,

Design,

347

machine,

Elementary
of

Design

spur

29

271

gear,

26

Constructions,

Standard,

Conventions,

20

32

Cotter
Cotter

Cylinder,

Railroad

Penn.

Connecting-rods,
Co.'s, 343

Copper,

flange fastenings, 69

Cylinder

339

gib,

and

locking

Cotter,

Throw

Eccentric,

of, 117

of, 382

of, 380

Elasticity, 37

116
Box

Couplings,

Cast-iron

or

Couplings,

Converse

Couplings,

Flanged
for

Elasticity,

165

muff,

Couplings,

Couplings

379

Eccentrics, Proportions

122

arrangement,

Taper

Cotters,

Eccentrics,

120

Elastic

pipe,

190

brass

limit, 37
details, 305

Engine

pipe, 197
shaft, 178

Engine-frame

and

Expansion,

copper

pipes,

of, 37

Modulus

bed-plate, 326

or

308

203

Couplings,

Frictional,

Couplings,

Hill

plate, 171

Couplings,

Jaw

clutch,

Couplings,

Loose

Couplings,

Pipe,

Couplings,
Couplings,

Propeller shaft, 185

Rigid, 164

Couplings,

Screwed

flange pipe, 198

Gearing,

Belt, 238

Couplings,

Screwed

socket,

Gearing,

Toothed,

Couplings,

Sellers

Couplings,

Shaft,

Couplings,

Spiral jaw,

Couplings,

Spigot

174

Figuring,

181

Factor

flange, 195

clamp,

200

171

164

Couplings,

Stuart's

Couplings,

Universal

socket

pipe,

167

clamp,

176

joint, 185

Wrought-iron

and

pipe, 196
376

Cross-heads

blocks,
and

Cross-sections,

368

guides, 368
26

Gears,

Bevel,

Gears,

Involute

Gears,

181

and

Split muff,

Cross-head

38
218

Drop-hanger,

Frame,

193

Cross-heads,

safety, The,

190

Couplings,

Couplings,

19

of

steel-

262

270

Gears,

Walker

Worm,

pinion,

and

Spur-wheel

Gears,

263

toothed,

of, 267

system
271

Gear-wheels,

Arms

of, 274

Gear-wheels,

Hubs

of, 276

Gear-wheels,

Rims

of, 275

Gear-wheels,

Shrouding

Guide,

Four-bar,

Guide,

Two-bar,

372
374

Guide-bars,

370

Guide-bars,

Length

Guides,

Strength

of, 276

of, 372
of, 372

268

387

INDEX.

Nut,
Introductory,

Instructions,
Instruments,

Jam,

92

devices,

Nut-locking
Nut-lock,

Circular,

Nut-lock,

Spring

Nut-lock,

Wile's, 95

J
proportions

and

Forms

99

washer,

with

sluts locked

Joint,

106

Oil-cups,

steam-pipe

Joints, Riveted,

ball,

125

Pin-joint, Knuckle,
Pins, Split,

no

Saddle,

Key,

Sliding feather,

Key,

109

Keys,

109

Keys,

Fixed,

Keys,

Strength

Lead,
Lead

Load,

of, 114

307

194

Piston,

Locomotive,

Piston,

Macintosh

Piston,

Water,

connection,

Locomotive

dome

332

Steam,

Point

cut-off, 308

of

Locomotive

fire-box

guard,

ring,

154

Locomotive

plain slide-valve,

Locomotive

tube-setting,

Materials,

30

Materials,

Strength

Metallic

guard,

155

Metallic
Muntz

32

366

packing,

United

metal,

32

Nut,

convention,
Hexagon,

All

India-rubber

valve-

282
of

283

wrought-steel,

Pulley, Rope,

255

Pulleys, Proportions
Pulleys, Proportions
States,

250

split, 248

Wood

of, 244
of cone,

255

366
Resistance,

37

Riveted

butt-joint, Double,
144
148
Triple,
butt-joint,

63

Riveted

joint, Calculation

Riveted

lap-joints,Double,

60

369
valv"-

251

Riveted

Nut

surfaces,

India-rubber

Pulley, Cone,
Pulley,

of, 36

packing,

335

305

castingss

of

Proportions
Pulley,

Malleable

332,

rubbing

on

Seymour's, 336

340

Pistons,

Projection

156

334

"

Pistons,

Pressure

365

308

clearance,

112

307

Lettering,

333

Company's,

338
Piston

angle,

Engine

Buckeye

Piston,

Company's,

Engine

Ball

Piston,

113

of, 189

Thickness

Pipes,
113

no

Woodruff,

105

Pipes, 189

Key,

Key, Sunk,

104

104

Taper,

Pins.
112

232

106

pin-joints,

and

Pins
114

Key,

Self-lubricating,

Pedestal,
K

Flat,

308

200

206.

Key-heads,

299

Overtravel,

Joint, Locomotive

Round,

96

set-screws,

Joint, Knuckle,
Joint, Lap, 143

Key,

94

of cotter,

118

Journals,

92

of, 136
139

388

INDEX.

Proportions of,

Rivet-head,

of, 128

Form

Rivet-heads,

Riveting, Chain,
Rivet-shank,

the

joints,

the

Screws,

Table

of

Table

of, 136

stances,
sub-

of

of timber,

weight

the

46

circumferences

the

and

circles, 47

of

threads,

screw

Table

of

saddle

Collar, 85

Table

of

rectangular

Holding

Table

of

single-riveted joints,

Table

of

single-riveted joints, 136

of, 88

power

55

Screw-thread,

Knuckle,

55

Screw-thread,

Seller's

U.

or

ard,
stand-

S.

Screw-thread,

Square,

Screw-thread,

Standard

Screw-thread,

Whitworth,

Shade

lines

Shaft,

To

and

find

Shafting,
Shafting, Line,
Sole-plates,

15
of

steel, 159

of Sellers

Table

of

flanged

Table

of

jaw

34

Stuffing-boxes, 363

Strength

of

steel, 39

Strength

of

wrought

Proof,

Strength,

Ultimate,

couplings,
cast-iron

180

183

pipe

192

pipe couplings,

Pope

of

steam-pipe

Table

for brass,

pipes,

196

connections,

206

andwrought-

copper,
204

Table

of

sections,

205

Table

of

thickness

of

Table

of

proportions

belting,
of

243,

244

cone

pulleys,

rope

pulleys,

255
Table

proportion

of

of

258, 261
iron, 39

Strength,

174

couplings,

standard

Table

36
iron, 38

of cast

couplings,

shaft

of

iron

227

stress,

of

clamp

Table

34

Strength

butt-joints,

clutch

flanges,

229

Steel, Siemens-Martins,

141

butt-joints,

triple-riveted

Table

of, 162

163

Steel, Bessemer,

135

lap-joints, 144

double-riveted

of

Table

157

Hollow,

in

149

for, 59

164

Deflection

no

keys,

joints,

double-riveted

of

Table

53

shading,

Shaft-couplings,

and

of double-riveted
of

keys,

sunk

147

pipe, 56

diameter

70

flat

Table

55

Conventions

Screw-threads,

and

Table
Table

51

Strain

various

of

of

Buttress,

Steps,

metals,

Table

Screw-thread,

Shafts,

weight

125

of, 130

Cap, 85

Screws,

of

46

areas

Screw,

melting-point

46

of

Table

Length

Pitch

Rivets,

of
etc.,

139

riveted

and

Rivets

Table

130

38

Table,

Odontagraph,

Table

of

37

265, 266
disk

India-rubber

valves,

290
Table

of

locomotive-piston

tions,
propor-

334
of ultimate

Table

and

elastic

strength,

of

Table
Table

40
of

metals,

Table

of

tenacities

Table

of

weights

Table

of

wrought

iron

Table

of

different

colors

Table

of

decimal

equivalents

and

valve

40
41

measures,

welded

of

tubes,

disks,

inch, 45

of

steam-cylinders^

328
V

of iron, 45
one

India-rubber

283

of thickness

Table

pipes, 189
of

thickness

44

of

of

thickness

Valve,

Allen-Richardson

Valve,

American

balance,

balance,
310

309

389

INDEX.

Valve,

Angle

Valve,

Ball,

Valve,

Boiler

Valve,

Cocks

of

advance

307

295
oil

and

diagram,

The

Valve

diagram,

The

278

cup,

Bilgram,

foot

Globe,

Valve,

India-rubber,

Valve,

Inside

of

slide,

Valve,

Lead

Valve,

Overtravel

Valve,

Lift

Valve.

Plain

slide,

280

slide,

308

307

of

slide,

wing,

308

Point

of

Point

of

cut

Valve,

Point

of

exhaust

of

slide,

slide,

of
of

285
292

Wall

box

Wall

brackets,

of,

307

or

slide,

305

308
305

frames,

hanger,

post
of

Wooden

teeth
used

or

in

42

263

cogs,

construction,

35

17

370

metals,
iron,

UNIVERSITY

water-pipes

drawings,

Wrought

**5s?fc

223

cast-iron

Wrought
Wrought-iron

211

2id/

Weights

Wrist-pin,

admission

off

Travel

Working

305

Valve,

stop,

Valve,

Woods

285

Valve,

spindle,

Valve,

Wall
of

slide,

Valve,

278

clearance

or

compression

290

292

of

of

320

disk,

strainer,

and

Valve,
Valve,

313

Zeuner,

India-rubber

Flat

Point

Valve,
305

check,

Valve

Valve,

slide,

of

288

33

Specific
welded

of,

gravity
tubes,

44

40